Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
Feature Description
for PKG 5.0.0
Provides the Feature ID, dependency & limitation, and detailed description from the
point of view of high level design.
Radio Access Network
SNMTC-v3-0312
This manual should be read and used as a guideline for properly installing and/or operating the
product. Owing to product variations across the range, any illustrations and photographs used in
this manual may not be a wholly accurate depiction of the actual products you are using.
This manual may be changed for system improvement, standardization and other technical
reasons without prior notice.
Samsung Networks documentation is available at http://www.samsungdocs.com
Contents
Preface vi
Relevance ........................................................................................................................................ vi
Conventions in this Document ........................................................................................................ vi
New and Changed Information ...................................................................................................... vii
Revision History ............................................................................................................................... ix
Organization of This Document ....................................................................................................... x
Related Documentation ................................................................................................................... x
Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement 1
LTE-ME2019, DL SU 2x2 MIMO (TM3 and TM4) .............................................................................. 1
LTE-ME2020, Rx Diversity ................................................................................................................. 6
LTE-ME2022, DL SU 4x4 MIMO (TM3 and TM4) .............................................................................. 9
LTE-ME2023, DL SU 4x2 MIMO (TM3 and TM4) ............................................................................ 15
LTE-ME5110, FDD Carrier Aggregation (5+5) ................................................................................. 20
LTE-ME5111, FDD Carrier Aggregation (3+5) ................................................................................. 22
LTE-ME5112, FDD Carrier Aggregation (3+3) ................................................................................. 24
LTE-ME6004, DL Smart ................................................................................................................... 26
LTE-ME6005, UL Smart (Interference Coordination for UL) ........................................................... 32
Chapter 2 Call Control 38
LTE-SW0111, UE Counting per Category ........................................................................................ 38
LTE-SW0114, Enhancements for Diverse Data Applications .......................................................... 41
LTE-SW0315, Extended Access Barring (SIB14) .............................................................................. 45
LTE-SW0321, UE Context Management ......................................................................................... 49
LTE-SW0322, E-RAB Management ................................................................................................. 56
LTE-SW0501, S1 Interface Management ........................................................................................ 63
LTE-SW0510, Geo Redundancy of MME ........................................................................................ 75
LTE-SW0521, X2 Interface Management ....................................................................................... 84
LTE-SW3010, PDCP Sublayer Support ............................................................................................ 92
LTE-SW4101, Capacity based Call Admission Control .................................................................... 94
LTE-SW4103, Preemption ............................................................................................................ 104
LTE-SW5500, CA Call Control ....................................................................................................... 112
Chapter 3 Load Control 125
LTE-SW2004, Blind Offloading to WCDMA .................................................................................. 125
LTE-SW2020, Load Distribution over Backhaul Links ................................................................... 128
LTE-SW2103, UL Congestion Prevention ...................................................................................... 131
LTE-SW2104, eNB Overload Protection ....................................................................................... 136
LTE-SW2108, Smart Congestion Mitigation ................................................................................. 139
Chapter 4 Mobility Control 142
LTE-SW1002, Idle Mobility Support ............................................................................................. 142
LTE-SW1004, S1 Handover ........................................................................................................... 158
LTE-SW1005, X2 Handover ........................................................................................................... 167
LTE-SW1202, PS Handover between LTE and UTRAN .................................................................. 177
LTE-SW1204, Redirection to UTRAN without SI ........................................................................... 189
LTE-SW1205, Redirection to UTRAN with SI ................................................................................ 195
LTE-SW1208, CSFB to UTRAN with Redirection with SI ............................................................... 202
LTE-SW1209, CSFB to UTRAN with PS Handover ......................................................................... 210
Contents
Relevance
This manual applies to the following products/software.
Name Type
PKG 5.0.0 Software
Symbols
Symbol Description
Indicates a task.
Indicates a shortcut or an alternative method.
Provides additional information.
Menu Commands
menu | command
This indicates that you must select a command on a menu, where menu is the
name of the menu, and command is the name of the command on that menu.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 vii
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Preface
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 viii
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Preface
Revision History
The following table lists all versions of this document.
Document Number Product/Software Document Publication Date Remarks
Version Version
2600-00GAR0GAP PKG 3.0.0 1.0 2 February 2014 -
2600-00GAR0GAP PKG 3.0.0 2.0 4 February 2015 -
2600-00GM80GAP PKG 3.1.0 1.0 26 June 2014 -
2600-00GM80GAP PKG 3.1.0 2.0 9 April 2015 -
2600-00GXYAGAP PKG 4.0.0 1.0 20 Oct 2014 -
2600-00GXYAGAP PKG 4.0.0 2.0 14 January 2015 -
2600-00I10TGAP PKG 5.0.0 1.0 29 July 2015 -
2600-00I10TGAP PKG 5.0.0 2.0 4 December 2015 -
Related Documentation
Samsung eNB (OAM) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0
Samsung eNB (Transport) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0
Samsung LTE eNB Command Reference for PKG 5.0.0
Samsung LTE eNB Parameter Description for PKG 5.0.0
As shown in the figure above, each receiver side antenna receives a composite
signal made up of transmitted signals modified by their channels. Under specific
channel conditions, the transmitter can structure the transmitted signals to, either
send modified copies of the same transmission (transmit diversity) or, send
different transmission (spatial multiplexing).
The former case provides signal robustness and the latter provides increase in data
rate.
BENEFIT
Provide improvement in cell capacity and throughput as UEs with better channel
conditions can benefit from the multiple streams transmission.
Served the improved throughput or reliable communication due to the multiple
streams transmission.
2T RRU is required.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Samsung supports DL SU-MIMO Spatial Multiplexing (SM) in both Transmission
Mode 3 (TM3: open-loop SM) and Transmission Mode 4 (TM4: closed-loop SM)
employing either 2x2 antenna configuration that is 2 transmit eNB antennas and 2
receive UE antennas.
Transmit Diversity
Transmit diversity is default MIMO mode in LTE. This redundancy leads to
increase in signal-to-noise ratio and therefore, signal robustness. Transmission
Mode 2 provides transmit diversity by transmitting a single PDSCH codeword
using four antennas.
Spatial Multiplexing
In spatial multiplexing, there is no signal redundancy as with transmit diversity;
antenna ports transmit different symbols. There are two modes that can provide
spatial diversity; such as TM3 and TM4. TM3 uses a predetermined CDD-based
precoding and favorable to high speed UEs. TM4 uses a codebook-based
precoding and favorable to low speed UEs because scheduler adopts the best
precoder per UE based on the precoder fed-back by UE. For both TM3 and TM4,
rank adaptation based on fed-back rank information is supported so that the most
appropriate number of transmission layers (and codewords) can be adopted.
Mode Description Antenna Ports Layer Codewords Channel Rank UE Feedback
TM3 Open loop spatial 2 2 2 2 CQI, RI
multiplexing with
cyclic delay
diversity
TM4 Closed loop spatial 2 2 2 2 CQI, RI, PMI
multiplexing with
precoding matrix
Transmission Mode 3
TM3 is spatial multiplexing scheme that uses pre-determined precoding matrix.
The process of applying pre-coding is defined in 3GPP specification TS 36.211.
Open loop spatial uses Channel Quality Information (CQI) and Rank Indication
(RI) information fed-back from UE.
TM3 is suitable for scenarios when the UE is in good channel condition. A
stationary or pedestrian speed UE in good RF coverage scenario will get the most
benefit from this mode.
Codewords, layers mapping in open-loop spatial multiplexing (TM3) for 2 antenna
ports are tabulated as follows:
Number of Number CW, Layer mapping
codewords of layers
Transmission Mode 4
TM4 is spatial multiplexing scheme that uses PMI index fed-back from UE, to
construct downlink PDSCH codeword to maximize signal to noise ratio at UE
receiver.
A PMI index is a pointer to a set of pre-coding weights that are applied to
downlink code-words prior to transmission. The process of applying pre-coding is
defined in 3GPP specification TS 36.211. TM 4 is suitable for scenarios when UE
is in slow time-varying channel because there is a delay associated with a PMI
report from UE and a corresponding downlink transmission that utilizes the
reported PMI index. A stationary or pedestrian speed UE in good RF coverage
scenario will get the most benefit from this mode.
Codewords, layers mapping in closed-loop spatial multiplexing (TM4) for 4
antenna ports are tabulated as follows:
Number of Number CW, Layer mapping
codewords of layers
1 1
2 2
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Active
To enable this feature, DL_ANT_COUNT should be set equal to or greater than
n2TxAntCnt.
Execute the CHG-CELL-IDLE command to change the parameter
DL_CRS_PORT_COUNT to two to enable 2x2 SU-MIMO.
Key Parameters
RTRV-CELL-IDLE/CHG-CELL-IDLE
Parameter Description
DL_ANT_COUNT This parameter is the number of Tx antennas used by an operating cell.
DL_CRS_PORT_COUNT This parameter is the number of downlink CRS ports that are supported by the
system.
RTRV-DL-SCHED/CHG-DL-SCHED
Parameter Description
CELL_NUM This parameter describes user-defined cellId.
DL_MIMO_MODE This parameter specifies transmission mode. Each one is corresponding to
certain multiple antenna techniques.
TM1: Single-antenna port (port 0), DCI format 1 or 1A is used.
TM2: Transmit diversity, DCI format 1 or 1A is used.
TM3: Open-loop spatial multiplexing, DCI format 2A or 1A is used.
TM4: Closed-loop spatial multiplexing, DCI format 2 or 1A is used.
TM5: MU-MIMO, DCI format 1D or 1A is used. It is a test mode and it is not
supported.
TM6: Closed-loop rank-1 precoding, DCI format 1B or 1A is used. It is a test
mode and it is not supported.
TM7: Single-antenna port (port 5), DCI format 1 or 1A is used. It is supported
for only 8T8R TDD.
TM8: Dual layer transmission, or Single-antenna port (port 7/port 8), DCI
format 2B or 1A is used. It is supported for only 8T8R TDD.
TM9: UE specific RS based Transmission (Rel 10)
[Related Specifications] 3GPP TS 36.213
ALPHA Fairness weight in PF scheduler. If alpha is increased, scheduling fairness
increase such as Round Robin scheduling.
BETA Channel quality weight in PF scheduler. If beta is increased, scheduling
efficiency increases such as Max C/I.
GAMMA Priority weight in PF scheduler.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS 36.201 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical layer; General description
[2] 3GPP TS 36.211 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical Channels and Modulation
[3] 3GPP TS 36.212 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Multiplexing and channel coding
[4] 3GPP TS 36.213 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical layer procedures
[5] 3GPP TS 36.214 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical layer; Measurements
[6] 3GPP TS 36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
LTE-ME2020, Rx Diversity
INTRODUCTION
Currently, receive diversity techniques are not specified in the LTE specification,
because receive diversity places no requirements in the transmitter. However, it
needs to be noted that receive diversity enables to make better quality on uplink
received signal. Samsung eNB support Rx diversity using Minimum Mean
Squared Error (MMSE) combining with Interference Rejection Combining (IRC)
receiver.
BENEFIT
Rx diversity enables to communicate in the more reliable transmission condition.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
In Rx diversity, the receiver needs to combine multiple streams from different
antenna into a single stream. The challenge here is how to use the information
from all the antennas effectively. In fact, it is just a matter of choosing the
appropriate weight for each received signals (see the following figure).
There are multiple ways to choose the weight of receiver, but Samsung eNB uses
linear MMSE (LMMSE) receiver with IRC to suppress inter-cell interference.
Linear Minimum Mean Squared Error (LMMSE) Receiver with Interference Rejection
Combining (IRC)
To obtain receive diversity, Samsung eNB considers LMMSE criterion with IRC.
This advanced receiver employing IRC is effective in improving the cell-edge user
throughput. The IRC receiver utilizes the covariance of interference and noise
factors of multiple receiver branches, and combines the received signals for
multiple receiver branches so that the Mean Square Error (MSE) between the
combined signal and the desired signal is minimized, instead of Maximal Ratio
Combining (MRC).
The specific combining criterion is as follows:
1 The channel estimator of the eNB receiver estimates the channel of the desired
signal, and generates the covariance matrix of interference and noise.
oEstimate the channel matrix of the desired signal
2 Using the estimated channel and the covariance matrix, MMSE weight is
calculated to perform IRC.
oMinimum Mean Squared Error (MMSE) criterion
oMMSE criterion achieves the optimal balance the noise enhancement and
interference suppression
oCombined weight
The IRC scheme based on MMSE criterion achieves an optimal balance of noise
enhancement and interference suppression. Hence, IRC provides the enhanced
performance to UEs at the cell boundary that experience serious interference from
other cell. The receive diversity can be obtained from combining the calculated
weight with received signals for each receiver path.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
This feature is an optional feature and can be activated and deactivated with the
parameter IRC_ENABLE.
Key Parameters
RTRV-PUSCH-IDLE/CHG-PUSCH-IDLE
Parameter Description
IRC_ENABLE This parameter is used to enable to use IRC
0: False (IRC OFF)
1: True (IRC ON)
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS 36.201 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); LTE
physical layer; General description
[2] Goldsmith, A. J. Wireless communications. Cambridge University Press, 2005
As shown in the figure above, each receiver side antenna receives a composite
signal made up of transmitted signals modified by their channels. Under specific
channel conditions, the transmitter can structure the transmitted signals to, either
send modified copies of the same transmission (transmit diversity) or, send
different transmission (spatial multiplexing) or combination of both. Transmit
diversity provides signal robustness and spatial multiplexing increases data rate.
BENEFIT
The operator provides improvement in cell capacity and throughput as UEs with
better channel conditions can benefit from the multiple streams transmission.
The user can be served with improved throughput or reliable communication due
to the multiple streams transmission.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Samsung plans to support the DL SU-MIMO Spatial Multiplexing (SM) in both
Transmission Mode 3 (open-loop SM) and Transmission Mode 4 (closed-loop
SM) employing 4x4 antenna configuration that is 4 transmit eNB antennas and 4
receive UE antennas.
Transmission mode 3
TM 3 is spatial multiplexing scheme that uses pre-determined precoding matrix.
The process of applying pre-coding is defined in 3GPP specification TS 36.211.
Open loop spatial multiplexing uses CQI (Channel Quality Information) and RI
(Rank Indication) information fed-back from UE.
TM 3 is suitable for scenarios when the UE is in good channel condition. A
stationary or pedestrian speed UE in good RF coverage scenario will get the most
benefit from this mode.
Codewords, layers mapping in open-loop spatial multiplexing (TM3) for 4 antenna
ports are tabulated as follows:
Number of Number CW, Layer mapping
codewords of layers
1 2
2 2
Transmission Mode 4
TM 4 is spatial multiplexing scheme that uses PMI index fed-back from UE, to
construct downlink PDSCH codeword to maximize signal to noise ratio at UE
receiver.
A PMI index is a pointer to a set of pre-coding weights that are applied to
downlink code-words prior to transmission. The process of applying pre-coding is
defined in 3GPP specification TS 36.211. TM 4 is suitable for scenarios when the
UE is in slow time-varying channel because there is a delay associated with a PMI
report from UE and a corresponding downlink transmission that utilizes the
requested PMI index. A stationary or pedestrian speed UE in good RF coverage
scenario will get the most benefit from this mode.
Codewords, layers mapping in close-loop spatial multiplexing (TM4) for 4 antenna
ports are tabulated as follows:
Number of Number CW, Layer mapping
codewords of layers
1 1
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
To enable this feature, DL_ANT_COUNT should be set equal to or greater than
n4TxAntCnt
Execute the CHG-CELL-IDLE command to change the parameter
DL_CRS_PORT_COUNT to four to enable 4x4 SU-MIMO.
Execute the CHG-DL-SCHED command to change the downlink transmission
mode.
oci_tm3 is transmission mode 3.
oci_tm4 is transmission mode 4.
Key Parameters
RTRV-CELL-IDLE/CHG-CELL-IDLE
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
DL_ANT_COUNT This parameter is the number of Tx antennas used by an operating cell.
DL_CRS_PORT_COUNT This parameter is the number of downlink CRS ports that are supported by the
system.
RTRV-DL-SCHED/CHG-DL-SCHED
Parameter Description
CELL_NUM This parameter is the number of cells. This value must not exceed the maximum
number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by FA/Sector. For
example, if the maximum capacity provided to the carrier per system is 1 FA/3
Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.
DL_MIMO_MODE This parameter specifies transmission mode. Each one is corresponding to
certain multiple antenna techniques.
TM1: Single-antenna port (port 0), DCI format 1 or 1A is used.
TM2: Transmit diversity, DCI format 1 or 1A is used.
TM3: Open-loop spatial multiplexing, DCI format 2A or 1A is used.
TM4: Closed-loop spatial multiplexing, DCI format 2 or 1A is used.
TM5: MU-MIMO, DCI format 1D or 1A is used. It is a test mode and it is not
supported.
TM6: Closed-loop rank-1 precoding, DCI format 1B or 1A is used. It is a test
mode and it is not supported.
TM7: Single-antenna port (port 5), DCI format 1 or 1A is used. It is supported
for only 8T8R TDD.
TM8: Dual layer transmission, or Single-antenna port (port 7/port 8), DCI
format 2B or 1A is used. It is supported for only 8T8R TDD.
TM9: UE specific RS based Transmission (Rel 10)
[Related Specifications] 3GPP TS 36.213
ALPHA Fairness weight in PF scheduler. The larger alpha is, the better the fairness is.
BETA Channel quality weight in PF scheduler. The larger beta is, the better the
channel efficiency is.
GAMMA Priority weight in PF scheduler. The larger gamma is the smaller scheduling
delay is. However, if it is very high, system capacity can be decreased because
scheduler considers delay excessively.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS 36.201 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical layer; General description
[2] 3GPP TS 36.211 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical Channels and Modulation
[3] 3GPP TS 36.212 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Multiplexing and channel coding
[4] 3GPP TS 36.213 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical layer procedures
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 13
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement
As shown in the figure above, each receiver side antenna receives a composite
signal made up of transmitted signals modified by their channels. Under specific
channel conditions, the transmitter can structure the transmitted signals to, either
send modified copies of the same transmission (transmit diversity) or, send
different transmission (spatial multiplexing). The former case provides signal
robustness and the latter provides increase in data rate.
BENEFIT
The operator can provide improvement in cell capacity and throughput as UEs
with better channel conditions can benefit from the multiple streams
transmission.
The user can be served the improved throughput or reliable communication due
to the multiple streams transmission.
TM4 will be officially supported after IOT and then MIMO mode selection
parameter (dlMimoMode) will be enabled.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Samsung supports the DL SU-MIMO Spatial Multiplexing (SM) in both
Transmission Mode 3 (TM3: open-loop SM) and Transmission Mode 4 (TM4:
closed-loop SM) employing either 4x2 antenna configuration that is 4 transmit
eNB antennas and 2 receive UE antennas.
Transmit Diversity
Transmit diversity is default MIMO mode in LTE. This redundancy leads to
increase in signal-to-noise ratio and therefore, signal robustness. Transmission
Mode 2 provides transmit diversity by transmitting a single PDSCH codeword
using 4 antennas.
Spatial Multiplexing
In spatial multiplexing, there is no signal redundancy as with transmit diversity;
antenna ports transmit different symbols. There are two modes that provide spatial
diversity: TM3 and TM4. TM3 uses a predetermined CDD-based precoding and
favorable to high speed UEs. TM4 uses a codebook-based precoding and favorable
to low speed UEs because scheduler adopts the best precoder per UE based on the
precoder fed-back by UE. For both TM3 and TM4, rank adaptation based on fed-
back rank information is supported so that the most appropriate number of
transmission layers (and codewords) can be adopted.
Mode Description Antenna Layer Codewords Channel UE
Ports Rank Feedback
TM3 Open loop spatial multiplexing 4 2 2 2 CQI, RI
with cyclic delay diversity
TM4 Closed loop spatial multiplexing 4 2 2 2 CQI, RI,
with precoding matrix PMI
Transmission Mode 3
TM3 is spatial multiplexing scheme that uses pre-determined precoding matrix.
The process of applying pre-coding is defined in 3GPP specification TS 36.211.
Open loop spatial uses Channel Quality Information (CQI) and Rank Indication
(RI) information fed-back from UE.
TM3 is suitable for scenarios when UE is in good channel condition. A stationary
or pedestrian speed UE in good RF coverage scenario gets the most benefit from
this mode.
Codewords, layers mapping in open-loop spatial multiplexing (TM3) for 4 antenna
ports are shown in the table below.
Number of Number CW, Layer mapping
codewords of layers
Transmission Mode 4
TM4 is spatial multiplexing scheme that uses PMI index fed-back from UE, to
construct downlink PDSCH codeword to maximize signal to noise ratio at UE
receiver.
A PMI index is a pointer to a set of pre-coding weights that are applied to
downlink code-words prior to transmission. The process of applying pre-coding is
defined in 3GPP specification TS 36.211. TM 4 is suitable for scenarios when the
UE is in slow time-varying channel because there is a delay associated with a PMI
report from UE and a corresponding downlink transmission that utilizes the
reported PMI index. A stationary or pedestrian speed UE in good RF coverage
scenario gets the most benefit from this mode.
Codewords, layers mapping in closed-loop spatial multiplexing (TM4) for 4
antenna ports are shown in the following table.
Number of Number CW, Layer mapping
codewords of layers
1 1
2 2
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
To enable this feature, DL_ANT_COUNT should be set equal to or greater than
n4TxAntCnt.
Execute the CHG-CELL-IDLE command to change the parameter
DL_CRS_PORT_COUNT to four to enable 4x2 SU-MIMO.
Key Parameters
RTRV-CELL-IDLE/CHG-CELL-IDLE
Parameter Description
DL_ANT_COUNT This parameter is the number of Tx antennas used by an operating cell.
DL_CRS_PORT_COUNT This parameter is the number of downlink CRS ports that are supported by the
system.
RTRV-DL-SCHED/CHG-DL-SCHED
Parameter Description
CELL_NUM This parameter is the number of cells. This value must not exceed the maximum
number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by FA/Sector. For
example, if the maximum capacity provided to the carrier per system is 1 FA/3
Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.
ALPHA Fairness weight in PF scheduler. The larger alpha is, the better the fairness is.
BETA Channel quality weight in PF scheduler. The larger beta is, the better the
channel efficiency is.
GAMMA Priority weight in PF scheduler. The larger gamma is the smaller scheduling
delay is. However, if it is very high, system capacity can be decreased because
scheduler considers delay excessively.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS 36.201 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical layer; General description
[2] 3GPP TS 36.211 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical Channels and Modulation
[3] 3GPP TS 36.212 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Multiplexing and channel coding
[4] 3GPP TS 36.213 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical layer procedures
BENEFIT
An operator can combine individual CCs from different bands and bandwidths.
The feature ensures that all the spectrum resources are utilized effectively across
the network for improving efficiency and achieving peak throughputs.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Samsung eNB supports a combination of 5+5 MHz CCs in downlink. Each
aggregated carriers is referred to as CC.
Figure below illustrates the 5+5 aggregated LTE channels.
FDD
5 MHz
FDD
5 + 5 MHz CA
FDD
5 MHz
The operator can have the following three types of carrier allocation based on the
spectrum usage:
Intra-band Contiguous CA
Intra-band Non-contiguous CA
Inter-band Non-contiguous CA
For detailed description of CA functionality and its operational procedures, see
LTE-SW5500: CA Call Control.
SYSTEM OPERATION
Refer to the System Operation section of LTE-SW5500: CA Call Control feature
for configuration, key parameter, and detailed information on counters associated
with this feature.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS 36.101 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
User Equipment (UE) radio transmission and reception
[2] 3GPP TS 36.211 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical Channels and Modulation
[3] 3GPP TS 36.212 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Multiplexing and channel coding
[4] 3GPP TS 36.213 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical layer procedures
[5] 3GPP TS 36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[6] 3GPP TS 36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification
[7] 3GPP TR 36.814 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Further advancements for E-UTRA physical layer aspects
[8] 3GPP TR 36.912 Feasibility study for Further Advancements for E-UTRA
(LTE-Advanced)
BENEFIT
The operator can combine individual CCs from different band and bandwidths.
All the spectrum resources are utilized effectively across the network for
improving efficiency and achieving higher peak throughputs.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Samsung eNB supports a combination of 3+5 MHz CCs in downlink. Each
aggregated carriers is referred to as CC.
The following figure shows the 3+5 aggregated LTE channels.
The operator can have the following three types of carrier allocation based on the
spectrum usage:
Intra-band Contiguous CA
Intra-band Non-contiguous CA
Inter-band Non-contiguous CA
SYSTEM OPERATION
Refer to the System Operation section of LTE-SW5500: CA Call Control feature
for configuration, key parameter, and detailed information on counters associated
with this feature.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS 36.101 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
User Equipment (UE) radio transmission and reception
[2] 3GPP TS 36.211 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical Channels and Modulation
[3] 3GPP TS 36.212 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Multiplexing and channel coding
[4] 3GPP TS 36.213 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical layer procedures
[5] 3GPP TS 36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[6] 3GPP TS 36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification
[7] 3GPP TR 36.814 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Further advancements for E-UTRA physical layer aspects
[8] 3GPP TR 36.912 Feasibility study for Further Advancements for E-UTRA
(LTE-Advanced)
BENEFIT
The operator can combine individual CCs from different band and bandwidths.
All the spectrum resources are utilized effectively across the network for
improving efficiency and achieving higher peak throughputs.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Samsung eNB supports a combination of 3+3 MHz CCs in downlink. Each
aggregated carriers is referred to as CC.
The following figure shows the 3+3 aggregated LTE channels.
The operator can have the following three types of carrier allocation based on the
spectrum usage:
Intra-band Contiguous CA
Intra-band Non-contiguous CA
Inter-band Non-contiguous CA
SYSTEM OPERATION
Refer to the System Operation section of LTE-SW5500: CA Call Control feature
for configuration, key parameter, and detailed information on counters associated
with this feature.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS 36.101 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
User Equipment (UE) radio transmission and reception
[2] 3GPP TS 36.211 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical Channels and Modulation
[3] 3GPP TS 36.212 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Multiplexing and channel coding
[4] 3GPP TS 36.213 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical layer procedures
[5] 3GPP TS 36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[6] 3GPP TS 36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification
[7] 3GPP TR 36.814 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Further advancements for E-UTRA physical layer aspects
[8] 3GPP TR 36.912 Feasibility study for Further Advancements for E-UTRA
(LTE-Advanced)
LTE-ME6004, DL Smart
INTRODUCTION
The DL-Smart feature performs centralized coordination for the radio resource of
all cells connected to Smart Scheduler Server to enhance the cell performance. In
this case, each eNB allocates the physical radio resource to the UE based on the
results of the coordination.
BENEFIT
This will result in performance enhancement for DL data transmission.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The network for DL-Smart is consisted of one Smart Scheduler and a large number
of eNBs. Samsung supports three types of DL-Smart networks as C-RAN, D-RAN,
and H-RAN. Each network diagram is referred from the following figures.
(A) C-RAN
(B) D-RAN
(C) H-RAN
Each eNB is connected with Smart Scheduler server and is classified as C-RAN
eNB or D-RAN eNB according to the transmission delay between Smart Scheduler
server and eNB.
In figure (A), C-RAN eNB is concentrated with Smart Scheduler, so C-RAN
network guarantees short transmission delay less than 1ms. Each RU distributed
from C-RAN eNB is connected with DU using the dark fiber.
D-RAN eNB is shown in figure (B) and is distributed from Smart Scheduler using
Ethernet network connection with transmission delay longer than 1ms.
Smart Scheduler server can support inter-cell interference coordination via same
structure for C-RAN and D-RAN. Thus, Smart Scheduler server can support DL-
Smart although C-RAN eNBs and D-RAN eNBs are interconnected in H-RAN
environment. H-RAN network is shown in figure (C).
In each network architecture, if there is no Smart Scheduler, eNBs can provide
stand-alone operation.
The following figure shows the software structure of Smart Scheduler network:
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
To enable this feature, execute the CHG-CELLSCHR-CONF command.
If the flag of SMART_CELL_COORDI_ENABLE is false, the state of DL smart
is OFF.
If the flag of SMART_CELL_COORDI_ENABLE is true, the state of DL smart
is ON.
Key Parameters
RTRV-CELLSCHR-CONF/CHG-CELLSCHR-CONF
Parameter Description
CELL_NUM The cell number. This value must not exceed the maximum number of
cells supported by the system.
SMART_CELL_COORDI_ENABL It is the SmartCell DL Coordination function ON (true)/OFF (false) flag,
E that is, the control flag of interworking function between eNB and the
Smart Scheduler Server.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS 36.101 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
User Equipment (UE) radio transmission and reception
[2] 3GPP TS 36.211 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical Channels and Modulation
[3] 3GPP TS 36.212 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Multiplexing and channel coding
[4] 3GPP TS 36.213 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical layer procedures
[5] 3GPP TS 36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[6] 3GPP TS 36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification
[7] 3GPP TR 36.814 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Further advancements for E-UTRA physical layer aspects
[8] 3GPP TR 36.819 Coordinated multi-point operation for LTE physical layer
aspects
[9] 3GPP TR 36.913 Requirements for Evolved UTRA (E-UTRA) and Evolved
UTRAN (E-UTRAN)
BENEFIT
This will result in performance enhancement for UL data transmission.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The network for UL-Smart is consisted of one Smart Scheduler and a large number
of eNBs. Samsung supports three types of UL-Smart networks as C-RAN, D-RAN,
and H-RAN. Each network diagram is referred from the following figures.
(A) C-RAN
(B) D-RAN
(C) H-RAN
Each eNB is connected with Smart Scheduler server and is classified as C-RAN
eNB, and D-RAN eNB according to the transmission delay between Smart
Scheduler server and eNB.
In figure (A), C-RAN eNB is concentrated with Smart Scheduler, so C-RAN
network guarantees short transmission delay less than 1ms. Each RU distributed
from C-RAN eNB is connected with DU using the dark fiber.
D-RAN eNB is shown in figure (B) and is distributed from Smart Scheduler using
Ethernet network connection with transmission delay longer than 1ms.
Smart Scheduler server can support inter-cell interference coordination via same
structure for C-RAN and D-RAN. Thus, Smart Scheduler server can support UL-
Smart although C-RAN eNB and D-RAN eNB are co-located in H-RAN
environment. H-RAN network is shown in figure (C).
In each network architecture, if there is no Smart Scheduler, eNBs can provide
stand-alone operation.
The following figure shows the software structure of Smart Scheduler network:
2 UE Manager determines (1) cell edge UE and (2) which of cell receive inter-cell
interference from UE of serving cell based on SRS. And then UE Manager
transfers UEs information (1) and (2) to RT-Scheduler, and information (2) to
Coordinator.
3 Coordinator determines inter-interference relation between cells based on SRS.
And then coordinator generates allocation pattern using load information and
inter-cell interference relation.
4 Coordinator transfers resource allocation pattern to RT-Scheduler.
5 RT-Scheduler allocates resource to UEs using UEs information and resource
allocation pattern for cell edge UEs to avoid inter-cell interference from
neighbor cells.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
This feature is an optional feature and can be activated and deactivated.
Execute the RTRV-SMTUL-SCHED command to retrieve the configuration
information of smart uplink scheduling.
Execute the CHG-SMTUL-SCHED command to change the configuration
information of smart uplink scheduling in units of smart scheduler server.
oIf the value of ulSmartCsOnOff is '0', the state of UL smart is OFF.
oIf the value of ulSmartCsOnOff is not '0', the state of UL smart is ON. (The
recommended value of ulSmartCsOnOff is '3')
Key Parameters
RTRV-SMTUL-SCHED/CHG-SMTUL-SCHED
Parameter Description
dbIndex This is just db index.
ulSmartCsOnOff This parameter enables or disables the coordinated scheduling (CS) of UL
smart.
If ulSmartCsOnOff = 0, coordinated scheduling is OFF (false).
If ulSmartCsOnOff = 1, coordinated scheduling using start RB index is ON
(true). RT-Scheduler can allocate the resource from the lowest RB index or
from the highest RB index for cell edge UE to avoid inter-cell interference
between neighbor cells.
If ulSmartCsOnOff = 2, coordinated scheduling using edge pattern is ON (true).
RT-Scheduler allocates the resource using edge pattern for cell edge UE to
avoid inter-cell interference between neighbor cells.
If ulSmartCsOnOff = 3, coordinated scheduling using start RB index and edge
pattern is ON (true). RT-Scheduler dynamically switches between CS using
start RB index and CS using edge pattern.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS 36.101 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
User Equipment (UE) radio transmission and reception
[2] 3GPP TS 36.211 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical Channels and Modulation
[3] 3GPP TS 36.212 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Multiplexing and channel coding
[4] 3GPP TS 36.213 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical layer procedures
[5] 3GPP TS 36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[6] 3GPP TS 36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification
[7] 3GPP TR 36.814 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Further advancements for E-UTRA physical layer aspects
[8] 3GPP TR 36.819 Coordinated multi-point operation for LTE physical layer
aspects
[9] 3GPP TR 36.913 Requirements for Evolved UTRA (E-UTRA) and Evolved
UTRAN (E-UTRAN)
BENEFIT
UE counting per category supports to analyze the connected UEs' status per
category.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
This feature enables the operator to know the number of UE in the network for
each UE category. The eNB obtains UE category information during two possible
states - during attachment or idle to active transition.
The following figure shows during ATTACH procedure, eNB saves UE category
during UE Capability Enquiry/UE Capability Information procedure and counts
the statistics after ATTACH procedure is finished.
The following figure shows during Idle to Active procedure, eNB saves UE
category during Initial Context Setup Request/Initial Context Setup Response
procedure and counts the statistics after ATTACH is finished.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
This feature is basically enabled and operator cannot disable.
Key Parameters
There are no related parameters.
REFERENCE
[1] The Vendors LTE solution shall support functionality to enquire UE capability
and record number of UEs per eNodeB and per cell for each UE category.
[2] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[3] 3GPP TS36.306 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User
Equipment (UE) radio access capabilities (Release 9)
[4] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification (Release 9)
BENEFIT
Reduction in Power Consumption.
Improvements in System efficiency.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The purpose of RAN Enhancements to Diverse Data Applications is for eNB to
provide UE a power saving operation. Upon configuring UE to provide power
preference indications, eNB waits for UE to provide its power saving preference.
Once the Preference is known from UE, eNB provides appropriate resolution
based on operator's configuration.
This feature is enabled based on the Device Type of UE. If UE DeviceType is set
to noBenFromBatConsumpOpt received from UE in UE-EUTRA-Capability-
v920-IE. Then this feature is disabled as no DRX solution could be provided since
UE does not need a Network Controlled Battery Saving Solution.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Execute the CHG-UEPWRSAVING-CONF command to set 'usedFlag' to 'USE'.
The operator can disable this feature by setting the parameter to 'NO_USE'.
Key Parameters
CHG-UEPWRSAVING-CONF/RTRV-UEPWRSAVING-CONF
Parameter Description
USED_FLAG This parameter shows whether UE power saving function is supported or not.
PREF_IND_TIMER This parameter shows Prohibit timer (T340) for Power Preference Indication
reporting. Value in seconds. Value s0 means prohibit timer is set to 0 second
or not set, value s0dot5 means prohibit timer is set to 0.5 second, value s1
means prohibit timer is set to 1 second and so on
SUPPORT_METHOD This parameter shows the method to support UE power saving.
CHG-UEPWRSAVING-DRXINFO/RTRV-UEPWRSAVING-DRXINFO
Parameter Description
QCI This parameter is the QoS Class Identifier (QCI). The range is 0-255.The
standard QCI defined in the standard document is 1-9. 0 and 10-255 can be
used by the operator optionally.
DRX_CONFIG_SETUP This parameter indicates whether to use the DRX for UE power saving.
Release: DRX is not used.
Setup: DRX profile is used
ON_DURATION_TIMER This parameter is onDurationTimer to monitor PDCCH in DRX mode.
(onDurationTimer-Specifies the number of consecutive PDCCH-subframe(s) at
the beginning of a DRX Cycle.)
Parameter Description
DRX_INACTIVITY_TIMER This parameter is drxInactivityTimer to monitor PDCCH in DRX mode. (drx-
InactivityTimer - Specifies the number of consecutive PDCCH-subframe(s)
after successfully decoding a PDCCH indicating an initial UL or DL user data
transmission for this UE.)
DRX_RETRANSMISSION_T This parameter is drxRetransmissionTimer to monitor PDCCH in DRX mode.
IMER (drx-RetransmissionTimer - Specifies the maximum number of consecutive
PDCCH-subframe(s) for as soon as a DL retransmission is expected by the
UE.)
LONG_DRXCYCLE_START The long DRX cycle and drx start offset values to run onDurationTimer in DRX
_OFFSET_TYPE mode. For UE power saving, longDRCCycle can have multiples of sf80.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2. Release 11
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); RRC
Control and Signalling. Release 11
[3] 3GPP TR 36.822 LTE Radio Access Network (RAN) enhancements for
diverse data applications. Release 11
BENEFIT
Provides RAN overload control and overload control for shared RANs.
Provides Core Network Overload Control.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Due to diverse applications and services deployed in LTE network, there could be
excess traffic resulting due to use of these applications and services. So, it is
necessary to mitigate E-UTRAN access during peak traffic. The peak traffic could
be from both core and access network. In case of core network, MME signaling or
O&M can trigger E-UTRAN to initiate EAB (From TS 23.401 Section 4.3.17.2
Point (d)). Also, peak traffic could be reduced by refraining low-priority UEs such
as MTC devices to having access to eNB. 3GPP Release 11 features provides
enhancements to GPRS to achieve this. This feature is Extended Access Barring.
During Peak Traffic, eNB reaches congestion state.
The MME notifies to eNB about the congestion state. The eNB can initiate EAB
when all MMEs connected to eNB request to restrict the load for UEs that are
connected to the network with low access priority. It is achieved through
OVERLOAD START message sent from MME to ENB. (From TS 23.401
Section 4.3.7.4.1).
When the congestion state has reached, eNB applies EAB. The EAB is access-
control mechanism, which is derived from the existing Access Class Barring
(ACB) method based on Access Class .In this mechanism, UE determines whether
it is subject to barring based on EAB information (present in SIB14 message) from
eNB. If UE in IDLE state determines that is subjected to barring, it refrains from
sending a connection-request message. The EAB parameters are conveyed through
SIB14 broadcast. To determine whether access barring applies, eNB provides the
following EAB information in SIB14 broadcast.
Access Class's bitmap information targetted by EAB.
UE category targeted by EAB.
Core-eNB Overload Indication:
In case of eNB to find the exact traffic area EAB to applied during Core Network
Overload, following action is taken.
If GUMMEI List IE is present in the received Overload START message, eNB
shall, if supported, use this information to identify to which traffic the above
defined rejections shall be applied. If an overload action is ongoing and eNB
receives a further OVERLOAD START message, the eNB shall replace the
ongoing overload action with newly requested one. [36.413 Section 8.7.6.2]
The eNB should set SIB14 Flag as TRUE when sending SIB1 to indicate it as
present.
UE's access is denied if all the below mentioned conditions are true:
oUE belongs to access class (0- 9).
oUEs category is same as the category received in SIB14.
oUE's access class is same as access class received in SIB14.
The EAB is removed by eNB through SIB14 specifying as not Barred when eNB
receives OVERLOAD STOP from MME.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
To change EAB activation, execute the CHG-SIB-INF/CHG-EAB-PARA
command to configure the parameters (SIB 14).
Key Parameters
CHG-SIB-INF/RTRV-SIB-INF
Parameter Description
CELL_NUM This parameter is the number of cells. This value must not exceed the
maximum number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by
FA/Sector. For example, if the maximum capacity provided to the carrier per
system is 1 FA/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.
sib14Period This parameter is the broadcast interval for SIB 14.
not_used: Does not broadcast SIB14.
CHG-EAB-PARA/RTRV-EAB-PARA
Parameter Description
CELL_NUM This parameter is the number of cells. This value must not exceed the
maximum number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by
FA/Sector. For example, if the maximum capacity provided to the carrier per
system is 1 FA/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.
eabParamUsage This parameter is the usage flag of EAB barring status.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2. Release 11
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification. Release 11
[3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); S1
Application Protocol (S1AP). Release 11
[4] 3GPP TS22.368 Service requirements for Machine-Type Communications
(MTC). Release 11
[5] 3GPP TS23.401 General Packet Radio Service enhancements for Evolved
Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network. Release 11
BENEFIT
The operator can maintain UE context for its subscribers in the
RRC_CONNECTED state.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
UE Context Modification
The eNB performs the context modification procedure upon MMEs request.
It can change the security context, UE AMBR, and SPID through UE context
modification procedure. When receiving UE Context Modification request from
MME, the eNB changes UE context using the value included in the message and
transmits UE Context Modification response to MME. If the security context was
changed, it performs the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure with UE and
then responds to MME.
It uses UE context modification procedure to change UE context of the connected
UE.
The following UE contexts can be changed through UE context modification
procedure:
UE Aggregate Maximum Bit Rate (UE AMBR)
UE Security Capabilities
Security Key
Subscriber Profile ID for RAT/Frequency priority (SPID)
CSG Membership Status
Registered LAI
The UE context modification procedure is as follows:
UE Context Release
The eNB performs UE context release procedure upon MMEs request. The UE
context release procedure is used for releasing a call from the connected UE. The
MME initiated UE context release is performed based on MMEs decision or eNB
initiated UE context release is performed upon the request from the eNB. When
receiving UE Context Release Command message from MME, the eNB performs
the RRC Connection Release procedure with UE and transmits UE Context
Release Complete message to MME.
The UE context release procedure is used for call release (active-to-idle transition).
The UE context release procedure is as follows:
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
This feature is basically enabled and operator cannot disable.
Key Parameters
CHG-SECU-INF/RTRV-SECU-INF
Parameter Description
INTEGRITY_EA_PRIOR The integrity protection algorithm supported
by the eNB
EIA0: NULL
EIA1: SNOW 3G
EIA2: AES
CIPHER_EA_PRIOR The ciphering algorithm supported by the
eNB
EEA0: NULL
EEA1: SNOW 3G
EEA2: AES
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification
[3] 3GPP TS36. 413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN);
S1 Application Protocol (S1AP)
BENEFIT
The operator can provide EPS bearer service to its subscribers and manage E-RAB
resources for user data transport.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
E-RAB Setup
The E-RAB setup procedure is used to add an E-RAB for a new service to a
connected UE. The E-RAB for a new service can be added to the connected UE
through E-RAB setup procedure. When receiving the E-RAB Setup Request
message from MME, the eNB considers the current resource usage status and
determines whether a new bearer can be added. If a new E-RAB can be added,
eNB performs the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure with UE for
resource reconfiguration of the new DRB and transmits the E-RAB Setup
Response message to MME.
Each E-RAB will have the following information:
E-RAB ID
The Transport Layer IP Address on the eNB
The eNB GTP Tunneling ID (TEID) for the eNB side.
QCI to assign session priority.
The maximum bit rate for the E-RAB.
Guaranteed bit rate for the eRAB.
The E-RAB setup procedure is as follows:
1 The P-GW transmits the Create Bearer request to S-GW to add the new E-RAB.
2 The S-GW transmits the Create Bearer request to add the new E-RAB.
3 The MME transmit the E-RAB Setup request to start the E-RAB setup procedure.
QoS information of the E-RAB(s) to be added, the NAS message to be sent to
UE, and ACTIVATE DEDICATED EPS BEARER CONTEXT REQUEST
are included in the E-RAB Setup request.
4 When receiving the E-RAB Setup request from MME, the eNB determines
whether a new E-RAB(s) can be added. If possible, eNB reallocates internal
resources and transmits RRC Connection Reconfiguration to UE.
5 The UE adds the new DRB(s) specified by RRC Connection Reconfiguration
and replies to eNB with RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete.
6 The eNB responds to MME with the E-RAB Setup response. Setup
success/failure results for each E-RAB are included in the E-RAB Setup
response.
7 The UE transmits the NAS message and ACTIVATE DEDICATED EPS
BEARER CONTEXT RESPONSE.
8 The eNB transmits the NAS received from UE to MME.
9 The MME transmits the Create Bearer response to S-GW.
10 The S-GW transmits the Create Bearer response to P-GW.
E-RAB Modification
Use the E-RAB modification procedure to change the QoS setting of a bearer (E-
RAB) already in service. To use the E-RAB modification procedure, operator can
change UE AMBR for non-GBR bearer and E-RAB Level QoS parameters (QCI,
ARP and GBR QoS Information) for GBR bearer.
The E-RAB modification procedure is as follows:
1 The P-GW transmits Update Bearer Request to S-GW to change QoS setting.
2 The S-GW transmits Update Bearer Request to MME to change QoS setting.
3 The MME starts the E-RAB modification procedure by transmitting E-RAB
Modify Request to eNB. The E-RAB Modify Request has the QoS information
of E-RAB(s) to change, NAS message to send to UE, and MODIFY EPS
BEARER CONTEXT REQUEST.
4 When eNB receives E-RAB Modify Request from MME, it selects if it is
possible to change the QoS setting of the E-RAB(s). If possible, it re-allocates
internal resources and transmits RRC Connection Reconfiguration to the MS.
5 The MS changes the QoS setting of DRB(s) that is specified in RRC Connection
Reconfiguration and replies RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete to
eNB.
6 The eNB replies E-RAB Modify Response to MME. The E-RAB Modify
Response has the success or failure of QoS setting change per E-RAB.
7 The UE transmits NAS message, MODIFY EPS BEARER CONTEXT
RESPONSE.
8 The eNB transmits the NAS message received from UE to MME.
9 The MME transmits Update Bearer Response to S-GW.
10 The S-GW transmits Update Bearer Response to P-GW.
E-RAB Release
The E-RAB release procedure is used to release specific bearer service of a
connected UE. This procedure is performed by request from MME. Also, MME
requests E-RAB release based on its own decision (MME initiated E-RAB release)
or as following action after an indication from eNB (eNB initiated E-RAB release).
When E-RAB RELEASE REQUEST message is received from MME, eNB
performs RRC connection reconfiguration procedure with UE to release the
corresponding DRB (data radio bearer). When the DRB is released successfully,
eNB returns E-RAB RELEASE RESPONSE message to MME.
The E-RAB release procedure is as follows:
If eNB initiated E-RAB release procedure, eNB transmits the E-RAB Release
indication to MME to notify the release of a specific E-RAB. The MME transmits
the Delete Bearer command to S-GW for E-RAB release.
1 The S-GW transmits the Delete Bearer command for E-RAB release. The P-GW
transmits the Delete Bearer request to S-GW for E-RAB release.
2 The S-GW transmits the Delete Bearer request to MME for E-RAB release.
3 The MME initiates the E-RAB release procedure by transmitting the E-RAB
Release command. ID(s) of the E-RAB(s) to be released, the NAS message to
be sent to UE and DEACTIVATE EPS BEARER CONTEXT REQUEST are
included in the E-RAB Release command.
4 When receiving the E-RAB Release command from MME, eNB transmits RRC
Connection Reconfiguration to UE.
5 The UE releases the DRB(s) specified by RRC Connection Reconfiguration and
then replies to eNB with RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete.
6 The eNB responds to MME with the E-RAB Release response.
7 The UE transmits the NAS message and DEACTIVATE EPS BEARER
CONTEXT RESPONSE.
8 The eNB transmits the NAS received from UE to MME.
9 The MME transmits the Delete Bearer response to S-GW.
10 The S-GW transmits the Delete Bearer response to P-GW.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
In case of standard QCI E-RABs, there is no additional activation procedure
required but to activate operator specific QCIs, execute the CHG-QCI-VAL
command to equip new QCIs to be used.
Key Parameters
QCIs can be configured by executing the CHG-QCI-VAL command with
following parameters:
Parameter Description
QCI QoS Class Identifier (QCI) index. The range is from 0 to 255. The QCI defined in
the standard is 1 to 9.
The user can use QCI values 0 and 10-255.
STATUS Whether the QoS Class Identifier (QCI) is used.
EQUIP: The QCI is used in the eNB.
N_EQUIP: The QCI is not used in the eNB.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification
[3] 3GPP TS36. 413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN);
S1 Application Protocol (S1AP)
BENEFIT
The operator can manage the signaling associations between eNB and EPC such
as setting up, resetting S1 interface, and recovering from errors.
This feature provides path monitoring between eNB and SGW
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
There are two types of S1 interface:
S1-MME for control plane
S1-U for user plane
The S1-MME includes a direct SCTP connection between eNB and MME. The
eNB must establish single SCTP connection to each MME during initial
configuration phase. Also, SCTP connection is used to manage UE-associated S1-
AP connections and to carry handover related messages, eNB/MME configuration
message, and NAS TRANSPORT messages.
The S1-U is a direct GTP tunnel between eNB and SGW. The GTP tunnel is UE-
associated connection and created when UE attaches to the network. Through the
GTP tunnel, eNB delivers/receives user packets to/from S-GW. The GTP tunnel is
maintained while UE is in active mode and released when UE's state changes to
idle mode.
The following sub-sections describe the method of configure S1-MME and S1-U
interface related parameters and how eNB and MME manages S1 interface via S1-
AP procedures defined in 3GPP TS 36.413.
S1 Setup
The S1 Setup procedure is the first S1AP procedure after a TNL (Transport
Network Layer) association has been made. When this procedure is performed, the
application level configuration data between eNB and MME, if there is, is
removed and replaced with the newly received data. During S1 setup procedure,
eNB sends its basic application level configuration data such as Global eNB ID,
Supported Tracking Area list consisting of PLMN and Tracking Area Code, and
Default paging DRX and MME sends its list of served GUMMEIs, Relative MME
capacity and so on. If eNB initiating the S1 SETUP procedure on (or more) CSG
cell(s), the S1 SETUP REQUEST message shall contain the CSG ID(s) of the
supported CSG(s).
The S1 Setup successful procedure is as follows:
When MME cannot accept S1 Setup request, it should respond with S1 Setup
Failure and appropriate cause value. If S1 Setup Failure message includes Time to
Wait IE, eNB shall wait at least for the indicated time before reinitiating the S1
Setup towards the same MME.
If eNB fails to receive the S1 Setup Response message within certain amount of
time configured by S1_SETUP timer, it retransmits the S1 Setup Request again to
MME.
Note that the S1 management interface is essential for LTE service, there is no
retry count. It means that eNB retransmits S1 Setup Request to MME unlimitedly
until it receives S1 Setup Response successfully from MME.
TheS1 Setup unsuccessful procedure is as follows:
S1 Reset
When an abnormal situation occurs, S1 interface of all or some UEs can be
initialized through reset procedure which runs on S1-C. (However, the application
level configuration data, which was exchanged by S1 Setup procedure, is not
changed.)
The S1 Reset procedure is executed over S1-C interface which is a control plane
interface of S1. The eNB sends the Reset Acknowledge message to MMEs after
receiving the Reset message and then sends the RRC Connection Release message
to the target UEs. After that, UE related resources, which are controlled by eNB,
are released.
The S1 Reset MME triggered procedure is as follows:
Another example of S1 Reset is when eNB selects a specific S/W or H/W module
is in an abnormal state and unable to provide the normal service, which has
resulted in the loss of some or all transaction reference information, it sends the
Reset message to the MME.
When Samsung eNB determines the cell is not normal any more due to Channel
Card, DSP or RF unit, it sends S1 Reset to MME. The list of UEs, whose resources
should be released, can be specified by MME UE S1AP ID IE or eNB UE S1AP
ID IE of the UE-Associated logical S1-connection list IE in S1 Reset message.
If eNB fails to receive the S1 Reset Acknowledge message within certain amount
of time configured by s1Reset timer, it retransmits the S1 Reset message again to
MME upto s1ResetRetryCount times.
Unlike Reset by MME, eNB does not send RRC Connection Release to UE right
after Reset if Reset is triggered by eNB. The reason is that in case of Reset by eNB,
the eNB is in an abnormal state and may not be able to send RRC Connection
Release to the corresponding UEs correctly. Hence, instead of sending RRC
Connection Release to UEs right away, the eNB relies on each UEs failure
detection mechanism such as Radio Link Failure (RLF) detection.
When UE detects RLF due to eNBs reset, it tries to send RRC Connection
Reestablishment request to eNB and if eNB is able to accept this request, the
connection continues. If it fails after several times of retries, UE will release RRC
connection by itself and goes to Idle. Later when RRC connection is needed, UE
will send RRC Connection Request to create new RRC connection.
Error Indication
When the received message cannot be processed normally and cannot be
responded with the appropriate failure message, eNB or MME can report this fact
to the peer with Error Indication procedure.
Currently, Samsung eNB sends Error Indication only when it fails to decode the
received messages. It means whenever eNB selects that it is impossible to parse
and interpret the bit stream of the received message, it sends the Error Indication
with Cause IE, however, it does not send Error Indication in case of sematic error
or logical errors and so on. For example, if eNB successfully decodes the received
message and it turns out to have a value out of range, eNB does not send Error
Indication and instead, discards or ignores the received IE or message.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 66
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 2 Call Control
If eNB sends MME Configuration Update failure, then there might be mismatch in
the Relative MME Capacity between MME and eNB. In some cases, eNB selects
MME according to the old Relative MME Capacity.
The MME Configuration Update successful procedure is as follows:
The SCTP parameter names of the below description is used conceptually. Refer to
COM-IP0401 for exact SCTP parameter names of S1 interface.
The eNB and MME can monitor S1-MME connection by exchanging SCTP
HEARTBEAT/ HEARTBEAT ACK messages defined by SCTP protocol. The
HEARTBEAT message is periodically transmitted and the period is configured as
HEART_BEAT_INTERVAL. When transmitting HEARTBEAT message, eNB
delivers the current time in the Heartbeat Information field, which is also included
in the HEARTBEAT ACK message so that the sender and receiver can calculate
the Round Trip Time (RTT).
The Keep Alive between eNB and MME successful procedure is as follows:
If eNB fails to receive the ECHO RESPONSE message, it resends the ECHO
REQUEST message up to the configured maximum retransmissions
N3_REQUEST. When eNB fails to receive the ECHO RESPONSE message even
after maximum resending, it will release all E-RAB connections with the failed S-
GW and triggers MME to release the related calls via S1-Reset procedure.
The Keep Alive between eNB and S-GW unsuccessful procedure is as follows:
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Execute the CHG-MME-CONF command to configure MME by adding IP address
and set the status to be Equip and unlock active state of the corresponding MME.
Key Parameters
CHG-MME-CONF/RTRV-MME-CONF
Parameter Description
MME_INDEX The index used to access the information. Since there are a total of 16 MMEs
that can be connected to an eNB, the index range is 0 to 15.
STATUS The EQUIP status information on MME.
N_EQUIP: The MME to connect does not exist.
EQUIP: The MME to connect exists
ACTIVE_STATE The state information on the specified MME in operation. The MMEs for which
the S1 Setup is established, if there is an undesired MME, this parameter
value must be changed to Inactive. The default is active. If the STATUS
parameter is set to Equip, it is better not to change this parameter value to
inactive.
Inactive: MME (S1 assigned) is not used.
Active: MME (S1 assigned) is used.
IP_VER The IP address version of MME. Either IPv4 or IPv6 is assigned.
MME_IPV4 Information on the IPV4 address of MME. This parameter value is valid only if
the IP_VER parameter is set to IPv4. It is not used if the IP_VER parameter is
set to IPv6.
Parameter Description
MME_IPV6 Information on the IPV6 address of eNB. This parameter value is valid only if
the IP_VER parameter is set to IPv6. It is not used if the IP_VER parameter is
set to IPv4.
ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE The status of MME link:
Locked: A state where active calls connected to MME are all dropped, and
new call connections are not possible.
Unlocked: Connection to MME is normal.
Shutting down: A state where active calls connected to MME are maintained,
but new call connections are not possible.
SECONDARY_MME_IPV4 The secondary IP address of the IPv4 type set in MME node to support the
SCTP Multi Homing function. It is valid only if the IP_VER parameter is set to
IPv4.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.412 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-
UTRAN); S1 signalling transport
[3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-
UTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP)
[4] 3GPP TS29.281 General Packet Radio System (GPRS) Tunnelling Protocol
User Plane (GTPv1-U)
[5] IETF RFC4960 Stream Control Transmission Protocol
BENEFIT
The operator can explicitly configure a group of standby MMEs to use only when
all the active MMEs are out of service.
From SLR4.5, the eNB selects standby MMEs based on their Relative MME
Capacity (RMC) values. The operator can control the frequent selection of
certain standby MMEs using their RMC value, thereby increasing the service
availability and reducing OPEX.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The S1-flex feature of Samsung enables eNB to be connected with a pool of active
and standby MMEs. The eNB sets up a dedicated S1 connection with the active
MME when UE connects to the network. If all the active MMEs are down, S1-flex
provides high availability by allowing eNB to route UE signaling messages to the
standby MME. When the failed MMEs are active and take over the functional role,
eNB establishes the new calls with active MMEs and maintains the ongoing calls
with standby MME.
Samsung eNB can have connections with up to 16 MMEs belonging to any MME
pool. Within 16 MMEs, eNB can be eNB 11 of overlapping area and either eNB
10 of MME Pool Area 1 or eNB 12 of MME Pool Area 2, as shown in the figure
below.
In this scenario:
The eNB 1 to 11 are connected to MME 1, MME 2, and MME 3 from MME Pool
Area 1
The eNB 11 to 16 are connected to MME 4, MME 5, and MME 6 from MME
Pool Area 2
The eNB 11 is at Overlapping Area and is active for both the pools
Similarly, when there is multiple standby MMEs configured, eNB selects the final
MME among the standby MMEs by round robin method.
The following figure shows a scenario where eNB 11 selects the final standby
MME by round robin approach among the standby MMEs: MME 1, MME 2, and
MME 5 if all active MME 3, MME 4, and MME 6 are down.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
To configure specific MME to be a standby MME mode (for geo redundancy
backup-mode), set BACKUP_MODE of corresponding MME to be Standby.
Key Parameters
CHG-MME-CONF/RTRV-MME-CONF (MME Information)
Parameter Description
MME_INDEX The index used to access the information. Since there are a total of 16 MMEs
that can be connected to an eNB, the index range is 0 to 15.
STATUS The EQUIP status information on MME.
N_EQUIP: The MME to connect does not exist.
EQUIP: The MME to connect exists
Parameter Description
ACTIVE_STATE The state information on the specified MME in operation. The MMEs for which
the S1 Setup is established, if there is an undesired MME, this parameter value
must be changed to Inactive. The default is active. If the STATUS parameter is
set to Equip, it is better not to change this parameter value to inactive.
Inactive: MME (S1 assigned) is not used.
Active: MME (S1 assigned) is used.
BACKUP_MODE This parameter defines MME's backup mode type.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-
UTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP)
BENEFIT
The operator manages the signalling associations between eNBs, surveying X2
interface, and recovering from errors.
Efficient usage of the radio resources can be provided.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
X2 AP Setup
The X2AP setup procedure is for setting up the X2 interface between two eNBs
for the first time. Assuming that eNB 1 triggers X2 setup, the X2 AP setup
procedures for successful case is as follows.
1 The eNB1 sends its global eNB ID, served cell information, neighbor
information, MultibandInfoList, and GU group ID list information to eNB2
using the X2 Setup Request message. (In the perspective of HeNB, eNB 1
shall contain the CSG ID IE in the X2 SETUP REQUEST message for each
CSG or hybrid cell)
2 The eNB2 receives the X2 Setup Request message and stores the information
contained in it in appropriate locations. Then, eNB2 sends its global eNB ID,
served cell information, neighbor information, and GU group ID list
information to eNB1 using the X2 Setup Response message. (In the
perspective of HeNB, eNB2 shall contain the CSG ID IE in the X2 SETUP
RESPONSE message for each CSG cell or hybrid cell. The eNB receiving the
IE shall take this information into account when further deciding whether X2
handover between the source cell and target cell may be performed.)
The X2 AP setup procedure for unsuccessful case is as follows:
Samsung eNB2 sends X2 Setup failures to the eNB1 if:
received PLMN is not supported or
received ECGI is not eNB2's ECGI
X2 AP Reset
If an abnormal failure occurs with the X2 interface between two interacting eNBs,
X2AP Reset procedure is performed to reconcile the resources between the two
eNBs.
The X2 AP reset procedure is as follows:
The operator could manage the neighbor eNB link status as follows:
locked: Cancels the relevant X2 handover procedure if there is any current X2
handover call, and blocks a new X2 handover out.
unlocked: Normally processes the X2 Handover.
shuttingDown: Normally processes the relevant X2 handover procedure if there is
any current X2 handover call, and blocks a new X2 handover out.
To recover X2 connection, operator can perform the following actions through
LSM. (Refer the detail to the system operation part)
Turn OFF/ON x2 connection with each neighbor eNB manually.
Send SCTP ABORT message only to neighbor eNBs which current X2 status is
enable.
Send SCTP ABORT message to all neighbor eNBs regardless of the current X2
interface status.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Pre-condition
SCTP connection is established and operational state is normal.
Activation
The NO_X2 value must be set to 'False'.
Deactivation
The NO_X2 value must be set to 'True'.
Key Parameters
The maximum number of X2 neighbor eNB is 256 or 512.
The following table shows the several system parameters of each neighbor eNB
information:
CRTE-NBR-ENB/DLT-NBR-ENB/CHG-NBR-ENB/RTRV-NBR-ENB
Parameter Description
STATUS This parameter indicates the validity of the neighbor eNB.
N_EQUIP: The information is determined as invalid.
EQUIP: The information is determined as valid.
This parameter must be set accurately since it determines the X2 link and
handover execution.
NO_X2 This parameter determines whether to execute X2 link setup with the neighbor
eNB.
False: X2 link setup with the neighbor eNB is executed.
True: X2 link setup with the neighbor eNB is not performed.
The parameter must be set accurately for X2 link setup to be determined by the
setting.
NO_HO This parameter determines whether HO is possible with the neighbor eNB.
False: Handover is done with the neighbor eNB.
True: Handover is not done with the neighbor eNB.
The parameter must be set accurately for Handover to be executed as
determined by the setting.
ENB_ID This parameter indicates the eNB ID of the neighbor eNB to which the neighbor
cell belongs. Depending on the neighbor eNB type, the entry must be made in
20 bits for Macro eNB ID, and 28 bits for Home eNB. This information is used
during handover.
The eNB ID of the neighbor eNB must be entered accurately. If the information
does not match, the Handover will not be executed.
ENB_TYPE This parameter is the eNB type of the neighbor eNB.
Macro_eNB: Macro eNB.
Home_eNB: Home eNB.
ENB_MCC This parameter is the PLMN information (MCC) that represents the neighbor
eNB. Enter a 3-digit number whose each digit ranges from 0 to 9.
ENB_MNC This parameter is the PLMN information (MNC) that represents the neighbor
eNB. Enter a 2-digit or 3-digit number of whose each digit ranges from 0 to 9.
IP_VER IP address version indicating the IP address of a neighboring eNB. All
neighboring eNB IP version information must be the same.
IPV4: Indicates IPV4 address.
IPV6: Indicates IPV6 address.
NBR_ENB_IPV4 This parameter indicates the IP version 4 address of the neighbor eNB. This
information is used during X2 Link setup for the SCTP connection setup.
Accurately set the information to ensure proper X2 setup.
NBR_ENB_IPV6 This parameter indicates the IP version 6 address of the neighbor eNB. This
information is used during X2 Link Setup for the SCTP connection setup.
Accurately set the information to ensure proper X2 setup.
SECONDARY_NBR_ENB_ This parameter indicates the secondary IPv4 address of the neighbor eNB.
IPV4 This information is used during SCTP multi-homing connection setup.
SECONDARY_NBR_ENB_ This parameter indicates the secondary IPv6 address of the neighbor eNB.
Parameter Description
IPV6 This information is used during SCTP multi-homing connection setup.
ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE This parameter is the neighbor eNB link status information.
locked: Cancels the relevant X2 handover procedure if there is any current X2
handover call, and blocks a new X2 handover out.
unlocked: Normally processes the X2 Handover.
shuttingDown: Normally processes the relevant X2 handover procedure if there
is any current X2 handover call, and blocks a new X2 handover out.
REMOTE_FLAG This parameter indicates whether the neighbor eNB is managed by the same
EMS or a different EMS.
False: Neighbor eNB is managed by the same EMS.
True: Neighbor eNB is managed by a different EMB.
The SCTP protocol manages using several system parameters for time interval of
heartbeat message broadcast, re-broadcasting times of heartbeat or data message,
and initial re-broadcast timeout value for Round Trip Time (RTO), minimum re-
broadcast timeout value for RTO, maximum re-broadcast timeout value for RTO,
and init message broadcast time interval for re-connection trial. Details are shown
in below table.
CHG-SCTP-PARA/RTRV-SCTP-PARA
Parameter Description
HEART_BEAT_INTERVAL This parameter is the interval of transmitting a heartbeat message. A heartbeat
message is transmitted to check the validity of a link in the SCTP protocol.
NUM_PATH_RE_TX This parameter is the re-transmission count by which the SCTP path will be
failure if the response to the heartbeat or SCTP data is not received for more
than NUM_PATH_RE_TX.
RTO_INITIAL This parameter is the value used to calculate the SCTP round trip time (RTT). It
is the initial value of the Retransmission TimeOut which is used before the RTT
value is measured through packet transmission.
RTO_MIN The minimum value of the Retransmission TimeOut used to calculate the SCTP
Round Trip Time (RTT).
RTO_MAX The maximum value of the Retransmission TimeOut used to calculate the SCTP
Round Trip Time (RTT).
CONNECT_INTERVAL This parameter is the timer value to transmit the init msg. to attempt SCTP
connection periodically if a SCTP link is not set up for a peer node which is
equipped to the PLD.
NUM_ASSOC_RE_TX The number of times to retransmit heartbeat messages or SCTP data messages
in order to check whether the SCTP link is normal. The SCTP Association is
disconnected if responses to the heartbeats or SCTP data messages are not
received during specified (NUM_ASSOC_RE_TX) attempts.
Monitoring SCTP and X2 state of neighbor eNB are possible using RTRV-X2-
STS command.
The following table shows output information:
RTRV-X2-STS
Parameter Description
NBR_ENB_INDEX This parameter is the index of the neighbor eNB.
Parameter Description
NBR_ENB_ID This parameter is the ID of the neighbor eNB.
SCTP_STATE This parameter is the Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) status. It is
the physical connection status between the eNBs.
disable_SD_PlmnTg_MIS: shutdown by PLMN TGID (TunnelGroupId) setting
mismatch
disable_SD_PlmnTg_UA: shutdown by undecidable PLMN TGID
disable_SD_PlmnVr: shutdown by VR (Virtual Route) ID deletion.
disable_SD_NoX2: shutdown by NO_X2 setting
disable_SD_SonAnr: shutdown by one-way neighbor addition
disable_ABT_Inact: abort by SCTP INIT
disable_OOS: out of service (all case without above case)
X2AP_STATE This parameter is the X2AP status. It is the logical connection status between
eNBs. If SCTP is disabled, X2AP cannot be enabled.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-
UTRAN); S1 application protocol (S1AP)
[3] 3GPP TS36.423 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-
UTRAN); X2 application protocol (X2AP)
BENEFIT
The PDCP sublayer enables basic LTE service, which includes delivery of
control/user plane data.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The PDCP sublayer processes Radio Resource Control (RRC) messages in the
control plane and Internet Protocol (IP) packets in the user plane. The main
functions are header compression, security (integrity protection and ciphering),
and support for reordering and retransmission during handover. Each radio bearer
that uses the PDCP sublayer is configured to have one PDCP entity. Only
SRBs/DRBs mapped on DCCH and DTCH type of logical channels can use PDCP
sublayer functions.
The PDCP sublayer provides the following functions:
Header compression and decompression of user plane data
Transfer of control/user plane data
PDCP Sequence Number (SN) maintenance
Timer based discard of user plane data
Discard of duplicates
In-sequence delivery of upper layer PDUs at PDCP re-establishment of lower
layers for RLC AM
Duplicate detection/elimination of lower layer SDUs at PDCP re-establishment
for RLC AM
Ciphering and deciphering of user plane data and control plane data
Integrity protection and verification of control plane data
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
This feature is basically enabled and operator cannot disable.
Key Parameters
There are no related parameters.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.323 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) specification
BENEFIT
By limiting the maximum number UEs or bearers per cell and per eNB,
considering radio and backhaul bandwidth, operator can control the minimum
QoS level provided for UEs.
The operator can protect the system from being shutdown due to overload or
congestion
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
EM_HO_ENB_CALL_COUNT = MAX_ENB_CALL_COUNT *
CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO for the corresponding eNB. .
Also, there exist similar thresholds per cell as the figure below. Normal users can
be allowed up to NOR_CELL_CALL_COUNT per cell. Emergency and HO users
can be allowed up to EM_HO_CELL_CALL_COUNT per cell. These thresholds
can be configured for CAC via LSM by using
CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_NORMAL and
CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO as follows:
NOR_CELL_CALL_COUNT = MAX_CELL_CALL_COUNT *
CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_NORMAL for the corresponding cell.
EM_HO_CELL_CALL_COUNT = MAX_CELL_CALL_COUNT *
CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO for the corresponding cell.
In case of radio bearer, capacity-based CAC applies similar concept per cell as
illustrated in the figure below. Bearers for normal users can be allowed up to
NOR_DRB_CALL_COUNT per cell. Bearers for emergency and HO users can be
allowed up to EM_HO_DRB_COUNT per cell. Theses thresholds can be
configured for CAC by using DRB_CAC_THRESH_FOR_NORMAL and
DRB_CAC_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO as follows:
NOR_DRB_COUNT = MAX_DRB_COUNT *
DRB_CAC_THRESH_FOR_NORMAL for the corresponding cell.
EM_HO_DRB_COUNT= MAX_DRB_COUNT *
DRB_CAC_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO for the corresponding cell.
4 If both eNB and cell level CAC is passed, RRC connection establishment is
initiated by transmitting the RRC connection setup message to UE. If the call
is rejected and the call type is an emergency call, the longest call among active
calls in the cell is released. In case of a normal call, the RRC connection
release message is transmitted to UE and the call is released.
5 The UE transmits the RRC Connection Setup Complete message.
6 The eNB sends MME Initial UE message
After the RRC establishment, eNB capacity-based CAC operates by receiving the
initial context setup request or E-RAB setup/modify request message from MME
for the default radio bearer and dedicated radio bearer (DRB) setup.
1 The eNB capacity-based CAC runs per E-RAB.
oIf the attempted bearer is for normal user, NOR_DRB_COUNT is applied for
the threshold. If current number of bearers in the cell is less than
NOR_DRB_COUNT, call is admitted. Otherwise, the call is rejected.
oIf the attempted bearer is for emergency user, EM_HO_DRB_COUNT is
applied for the threshold. If current number of bearers in the cell is less
than EM_HO_DRB_COUNT, call is admitted. Otherwise, the call is
rejected.
2 If the E-RAB is successfully admitted, the RRC connection reconfiguration
message is transmitted to UE to initiate E-RAB (DRB) establishment.
3 If the call is rejected, whether to admit the E-RAB is determined in
interoperation with pre-emption function per E-RAB (DRB) to control the call
flow (a partial success per E-RAB is ignored).
4 The eNB sends MME E-RAB setup message.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 100
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 2 Call Control
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Execute the RTRV-ENB-CAC command to retrieve eNB Call Admission
Control.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 101
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 2 Call Control
Key Parameters
CHG-ENB-CAC/RTRV-ENB-CAC/CHG-CELL-CAC/RTRV-CELL-CAC
Parameter Description
CALL_COUNT_CAC_USAGE Whether to execute the Capacity-based Call Admission Control (CAC)
function per cell.
ci_no_use: The capacity-based CAC function per base station is not
performed.
ci_use: The capacity-based CAC function per base station is performed.
CELL_COUNT_CAC_USAGE Whether to execute the call count-based CAC function, which is one of the
capacitybased Call Admission Control (CAC) functions per cell.
ci_no_use: The capacity-based CAC function per cell is not performed.
ci_use: The capacity-based CAC function per cell is performed.
CHG-RRCONNREJECTDEPRIO-INF/RTRV-RRCONNREJECTDEPRIO-INF
Parameter Description
REJECT_DEPRIORITY_USE This attribute represents the use of de-prioritisation IE in RRC Connection
Reject message.
DEPRIORITY_TYPE This attribute represents the de-prioritisationType IE (frequency or E-UTRA) in
RRC Connection Reject message.
CHG-TIME-INF/RTRV-TIME-INF
Parameter Description
T325 This parameter is the timer value which UE start depriorising either the current
carrier frequency or E-UTRA. The UE start this timer when RRC Connection
Reject message which including deprioritisationReq. The default value is
min5, and it can be changed by the operator during operation as follows:
0: indicates 5 minutes
1: indicates 10 minutes
2: indicates 15 minutes
3: indicates 30 minutes
Refer to TS36.331 T325 for detail.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 102
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 2 Call Control
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 103
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 2 Call Control
LTE-SW4103, Preemption
INTRODUCTION
In case of no resource available, eNB can admit a new bearer by preempting
existing bearers. This feature can be used to provide admission to priority users
even in congestion.
The decision is based on Allocation and Retention Priority (ARP) information of
new bearer(s) and existing bearer(s). The ARP consists of priority level,
preemption capability, and preemption vulnerability, which are delivered from
MME to eNB during E-RAB establishment. When there are multiple preemptive
candidate bearers, eNB selects a longest call.
The MME has responsibility to configure appropriate ARP per each bearer.
BENEFIT
The operator can provide a differentiated service that allows a high-priority UE to
access the network even in congestion.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 105
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 2 Call Control
Handover of Preempted UE
The preempted UE can be handed over to a neighbor cell. The eNB sends MR
Solicitation to preempted UE and it performs handover procedures based on the
measurement result from UE. If multiple carriers are available, they are all
configured for the measurement. The operator can configure handover thresholds
appropriately for the peemption case. Also, they can enable or disable the
handover of preempted UE. According to eNB and UE situation, call procedure
executed can be divided as follows:
Inter-frequency handover: The UE to be pre-empted supports multiple E-UTRA
carriers, and inter-frequency handover is available according to the CAC pre-
emption handover function.
Intra-frequency handover: The UE to be pre-empted does not support multiple E-
UTRA carriers, and intra-frequency handover is available according to the
CAC pre-emption handover function.
Inter-frequency redirection: The UE to be pre-empted supports multiple E-UTRA
carriers, and inter-frequency handover is not available according to the CAC
pre-emption handover function.
RRC connection release: The UE to be pre-empted does not support multiple E-
UTRA carriers, or it supports multiple E-UTRA carriers, but inter-frequency
handover and inter-frequency redirection are not available according to the
CAC pre-emption handover function.
The following flowchart shows operation flow before the CAC pre-emption
handover function executes:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 106
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 2 Call Control
Upon receiving a new call/bearer setup or handover request, eNB performs CAC
function.
1 After CAC function is performed in step1, if the new 'call/bearer setup or
handover' request can be accepted without pre-emption, the request is accepted
and the next procedure is performed.
2 After CAC function is performed in step1, if pre-emption is needed, pre-emption
function is performed to decide whether pre-emption of the existing call is
available.
3 If pre-emption of the existing call is available in step3, the new 'call/bearer setup
or handover' request is accepted, and the next procedure is performed.
4 The CAC pre-emption handover function is performed for the pre-empted call
selected in step3. Also, CAC pre-emption handover is operated only when the
entire call is pre-empted.
When only some bearers of a call are pre-empted, CAC pre-emption handover
is not operated for the call.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 107
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 2 Call Control
The eNB operates CAC pre-emption handover function according to the result of
the CAC/pre-emption performance. (Continued from the [A] of the operation flow
before the CAC pre-emption handover function executes.)
1 The eNB finds whether there is enough resource available for the CAC pre-
emption handover process.
oIf the CAC pre-emption handover process is available in step1, step 2 is
performed.
oIf the CAC pre-emption handover process is not available in step1, step 7 is
performed.
2 The eNB decides target carrier that will handover the pre-empted call.
oIf UE does support multiple E-UTRA carriers, one of the carriers that are not
a serving carrier is selected.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 108
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 2 Call Control
oIf UE does not support multiple E-UTRA carriers, the serving carrier is
selected.
3 The eNB solicits UE for measurement report for the target carrier selected in
step2. At this moment, it starts a wait timer to determine whether the
measurement solicitation fails.
4 When the measurement report message is received from UE while the wait timer
of step3 is in operation, eNB checks if there exist neighbor cells whose UE
measurement results are above the configured threshold.
5 If there exist neighbor cells whose UE measurement results are above the
configured threshold in step4, the best cell is selected among cells and
handover preparation procedure starts.
6 If the handover preparation succeeds in step5, UE to be pre-empted is directed to
perform handover.
7 If one of the events below occurs during step4 to 6, CAC pre-emption handover
is unavailable. Thus it should be judged whether inter-frequency redirection is
available.
oThe wait timer of step3 expires while the measurement report message is not
received from UE yet.
oIn step 4, there is no neighbor cell whose UE measurement result is above the
configured threshold.
oIn step5, the handover preparation fails.
8 In step7, if UE does support multiple E-UTRA carriers, one of the carriers that
are not a serving carrier is selected and inter-frequency redirection is
performed.
9 In step7, if UE does not support multiple E-UTRA carriers, inter-frequency
redirection is unavailable. Thus, RRC connection release procedure is
performed.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
The operator can enable the preemption function by setting
PREEMPTION_FLAG to USE by executing the CHG-CELL-CAC command.
When this function is disabled, eNB ignores the ARP information received from
MME and it does not admit a new bearer when the configured maximum
number of bearers is all used.
The operator can also enable the preemption handover function by setting
ACTIVE_STATE to ACTIVE by executing the CHG-PREEMPT-HO
command.
Key Parameters
CHG-CELL-CAC/RTRV-CELL-CAC
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 109
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 2 Call Control
Parameter Description
CELL_NUM The cell number. This value must not exceed the maximum number of cells
supported by the system. It is determined by Carrier/Sector. For example, if the
maximum capacity system is 1 Carrier/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.
PREEMPTION_FLAG This parameter decides whether the cell enables or disables the use
preemption functionality.
CHG-PREEMPT-HO/RTRV-PREEMPT-HO
Parameter Description
CELL_NUM The cell number. This value must not exceed the maximum number of cells
supported by the system. It is determined by Carrier/Sector. For example, if the
maximum capacity system is 1 Carrier/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.
ACTIVE_STATE Whether to use the Preemption Handover Function
PREEMPTION_HO_THRES RSRP threshold used for triggering the EUTRA measurement report for
HOLD_RSRP Preemption Handover.
PREEMPTION_HO_THRES RSRQ threshold used for triggering the EUTRA measurement report for
HOLD_RSRQ Preemption Handover.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 110
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 2 Call Control
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); S1 Application
Protocol (S1AP), Section 9.2.1.60
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 111
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 2 Call Control
BENEFIT
The operator can enhance the utilization of frequency resource and obtain load
balance effects, and more for scheduling.
The UE can improve throughput and reduce file download delay.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The eNB supports two following operating modes to effectively support the CA
development scenario of 3GPP Rel10 TS36.300 Annex J:
CA Operation Mode Mode 1 Mode 2
Desirable Deployment Scenario #1 #1, #2
Characteristics Every PCells and SCells are 1:1 Release and re-connection SCell
paired. The pre-designated paired based on PCell-SCell Paired, and
SCell is always configured on MR at initial connection and HO in
initial connection and HO in (Co- (Co-located + MR)
located)
Measurement Configured SCell Configuration SCell Configuration
Configuration Frequency Event A2 Configuration for SCell
State release
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 112
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 2 Call Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 114
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 2 Call Control
Release of event A2 measurement for SCell release at SCC of the released SCell
is MO
Configuration of event A4 measurement for SCell addition at SCC of the released
SCell is MO
On Receiving RRC Connection Re-establishment
The eNB performs the following just after receiving the
RRCConnectionReestablishment message from the UE: Release of all SCells
configured.
After completes the RRC connection REestablishment (RRE) procedure, the
configuration related to the CA on the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message is
performed as same as the RRC connection establishment.
Operation at Intra-eNB Handover
If CA supporting eNB receives a HO event MR and the neighbor cell triggering
the event is a cell belongs to eNB includes the PCell, the following check
operations are performed in serial order to determine CA availability in the target
cell:
C1. PCell CA ON/OFF Check
C3. CA Band Capability Check
C6. Co-Schedulability Check
C5. SCell Availability Check
Based on the conditions according to the CA operating modes, eNB adds the
following configurations in the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message
including MobilityControlInfo.
In case of Mode 1,
If all conditions C1 and C3 are satisfied, and C5 is satisfied for the paired SCell,
UE is configured to add the paired SCell on the SCC.
In case of Mode 2,
If all conditions C1 and C3 are passed, and C5 is satisfied for the paired SCell,
UE is configured to add the paired SCell on the SCC.
The eNB configures event A2 measurement for SCell release at SCC of the added
SCell is MO.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 115
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 2 Call Control
UE-RadioAccessCapability.
Operation of Target eNB
When the target eNB supporting CA receives the S1AP or X2AP: Handover
Request message from the source eNB, it performs the following check operations
in serial order to determine the CA availability of UE from the source eNB:
C1. PCell CA ON/OFF Check
C3. CA Band Capability Check
C6. Co-Schedulability Check
C5. SCell Availability Check
C8. UE FGI bit 112 Check
If all conditions C1 to C3 are satisfied, eNB configures as followings:
In case of Mode 1,
If C5 is satisfied for the paired SCell, eNB configures UE to add paired SCell that
meets C3.
In case of Mode 2,
If C5 is satisfied for the paired SCell, eNB configures UE to add paired SCell that
meets C3.
The eNB configures event A2 measurement for SCell release at SCC on which
the SCells are added.
When UE unsatisfied C8 performs S1 HO, and the handover type described in the
S1AP: Handover Required message is either of the following cases, the target eNB
does not include the configuration of SCell addition nor measurement for
searching SCell in the Handover Request Acknowledge message, but configures
one more separate RRC Connection Reconfiguration message after completion of
the handover of UE.
UTRAN to LTE
GERAN to LTE
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 116
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 2 Call Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 117
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 2 Call Control
Limitation
PCell Frequency Switching does not apply to UEs having GBR bearer(s).
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 118
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 2 Call Control
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Execute the CHG-CACELL-INFO command to configure
CA_AVAILABLE_TYPE to DL_Only.
Key Parameters
CHG-CACELL-INFO/RTRV-CACELL-INFO
Parameter Description
CA_AVAILABLE_TYPE This parameter indicates whether to support carrier aggregation (CA).
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 119
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 2 Call Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 120
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 2 Call Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 121
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 2 Call Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 122
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 2 Call Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 123
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 2 Call Control
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS 36.101 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User
Equipment (UE) radio transmission and reception
[2] 3GPP TS 36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[3] 3GPP TS 36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 124
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 3 Load Control
BENEFITS
This feature reduces the overload state of LTE cell by using WCDMA network.
The bad QoE due to overload will be reduced.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 125
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 3 Load Control
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Samsung intra-LTE LB is operating in the following procedure:
1 Cell load monitoring for a serving cell
oIn case of cell load definition, refer to SW2001 Feature Description (FD).
oIf cell load exceeds the iratOffloadThreshold, the blind offloading to
WCDMA operation is triggered.
2 UE selection and redirection execution
oAfter checking UE capability, select UEs that support N_LBMC_TARGET
WCDMAs and perform redirection.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Execute the CHG-TM-CNTR command to set IRAT_3G_OPERATION_MODE to
BLIND_MODE.
To set UTRAN in top priority to select RAT for blind offloading as an additional
option, execute the CHG-IRAT-MLB command to set
IRAT_3G_OFFLOAD_PRIORITY to 3.
Key Parameters
CHG-TM-CNTR/RTRV-TM-CNTR
Parameter Description
IRAT_3G_OPERATION_MODE Set the IRAT MLB operating mode for UTRAN.
CHG-IRAT-MLB/RTRV-IRAT-MLB
Parameter Description
IRAT_3G_OFFLOAD_PRIORIT Top priority configuration parameter for 3G as a basis to select RAT for a
Y cell load reporting request
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2
[2] 3GPP 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol
specification
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 126
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 3 Load Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 127
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 3 Load Control
BENEFIT
The load balancing is achieved between two links
The operator can monitor all traffic of a specific UE on the same link
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
In case of load balancing between backhaul links that are connected to eNB,
assume that the backhaul network shall be configured to support the separated two
links, and front-end switches (or routers) in different path shall be connected to
each other to secure an emergency path in case of link failure.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 128
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 3 Load Control
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
When eNB equips two Ethernet links and both are active means, eNB starts to
distribute calls over two links. When one link becomes not available, eNB will
forward all the packets to the other available link. There is no handler that operator
can enable or disable this feature
Key Parameters
There are no related parameters.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 129
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 3 Load Control
REFERENCE
N/A
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 130
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 3 Load Control
BENEFITS
The operator can prevent UL packets from being discarded at eNB due to UL
backhaul congestion
The delayed UL packet transmission can be one way to cause flow control at the
application layer
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The eNB controls congestion toward UL by recalculating UE-AMBR parameter
using adjustment factor (R) value if packets are discarded due to congestion in UL
backhaul section. The detailed procedure is as follows.
The figure below describes the overall functional architecture for UL congestion
prevention. The eNB internally classifies UL packets into different queues.
Packets from bearers with a specific QCI are sent to a specific queue. Usually,
queues that serve GBR bearers have a higher priority and their packets are
transmitted before the packets in the queues that serve Non-GBR bearers. If the
number of packets in one of the queues for Non-GBR bearers increases over a
threshold, eNB calculates Rate Adjustment Factor (R) and sends it to UL
Scheduler.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 131
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 3 Load Control
Packet Drop
A packet drop occurs when the maximum volume of buffer controlled by eNB is
finally exceeded after a gradual increase in the amount of packet data that eNB has
transmitted in the direction of UL. To prevent packet drops, execute UL flow
control function or UL congestion prevention function.
In other words, periodically monitor the number of packets piled up in UL buffer
of the eNB and, when UL traffic exceeds the threshold (Low_Threshold), reduce
the number of packets that UE transmits to eNB by decreasing UE-AMBR value
applied to UE by a regular amount.
Parameter Description
Low_Threshold This parameter indicates the minimum volume of the buffer that can affect the
Rate Adjust Factor.
High_Threshold This parameter indicates volume of the buffer that minimizes the Rate Adjust
Factor.
Buffer_Monitoring_Period The interval at which the Rate Adjust Factor is calculated by measuring the
number of packets in the buffer of eNB.
MIN_UE-AMBR The minimum UE-AMBR that can be allocated to UE when congestion occurs.
Function_Enabler The function that enables or disables (ON/OFF) UL congestion prevention
function.
Response_Mode This parameter determines whether the Response_Mode is linear or non-linear.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 132
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 3 Load Control
The operator can change the values of low_threshold and high_threshold in the
network management.
The UL congestion prevention function can be turned ON or OFF by using
system parameters.
Buffer Monitoring
Monitors the queue length (Q_Length) periodically
The intervals are from double digit number msec. 20 ms at the minimum
Measures the Q_Length of queue with the largest buffered amount and relays the
value to the rate feedback block. Based on Q_Length, the rate feedback block
determines and relays the rate adjustment factor R to UL-Scheduler to
calculate the modified UE-AMBR.
Linear Function
The linear function determines the rate adjustment factor R based on the Q_Length
as shown below:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 133
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 3 Load Control
If R value is different from the previous value, relays the value to UL scheduler to
calculate the modified UE-AMBR. (Modified UE-AMBR = max (R x UE-AMBR).
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 134
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 3 Load Control
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
The eNB provides the scheduling functions to limit the volume of data
transmitted from UE when there is a limitation on bandwidth of the uplink
backhaul line.
If monitoring state is enabled, perform the queue monitoring to determine the
occurrence of backhaul congestion.
The UL Congestion Prevention parameters can be activated by executing the
CHG-BHCGT-PARA command.
Key Parameters
CHG-BHCGT-PARA/RTRV-BHCGT-PARA
Parameter Description
DB-INDEX Backhaul Congestion Monitoring Parameter Index
MONITORING-STATE This parameter indicates to enable the queue monitoring, which is used to
determine whether the backhaul is congested.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
HIGH_THRESHOLD The high threshold of the queue length used to control the uplink traffic. It must
be larger than the low threshold.
LOW_THRESHOLD The low threshold of the queue length used to control the uplink traffic. It must
be less than the high threshold.
MONITORING_PERIOD The interval at which backhaul congestion is monitored in ms. The default is
100 (ms). The target queues are monitored every interval set in this parameter.
MIN_UE_AMBR The UL Effective UE-AMBR must a larger than Minimum UE-AMBR to
guarantee a basic service availability of UEs.
RESPONSE_MODE This parameter indicates a method to calculate UE-AMBR Rate Adjustment
Factor
0: Linear
1: Non-linear
REFERENCE
N/A
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 135
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 3 Load Control
BENEFIT
This feature helps eNB from being overloaded by configuring the threshold
settings.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
This feature enables operator to configure the monitoring duration for eNB
overload protection. The maximum number of request messages for each RRC
establishment cause and PS paging is shown below:
The maximum number of highPriorityAccess calls
The maximum number of mo-Signaling calls
The maximum number of mo-Data calls
The maximum number of delayTolerantAccess
The maximum number of PS paging (if include paging priority IE, then eNB will
not discard the paging message)
Refer to RRC establishment causes in RRCConnectionRequest message.
Emergency and mt-Access calls are not limited.
eNB Operation
The eNB observes number of call request per RRC establishment cause and
number of PS paging for the monitoring time, which is specified in the system
parameter.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 136
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 3 Load Control
If the count exceeds maximum number of call requests for establishment cause or
PS paging message, then eNB will discard the call.
When the monitoring time expires, eNB initializes all counters for RRC
establishment causes and PS paging messages. Then, eNB begins to count up
during the next monitoring time period. When the counter reaches configured
maximum limit, eNB discards any additional request messages.
Operation Procedure
Establishment Cause Based Protection Procedure
The maximum count of call connection requests per unit time can be set as a
system parameter for each RRC establishment cause. However, if RRC
establishment cause is an emergency and mt-Access, this number cannot be set.
The integrated eNB monitors the number of call connection requests for each
RRC establishment cause during the monitoring period set by the system
parameter.
When RRC Connection Request message is received from UE, if the number of
call connection requests has not exceeded the threshold corresponding to the
RRC establishment cause, which is included in the RRC Connection Request
message, the call connection request is accepted. If count exceeds the
threshold, the call connection request is not accepted.
If the monitoring period set by the system parameter has expired, the integrated
eNB initializes the count of call connection requests for each RRC
establishment cause.
The RRC establishment cause can be used by the network to prioritise the
connection establishment request from UE at the high load situation in the
network.
Paging Based Protection Procedure
The maximum count of paging processes per unit time can be set as a system
parameter.
The number of paging requests is monitored during the monitoring period set by
the system parameter.
If the number of paging requests received from MME has not yet exceeded the
threshold, the paging message is processed. If the number exceeds the
threshold, further paging requests are ignored.
If include paging priority IE received from MME, then eNB will not discard the
paging message.
If the monitoring period set by the system parameter has expired, the paging
request count is initialized.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 137
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 3 Load Control
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Oveload Protection(CALL): Change the overload protect control mode with
CHG-OVLD-PTC command
oProtectPerNormalCall: Number of Normal Call based Overload Protection
(control 1)
oProtectPerEstablishCause: Establish Cause based Overload Protection
(control 2)
Overload Protection(psPaging): Change the psPaginglProtectUsage to USE with
CHG-OVLD-PTC command
Key Parameters
Parameter Description
OVERLAOD_PROTECT_CT Setting value for overload protect.
RL 0: noUse
1:ProtectPerNormalCall
2:ProtectPerEstablishCause
PS_PAGING_PROTECT_U Whether to execute psPaging protect function
SAGE
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 138
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 3 Load Control
BENEFIT
The operators can prioritize MMTel voice, MMTel video, and SMS access
attempts over other data packet services.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
To allow UE to skip Access Class Barring for specific application such as mobile
originating MMTELVoice, MMTELVideo, or SMS, eNB can broadcast 3 ACB
skip indicators in SIB2 under system configuration. When UE tries to establish
RRC connection for specific application, UE checks relevant ACB skip indicator
and skips ACB and consider access to the cell as not barred if ACB skip indicator
for relevant application is set.
The following figure shows ACB skip operation for a mobile originating
MMTELVoice:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 139
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 3 Load Control
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
The Smart Congestion Mitigation is to configure Access Class Barring Skip
indicator as per Service Specific Access Control.
Key Parameters
RTRV-BAR-PARA/CHG-BAR-PARA
Parameter Description
acBarringSkipForMMTELvoice This parameter indicates to enable/disable skipping of Access Class
Barring (Mo-Sig, Mo-Data) procedure when MMTEL Voice is used.
acBarringSkipForMMTELvideo This parameter indicates to enable/disable skipping of Access Class
Barring (Mo-Sig, Mo-Data) procedure when MMTEL Video is used.
acBarringSkipForSMS This parameter indicates to enable/disable skipping of Access Class
Barring (Mo-Sig, Mo-Data) procedure when SMS is used.
REFERENCE
[1] TR 36.848 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN);
Study on smart congestion mitigation
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 141
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
BENEFIT
The operator can provide idle mobility to its subscribers within E-UTRAN.
The LTE users in idle state can be moving within E-UTRAN.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
PLMN Selection
When LTE UE is switched ON, it will start a process to find Public Land Mobile
Network (PLMN). The PLMN may be selected either automatically or manually,
depending on the device's configuration.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 142
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Based on the request from NAS layer of UE, if a required PLMN is already
associated with LTE, UE shall scan LTE carriers based on UE stored information.
The UE shall search for the strongest PLMN cell and tune to the Physical
Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH to read SIB1(s), where PLMN information is
delivered. The PLMN which is reported to NAS shall have its measured RSRP
value. Once PLMN (high quality or otherwise) is selected, UE access stratum will
be instructed to measure reference signal and read the PDSCH for SIB1. This
process occurs again to initiate cell selection using the S-Criteria (based on
Q_RX_LEV_MIN). At this stage if the S-criteria is not met, UE will go into
limited service (for emergency calls) or will find an equivalent PLMN.
The following figure shows the idle mode state procedure:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 143
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Cell Selection
Initial Cell Selection
The following figure shows initial cell selection procedures:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 144
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Cell Barring
The LTE E-UTRAN cells broadcast cell selection information through SIB1 and
SIB2 (AC-Barring).
SIB1 has two fields for cell status indication:
cellBarred
cellReservedForOperatorUse
cellBarred is common for all PLMNs and cellReservedForOperatorUse is specific
per PLMN.
When cell status is indicated as 'not barred' and 'not reserved' for operator use, all
UEs shall treat this cell as candidate during the cell selection and cell reselection
procedures.
When cell status is indicated as 'not barred' and 'reserved' for operator use for any
PLMN,
The UEs assigned to Access Class 11 or 15 operating in their HPLMN/EHPLMN
shall treat this cell as candidate during the cell selection and reselection
procedures if the field cellReservedForOperatorUse for that PLMN set to
'reserved'.
The UEs assigned to an Access Class in the range of 0 to 9, 12 to 14 shall behave
as if the cell status is 'barred' in case the cell is 'reserved for operator use' for
the registered PLMN or the selected PLMN.
When cell status 'barred' is indicated or to be treated as if the cell status is 'barred',
UE is not permitted to select/reselect this cell, not even for emergency calls.
Cell Selection Criteria
The cell selection is performed on the detected cell with RX signal and decoded
MIB and SIBs.
Cell selection criteria:
Srxlev > 0 AND Squal > 0
Where, Srxlev = Qrxlevmeas - (Q_RX_LEV_MIN + Q_RXLEV_MIN_OFFSET) -
Pcompensation, Squal = Qqualmeas - (Q_QUAL_MIN + Q_QUAL_MIN_OFFSET)
The following table shows the parameters of cell selection criteria:
Parameter Name Description
Srxlev Cell selection RX level value (dB)
Squal Cell selection quality value (dB)
Qrxlevmeas Measured cell RX level value (RSRP)
Qqualmeas Measured cell quality value (RSRQ)
Q_RX_LEV_MIN Minimum required RX level in the cell (dBm) (SIB1)
Q_QUAL_MIN Minimum required quality level in the cell (dB) (SIB1)
Q_RXLEV_MIN_OFFSET Offset to the signalled Q_RX_LEV_MIN taken into account in the Srxlev
evaluation as a result of a periodic search for a higher priority PLMN while
camped normally in a VPLMN (SIB1)
Q_QUAL_MIN_OFFSET Offset to the signalled Q_QUAL_MIN taken into account in the Squal
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 145
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Cell Reselection
The following figure shows initial cell reselection procedures:
When a cell reselection condition is met, UE in idle mode shall attempt to detect,
synchronize, and read system information of candidate frequencies. The UE shall
only perform cell reselection evaluation for E-UTRAN frequencies and inter-RAT
frequencies that are given in system information and for which UE has a priority
provided.
The cell reselection procedures are triggered when one of the following conditions
is met:
1 The serving cell does not fulfill Srxlev > S_INTRA_SEARCH_P and Squal >
S_INTRA_SEARCH_Q. In this case, UE performs intra-frequency cell
reselection procedures.
2 The UE has E-UTRA frequencies or UTRA frequencies with a reselection
priority higher than the reselection priority of the current E-UTRA frequency.
In this case, UE performs inter-RAT cell reselection procedures. The UE shall
search every layer of higher priority at least every Thigher_priority_search = (60 *
Nlayers) seconds, where Nlayers is the total number of configured higher priority
E-UTRA, UTRA carrier frequencies. (3GPP TS36.133 Section 4.2.2)
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 146
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
3 The service cell does not fulfil Srxlev > S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_P and Squal
> S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_Q. In this case, UE performs inter-RAT cell
reselection procedures for E-UTRA inter-frequency or UTRA frequency with
an equal or lower reselection priority than the reselection priority of the
current E-UTRA frequency.
Since RSRQ related parameters are not provided in network, devices will test
Srxlev only. The device will use S_INTRA_SEARCH and
S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH instead of S_INTRA_SEARCH_P and
S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_P respectively.
The following table shows the parameters that trigger cell reselection procedures:
Parameter Name Description
Srxlev Cell selection RX level value (in dB) measured by UE
Squal Cell selection quality value (in dB) measured by UE
S_INTRA_SEARCH This specifies the Srxlev threshold (in dB) for intra-frequency measurements.
This parameter is used by Rel-8 device (SIB3).
S_INTRA_SEARCH_P This specifies the Srxlev threshold (in dB) for intra-frequency measurements.
This parameter is used by Rel-9 device (SIB3).
S_INTRA_SEARCH_Q This specifies the Squal threshold (in dB) for intra-frequency measurements.
This parameter is used by Rel-9 device (SIB3).
S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH This specifies the Srxlev threshold (in dB) for E-UTRAN inter-frequency and
inter-RAT measurements. This parameter is used by Rel-8 device (SIB3).
S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_P This specifies the Srxlev threshold (in dB) for E-UTRAN inter-frequency and
inter-RAT measurements. This parameter is used by Rel-9 device (SIB3).
S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_Q This specifies the Squal threshold (in dB) for E-UTRAN inter-frequency and
inter-RAT measurements. This parameter is used by Rel-9 device. (SIB3).
Q_RX_LEV_MIN This specifies the minimum required Rx level in the cell in dBm (SIB3).
Q_QUAL_MIN_REL9 This specifies the minimum required quality level in the cell in dB. This
parameter is used by Rel-9 device (SIB3).
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 147
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 148
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Rn = Qmeas,n - Q_OFFSET_FREQ
The following table shows the description of above mentioned parameters:
Parameter Name Description
Rs Rs is for serving cell.
Rn Rn is for neighbour cell.
Qmeas RSRP measurement quantity used in cell reselections.
Q_HYST This parameter (in dB) is to reduce Ping-Pong effects between serving and
neighbor cells.(SIB3)
Q_OFFSET_FREQ In case of intra-frequency: Equals to Qoffsets,n, if Qoffsets,n is valid, otherwise this
equals to zero.
T_RESELECTION This specifies the reselection timer value for EUTRAN (SIB3).
The UE shall perform ranking of all cells that fulfill the cell selection criterion S.
The cells shall be ranked according to the R criteria specified above, deriving
Qmeas,n and Qmeas,s and calculating the R values using averaged RSRP results. If a
cell is ranked as the best cell, UE shall perform cell reselection to that
corresponding cell.
The UE shall reselect the new cell, only if the following conditions are met:
The new cell is better ranked than the serving cell during a time interval
T_RESELECTION.
More than 1 second has elapsed since UE camped on the current serving cell.
Initial Attach
When UE camps on a suitable cell, if new cell does not belongs to at least tracking
areas to which UE is registered previously, the UE will register to the network by
sending a Tracking Area Update message.
The following figure shows the initial attach procedures:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 149
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
1~4) Step 2~4 completes RRC connection establishing of a SRB. The attach
procedure starts with RRC connection establishment procedure. The Attach
Request message included in RRCConnectionSetupComplete is transparently
delivered to MME in INITIAL UE MESSAGE.
5~9) The eNB sends INITIAL UE MESSAGE to MME, then MME responds with
INITIAL CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST after selecting S-GW.
10~12) The eNB acquires UECapabilityInformation and reports it to MME.
13~14) The eNB sends the integrity-protected AS Security Mode Command
message to UE. Then, UE starts control plane signalling integrity.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 150
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 151
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 152
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
9~10) Since UE has requested for combined EPS/IMSI attach, after the default
bearer establishment MME updates UEs location in 3G network by sending the
location update message with new LAI, IMSI and MME name to IWF
(MSC/VLR). After accepting the attach request by the network, default bearer will
be established. IWF updates UEs CS location in HLR.
11~14) The eNB acquires UECapabilityInformation and reports it to MME.
15~16) The eNB sends the integrity-protected AS Security Mode Command
message to UE. Then, UE starts control plane signalling integrity.
17~18) The eNB sends RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to data radio
bearer. After eNB receives CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST message from MME, it
creates a default radio bearer by sending RRCConnectionReconfiguration message
to UE. When UE receives RRCConnectionReconfiguration message, it can
transmit packets in uplink and eNB can deliver the packets toward S-GW.
19) The eNB sends Initial Context Setup Response message to MME and
completes the establishment of S1 bearer.
20~21) The UE sends ULInformationTransfer message to eNB, which includes
Attach Complete message. This message is transparently delivered to MME in
UPLINK NAS TRANSPORT message.
22~23) The MME sends Modify Bearer Request message to S-GW, to provide
downlink tunnel information of eNB. After S-GW receives the Modify Bearer
Request message, it can transmit packets in downlink.
Combined EPS and IMSI Detach
To detach the combined EPS/IMSI attached UE, the UE is required to be detached
from both EPS and CS domain.
The following figure shows the combined EPS/IMSI detach call flow:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 154
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
SIB4 contains neighbouring cell related information relevant only for intra-
frequency cell re-selection. Also, it includes cells with specific re-selection
parameters as well as blacklisted cells.
The following table shows the SIB4 message:
intraFreqNeighbCellList (List of intra- physCellId
frequency neighbouring cells with q-OffsetCell (Qoffsets,n, the offset between the two cells)
specific cell re-selection parameters, up
to 16)
intraFreqBlackCellList (List of blacklisted intra-frequency neighbouring cells, up to 16)
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
The Idle Mobility Support is a collective feature with which UE in Idle State
(Mode) selects a network or a carrier. But, the following key parameters control
the selection criteria of the cell which UE selects. Also, the settings of Command
and Parameter can control the system information message of E-UTRAN.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 155
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Key Parameters
RTRV-EUTRA-FA/CHG-EUTRA-FA
Parameter Description
PRIORITY This is a parameter specifying the priority of EUTRA-FA during idle reselection
or mobility control information. '7' is the highest priority. Ensure that not to set
the same priority when configuring multiple EUTRA-FAs.
Q_RX_LEV_MIN This parameter is minimum RX level required in a cell that is operating as
EUTRA-FA and its unit is dBm.
T_RESELECTION This parameter is the interval (timer) of reselection execution.
T_RESELECTION_SF_MED This parameter is the medium timer value of the reselection scaling factor.
IUM
T_RESELECTION_SF_HIG This parameter is the high timer value of the reselection scaling factor.
H
S_INTRA_SEARCH This parameter is the threshold value for intra-frequency measurement.
S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH This parameter is the threshold value for the inter-RAT and inter-frequency
measurement.
THRESH_SERVING_LOW This parameter is the low threshold for serving frequency upon reselection
evaluation.
THRESH_X_HIGH This parameter is the threshold value used by UE when reselecting the
frequency with priority higher than the currently camped frequency.
THRESH_X_LOW This parameter is the threshold value used when reselecting the low-priority
frequency from the high-priority frequency.
Q-OFFSER-FREQ This parameter is the frequency offset applied to the q-OffsetFreq of a SIB5
message.
S_INTRA_SEARCH_P This parameter is the threshold-P value for the intra-frequency measurement of
Rel-9.
S_INTRA_SEARCH_Q This parameter is the threshold-Q value for the intra-frequency measurement
of Rel-9.
S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_ This parameter is the threshold-P value for the inter-frequency measurement
P and Inter-RAT.
S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_ This parameter is the threshold-Q value for the inter-frequency measurement
Q and Inter-RAT.
Q_QUAL_MIN_REL9 This parameter is the qQualMin value for Rel-9.
THRESH_SERVING_LOW_ This parameter is the threshServingLowQ value for Rel-9.
Q_REL9
THRESH_XHIGH_Q_REL9 This parameter is the threshold value used by UE when reselecting the
frequency with priority higher than the currently camped frequency in the Rel-9.
THRESH_XLOW_QREL9 This parameter is the threshold value used when reselecting the low-priority
frequency from the high-priority frequency in the Rel-9.
RTRV-CELL-RSEL/CHG-CELL-RSEL
Parameter Description
Q_HYST The cell number. This value must not exceed the maximum number of cells
supported by the system.
Q_HYST_SFMEDIUM This parameter is the value added when UE speed is medium among Qhyst
values that are added to the current serving
cell in the cell reselection criteria. To apply the change of this parameter, the
SPEED_STATE_RESEL_PARAMS_USAG E should be changed to use in the
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 156
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
CHGMOBIL-STA beforehand.
Q_HYST_SFHIGH This parameter is the value added when UE speed is high among Qhyst values
that are added to the current serving cell in the cell reselection criteria. To
apply the change of this parameter, the
SPEED_STATE_RESEL_PARAMS_USAG E should be changed to use in the
CHGMOBIL-STA beforehand.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification
[3] 3GPP TS36.304 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User
Equipment (UE) procedures in idle mode
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 157
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
LTE-SW1004, S1 Handover
INTRODUCTION
S1 handover is mobility control functionality between two adjacent eNBs using S1
interface with MME (inter-eNB handover via S1 interface). S1 handover is used
when there is no available direct interface with target eNB, or target eNB belongs
to another MME group.
BENEFIT
The operator can provide connected mobility to its subscribers between cells in
different eNBs.
Users in a connected state can be moving within E-UTRAN, with change of
serving cell.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The following figure shows the S1 handover procedure in E-UTRAN (S1
handover with MME and S-GW relocation case):
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 158
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 159
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
2) The source eNB determines whether to perform S1-based handover into the
target eNB. This decision can be initiated if there is no X2 connection to target
eNB or inter-eNB handover of target eNB is configured to execute the S1
handover.
Handover decision in case of PCI duplication: On reception of MR message, eNB
checks whether PCI from MR exists in Neighbor NRT or not. If there are several
NRs with same PCI (this case is called PCI duplication), then eNB requests UE for
measurement with the purpose set to report CGI. After obtaining MR message
including ECGI, eNB triggers Handover Preparation using NR of the reported
ECGI.
3) The source eNB sends HANDOVER REQUIRED to source MME. The source
eNB provides information about which bearer is used for data forwarding and
whether direct forwarding is possible from source eNB to target eNB.
4)~6) The MME transmits the HANDOVER REQUEST message to target eNB.
This message creates UE context which has bearer related information and security
context in the target eNB.
7) The target eNB transmits the HANDOVER REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE
message to MME
8)~10) If indirect forwarding is used, MME transmits the Create Indirect Data
Forwarding Tunnel Request message to S-GW.
The S-GW replies to MME with the Create Indirect Data Forwarding Tunnel
Response message.
11) The source eNB receives the HANDOVER COMMAND from source MME.
12) The source eNB creates the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message using
the Target to Source Transparent Container IE included in the HANDOVER
COMMAND message and transmits it to UE.
To transmit the PDCP status and the HFN status of the E-RABs of which the
PDCP status must be preserved, source eNB transmits eNB/MME STATUS
TRANSFER message to target eNB via MME.
The source eNB must start forwarding downlink data to target eNB through the
bearer, which is planned to be used for data forwarding. This can be either direct
or indirect forwarding.
The UE performs synchronization to target eNB and connects to target cell
through RACH. The target eNB replies with UL allocation and timing advance.
13) After successful synchronization with the target cell, UE notifies the target cell
that the handover procedure is complete using the
RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message. The downlink packet
forwarded from source eNB can be transmitted to UE. The uplink packet can be
transmitted to S-GW from UE through target eNB
14)~16) The target eNB sends a HANDOVER NOTIFY message to MME to
inform that UE has changed cell.
17~18) The MME transmits the Modify Bearer Request message to S-GW per
each PDN connection.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 160
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Full Configuration
The full configuration option is used to support EUTRA handover to eNB of an
earlier release. The target uses a full configuration and previous configuration is
discarded by UE. This can lead to a change in RLC mode for a bearer and the
operation for RLC AM is the same as that for RLC UM. HFN is reset for all
bearers. Since source eNB may not be aware that target eNB is using full
configuration, there is no difference in source eNB behaviour. The target eNB
does not resend data that was attempted delivery to UE to prevent data duplication.
The source eNB includes ue-ConfigRelease IE in HandoverPreparationInformation
message, ue-ConfigRelease IE indicates the RRC protocol release used for UE
specific dedicated configuration. If target eNB does not support the release of RRC
protocol which source eNB used to configure UE, target eNB may be unable to
comprehend UE configuration provided by source eNB. In this case, target eNB
should use the full configuration option to reconfigure UE for Handover and Re-
establishment. Full configuration option includes an initialization of the radio
configuration, which makes the procedure independent of the configuration used in
the source cell with the exception that the security algorithms are continued for the
RRC re-establishment. In case of reconfigurations involving the full configuration
option, the PDCP entities are newly established (SN and HFN do not continue) for
all DRBs irrespective of the RLC mode.
The UE deletes current configuration and applies new configuration based on the
configuration provided by target eNB. Security configuration is retained and
security algorithm is retained for re-establishment. SRBs are reconfigured. DRBs
are released and re-setup using new configuration.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Select 1 event to use to activate S1 Handover.
ACTIVE_STATE of CHG-EUTRA-A3CNF with PURPOSE
A3PurposeIntraLteHandover set to active or ACTIVE_STATE of CHG-
EUTRA-A5CNF with PURPOSE A5PurposeIntraLteHandover set to active
A3 event is preferred.
Set NO_HO of CHG-NBR-ENB to false. It is controlled by NBR eNB base.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 161
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Key Parameters
CHG-EUTRA-A3CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A3CNF
Parameter Description
PURPOSE The purpose for using Event A3. It is currently used for intra-LTE handover and
the SON ANR function.
IntraLteHandover
ReportStrongestCells
IntraFrequencyLb
CaInterFreq
ACTIVE_STATE Whether to use Event A3.
Inactive: Event A3 is not used.
Active: Event A3 is used.
A3_OFFSET RSRP threshold used for triggering the EUTRA measurement report for Event
A3.
TIME_TO_TRIGGER timeToTrigger value for Event A3. The time-ToTrigger value is the period of
time that must be met for UE to trigger a measurement report.
TRIGGER_QUANTITY Quantity (RSRP/RSRQ) used to calculate a triggering condition for Event A3.
Either RSRP or RSRQ is assigned.
CHG-EUTRA-A5CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A5CNF
Parameter Description
PURPOSE The purpose for using Event A5. Not in current use. The definition is made for
later use.
ci_A5PurposeIntraLteHandover: Intra-LTE handover.
ci_A5PurposeSpare_1: Reserved.
ci_A5PurposeSpare_2: Reserved.
ACTIVE_STATE Whether to use the Event A5.
Inactive: Event A5 is not used.
Active: Event A5 is used.
A5_THRESHOLD1_RSRP RSRP threshold1 used for triggering the EUTRA measurement report for Event
A5.
A5_THRESHOLD2_RSRP RSRP threshold2 used for triggering the EUTRA measurement report for Event
A5.
TIME_TO_TRIGGER timeToTrigger value for Event A5. The time-ToTrigger value is the period of
time that must be met for the UE to trigger a measurement report.
TRIGGER_QUANTITY This parameter is used to set up the TriggerQuantity of Event A5 during
ReportConfigEutra configuration. The triggerQuantity can be set to
rsrp/rsrq/followA2Event. The UE transmits Event A5 when RSRP or RSRQ
meets a specific threshold according to triggerQuantity. If the triggerQuantity is
RSRP, the A5_THRESHOLD_RSRP is used. If it is RSRQ, the
A5_THRESHOLD_RSRQ is used. If the triggerQuantity is followA2Event, It will
follow the triggerQuantity of the previously received A2 event with handover
purpose. (it is noted that this configuration is only available if the A5 purpose is
handover related case, that is, A5PurposeIntraLteHandover) This change will
be applied to UE from next RRC signaling procedure (for example, Attach or
Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new setting will not be updated to the
current active UEs.
rsrp: The trigger quantity of this event is set RSRP.
rsrq: The trigger quantity of this event is set RSRQ.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 162
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
followA2Event: The trigger quantity of this event follows the trigger quantity of
the previously received A2 event.
CHG-NBR-ENB/RTRV-NBR-ENB/CRTE-NBR-ENB/DLT-NBR-ENB
Parameter Description
NO_X2 Whether to make X2 connection to neighbor eNB.
False: X2 connection to neighbor eNB is made.
True: X2 connection to neighbor eNB is not made.
NO_HO Whether to perform handover to the neighbor eNB.
False: Handover to neighbor eNB is performed.
True: Handover to neighbor eNB is not performed.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 163
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 164
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 165
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 166
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
LTE-SW1005, X2 Handover
INTRODUCTION
X2 handover is a handover between two adjacent eNBs using X2 interface (inter
eNB handover via X2 interface).
X2 based handover is used when:
There is an available direct interface with the target eNB
The target eNB belongs to the same MME group.
BENEFIT
The operator can provide connected mobility to its subscribers between cells in
different eNBs.
Users in a connected state can be moving within E-UTRAN, with change of
serving cell.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
When eNB receives a measurement report including Event A3 from UE, eNB
triggers intra-LTE handover to the best cell indicated in the measurement report.
Because handover target cell is decided by UEs measurement results for
neighbouring cells.
The eNB can transit from X2 handover to S1 handover with direct forwarding,
when X2 setup fail (cause: 'Invalid MME Group ID').
The following figure shows the X2 handover procedure in E-UTRAN:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 167
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 168
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 169
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 170
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Select 1 event to use to activate X2 Handover.
ACTIVE_STATE of CHG-EUTRA-A3CNF with PURPOSE
A3PurposeIntraLteHandover set to active or ACTIVE_STATE of CHG-
EUTRA-A5CNF with PURPOSE A5PurposeIntraLteHandover set to active
A3 event is preferred.
Set NO_X2 of CHG-NBR-ENB to false. It is controlled by NBR eNB base.
Key Parameters
CHG-EUTRA-A3CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A3CNF
Parameter Description
PURPOSE The purpose for using Event A3. It is currently used for intra-LTE handover and
the SON ANR function.
ci_A3PurposeIntraLteHandover: Intra-LTE handover.
ci_A3PurposeReportStrongestCells
ci_A3PurposeIntraFrequencyLb.
ci_A3PurposeCaInterFreq
ci_A3PurposeIntraFrequencyCre
ci_A3PurposePeriodicMr
ACTIVE_STATE Whether to use Event A3.
Inactive: Event A3 is not used.
Active: Event A3 is used.
A3_OFFSET RSRP threshold used for triggering EUTRA measurement report for Event A3.
TIME_TO_TRIGGER timeToTrigger value for Event A3. The time-ToTrigger value is the period of
time that must be met for the UE to trigger a measurement report.
TRIGGER_QUANTITY Quantity (RSRP/RSRQ) used to calculate a triggering condition for Event A3.
Either RSRP or RSRQ is assigned.
CHG-EUTRA-A5CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A5CNF
Parameter Description
PURPOSE The purpose for using Event A5. Not in current use. The definition is made for
later use.
ci_A5PurposeIntraLteHandover: Intra-LTE handover.
ci_A5PurposeCaInterFreq: CaInterFreq.
ci_A5PurposeMbms: InterFrequencyMbms.
ci_A5PurposeArpHandover: ArpHandover.
ci_A5PurposeOnDemandHO: OnDemandHandover.
ci_A5PurposeInterFrequencySPID: InterFrequencySPID.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 171
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
ci_A5PurposeSpare_2: reserved.
ACTIVE_STATE Whether to use the Event A5.
Inactive: Event A5 is not used.
Active: Event A5 is used.
A5_THRESHOLD1_RSRP RSRP threshold1 used for triggering EUTRA measurement report for Event
A5.
A5_THRESHOLD2_RSRP RSRP threshold2 used for triggering EUTRA measurement report for Event
A5.
TIME_TO_TRIGGER timeToTrigger value for Event A5. The time-ToTrigger value is the period of
time that must be met for the UE to trigger a measurement report.
TRIGGER_QUANTITY Quantity (RSRP/RSRQ) used to calculate a triggering condition for Event A5.
Either RSRP or RSRQ is assigned.
CHG-NBR-ENB/RTRV-NBR-ENB/CRTE-NBR-ENB/DLT-NBR-ENB
Parameter Description
NO_X2 Whether to make X2 connection to neighbor eNB.
False: X2 connection to neighbor eNB is made.
True: X2 connection to neighbor eNB is not made.
NO_HO Whether to perform handover to neighbor eNB.
False: Handover to neighbor eNB is performed.
True: Handover to neighbor eNB is not performed.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 172
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 173
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 174
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 175
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 176
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
BENEFIT
The operator can provide connected mobility to its subscribers over LTE and
UTRAN coverage.
Users in connected state can move across E-UTRAN and UTRAN coverage,
remaining in the connected state.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
When a user under LTE data services area and moves to UTRAN, eNB needs to
transit the service to UTRAN using the PS handover procedure to provide
seamless data services. To support seamless data service when UE moves from E-
UTRAN to UTRAN coverage, Samsung eNB supports PS handover to UTRAN
under the following conditions:
Target UTRAN shall support PS handover
UE shall support measurement reporting for UTRAN frequencies in E-UTRA
connected mode
UE shall support handover to UTRAN
UTRAN frequency shall be configured for PS handover purpose (Each UTRAN
frequency group can be configured to support CS service, PS service or both).
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 177
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
In case of data user in connected mode, Samsung LTE system provides two types
of methods for inter-RAT mobility to UTRAN, that is, PS redirection and PS
handover. The operator can choose which method is preferred for the inter-RAT
mobility based on their requirements. If forced redirection mode is chosen, inter-
RAT PS redirection is always used for inter-RAT connected mode mobility to 3G
(forced redirection option). On the other hand, if forced redirection mode is not
chosen, inter-RAT PS handover is preferred to PS redirection. Though PS
handover is preferred in the system setting, the serving eNB may perform PS
redirection because some reasons, for example, UE not support UTRAN
measurement/handover or no neighbor UTRAN cell is defined.
If the inter-RAT PS handover is used, serving eNB configures Event A2 (Serving
is worse than a threshold) measurement reporting to trigger UTRAN measurement.
On reception of measurement report triggered by Event A2, Samsung eNB
configures UTRAN measurement based on Event B2 (Serving becomes worse
than threshold_1 and inter RAT neighbor becomes better than threshold_2) or
Event B1 (Inter RAT neighbour becomes better than threshold) for UE. PS
handover to UTRAN is triggered on reception of Event B2/B1 as coverage based
trigger. In case of coverage based handover, UTRAN measurement based method
is only used, that is, if there is no UE measurement for UTRAN target carrier/cell,
PS handover is not triggered. In case of UEs which do not support UTRAN
measurement or UTRAN handover, the serving eNB always performs PS
redirection to move UE to UTRAN.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 178
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
The following figure shows the call flow for PS handover from E-UTRAN to
UTRAN procedure:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 179
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 180
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 181
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 182
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
To enable this feature, operator should configure the UTRAN Frequency
Information by executing the CHG-UTRA-FA command and A2 report
configuration for ci_A2PurposeIRatHo and B2 report configuration for the each
UTRAN carrier.
The handover target UTRAN cell need to be registered in the serving cell
neighboring cell list.
Key Parameters
CHG-UTRA-FA/RTRV-UTRA-FA
Parameter Description
STATUS This parameter indicates whether to use UTRAN carrier information.
N_EQUIP: Does not use UTRAN carrier information.
EQUIP: Uses UTRAN carrier information.
DUPLEX_TYPE This parameter is the duplex mode information of UTRAN carrier.
FDD: Frequency Division Duplex.
TDD: Time Division Duplex.
UARFCN_UL This parameter sets the Uplink Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
(ARFCN) value for the UTRA Frequency.
It executes Data Rule Check (DRC) to ensure that the same Uplink ARFCN
value based on the EQUIP state is not entered.
UARFCN_DL This parameter sets the Downlink Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 183
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
(ARFCN) value for the UTRA Frequency. It executes Data Rule Check (DRC)
to ensure that the same Downlink ARFCN value based on the EQUIP state is
not entered.
CHG-EUTRA-A2CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A2CNF
Parameter Description
PURPOSE This parameter is the purpose of using the Event A2 per cell. It is used to
activate the measurement gap as default.
LteHo: Used for Gap Activate.
LteBlind: Used for Blind HO.
IRatHo: Used for IRAT HO.
IRatBlind: Used for IRAT Blind HO.
Ca: Used for Carrer Aggregation.
CaPeriodicMr: Used for Add Smart Carrier Aggregation Periodic Measure
Config.
Srvcc: Used for Single Radio Voice Call Continuity.
Mdt: Used for Minimization of Drive Tests.
CaInterFreq: Used for Inter Frequency Carrier Aggregation.
InterFreqAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Frequency Anr.
InterRatAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Rat Anr.
ACTIVE_STATE This parameter indicates whether event A2 is enabled/disabled per target
frequency. This change will be applied to UE from next RRC signaling
procedure (for example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new
setting will not be updated to the current active UEs.
Inactive: Event A2 is not used.
Active: Event A2 is used. If HO of the target frequency is not needed in the
site, this is inactive.
CHG-UTRA-B2CNF/RTRV-UTRA-B2CNF
Parameter Description
PURPOSE This parameter is the purpose to retrieve the B2 report configuration
information used for interoperating with UTRAN.
InterRatHandover: Used for handover to UTRAN.
Srvcc: Used for SRVCC.
InterRatSPID: inter-RAT handover is executed for specific SPID with
handover mobility option.
OnDemandHandover: Enable the forced handover triggering by operator
Spare_1: Reserved field.
Spare_2: Reserved field.
ACTIVE_STATE This parameter indicates whether UTRA Event B2, which is triggered when
Inter RAT neighbor becomes better than threshold, is enabled/disabled.
This change will be applied to UE from next RRC signaling procedure (for
example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new setting will not be
updated to the current active UEs.
Inactive: UTRA Event B2 is not used.
Active: UTRA Event B2 is used.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 184
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
CHG-NBR-UTRAN/RTRV-NBR-UTRAN/CRTE-NBR-UTRAN/DLT-NBR-
UTRAN
Parameter Description
STATUS This parameter indicates the validity of the Neighbor UTRAN.
This parameter must be set accurately since it determines the RIM operation
and Handover execution.
N_EQUIP: The information is determined as invalid.
EQUIP: The information is determined as valid.
RNC_ID This parameter is RNC ID of UTRAN neighbor cell located near eNB.
C_ID This parameter indicates the cell ID value of UTRAN neighboring cell. This
data must be accurately entered to execute RIM process. The SI of UTRAN
neighboring cell, obtained through the RIM process, is used during CSFB with
3G SIB operation.
LAC This parameter indicates the Location Area Code (LAC) of UTRAN neighboring
Cell. This information is used during RIM operation and Handover. Make sure
that set the parameter accurately to ensure successful RIM operation and
Handover.
RAC This parameter indicates the routing area code of the neighboring UTRAN cell.
This information is used during RIM procedures and Handover. The parameter
must be set accurately because the information is used during RIM procedures
and Handover.
MCC0 ~ MCC5[4] This parameter is the PLMN list information (MCC) of a UTRAN neighbor cell
located around the eNB, Enter 3-digit number whose each digit ranges from 0
to 9. This information is used during RIM operation and Handover. Make sure
that set accurately to ensure successful RIM operation and Handover.
MNC0 ~ MNC5[4] This parameter is the PLMN list information (MNC) of a UTRAN neighbor cell
located around the eNB, Enter 3-digit or 2-digit number whose each digit
ranges from 0 to 9. This information is used during RIM operation and
Handover. Make sure that set accurately to ensure successful RIM operation
and Handover.
DUPLEX_TYPE This parameter is the duplex type information of a UTRAN neighbor cell
located near eNB. The duplex Type of UTRAN Neighboring Cell must be
entered accurately.
FDD: Frequency Division Duplex.
TDD: Time Division Duplex.
P_SCM_CODE This parameter indicates the scramble code information of the neighboring
UTRAN FDD cell. It is used during handover with the UTRAN. The parameter
must be set accurately since it is used during the handover.
ARFCN_UL This parameter indicates the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
(ARFCN) UL value of UTRAN neighboring cell. Values from 0 to 16,383 can be
entered. This should be matched with exact value used by the actual UTRAN
network.
ARFCN_DL This parameter indicates the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
(ARFCN) DL value of UTRAN neighboring cell. Values from 0 to 16,383 can be
entered. This should be matched with exact value used by the actual UTRAN
network.
Make sure that use the unique value compared to previously used value. If the
physCellID and ARFCN DL are same, the system determines the entry is
identical.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 185
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 186
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 187
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification
[3] 3GPP TS36. 413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN);
S1 Application Protocol (S1AP)
[4] 3GPP TS23.401 Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects;
GPRS enhancements for E-UTRAN access
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 188
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
BENEFIT
The operator can provide connected mobility to its subscribers from E-UTRAN
to UTRAN.
Users in connected state can move from E-UTRAN to UTRAN.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The operator needs to provide PS data service continuously even when LTE/3G
dual mode UE enters 3G-only coverage area. As one of the methods to send the
data UE to UTRAN, eNB initiates the redirection (release with redirect)
procedures. This is indicated by the redirect carrier information in the RRC
CONNECTION RELEASE message. In case of redirection, triggering due to UEs
mobility is supported even if no prior UE measurements have been performed on
the target UTRAN cell and/or frequency.
The following figure shows the Redirection to UTRAN without SI procedure:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 189
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
In case of data user in connected mode, Samsung LTE system provides two types
of methods for inter-RAT mobility to UTRAN, that is, PS redirection and PS
handover. The operator can choose which method is preferred for the inter-RAT
mobility based on their requirements. If forced redirection mode is chosen, inter-
RAT PS redirection is always used for inter-RAT connected mode mobility to 3G
(forced redirection option). On the other hand, if forced redirection mode is not
chosen, inter-RAT PS handover is preferred to PS redirection. Though PS
handover is preferred in the system setting, the serving eNB may perform PS
redirection because some reasons, for example, UE not support UTRAN
measurement/handover or no neighbor UTRAN cell is defined.
In case of UE which is candidate of PS redirection, the serving eNB configures
Event A2 (Serving is worse than a threshold_0) measurement to trigger PS
redirection. When the Event A2 measurement report from UE is received, PS
redirection to a target UTRA carrier is performed. On triggering of PS redirection,
the serving eNB redirects UE to the selected carrier by sending
RRCConnectionRelease message, which includes redirectedCarrierInfoIE.
The following figure shows the call flow for Redirection to UTRAN without SI
procedure:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 190
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Before redirection, uplink and downlink data traffic of LTE UE goes through eNB,
S-GW, and P-GW.
1 As UE moves away from source eNB, then eNB determines the redirection to
UTRAN (Event A2 is triggered).
2 The eNB transmits RRCConnectionRelease to UE. The message includes the
target UTRA carrier frequency to which UE will be redirected. At this step,
eNB releases both SRB and DRB.
3 The eNB transmits UE Context Release Request to MME to release UE specific
S1 connection between eNB and S-GW.
4 The MME sends the Release Access Bearer Request to S-GW to release the S1-
U bearer.
5 The S-GW responses by sending the Release Access Bearer Response to MME
after releasing eNB related information. Other elements of UEs S-GW
contexts are not affected in S-GW, and S-GW starts buffering the downlink
packets received for UE.
6 The MME sends UE Context Release Command to eNB to release the S1
signaling connection.
7 The eNB confirms the S1 Release by returning S1 UE Context Release
Complete message to MME. With this, the signalling connection between
MME and eNB for that UE is released.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 191
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
To enable this feature, operator should configure the UTRAN Frequency
Information by executing the CHG-UTRA-FA command and configure A2 report
configuration for ci_A2PurposeIRatHo and/or ci_A2PurposeIRatBlind.
If interRatDataOption in CHG-INTWO-OPT is set to 'Data_BlindOnly', Blind
Redirection is executed regardless UEs capabilities on Measurement for UTRAN
and PS handover to UTRAN.
Key Parameters
CHG-UTRA-FA/RTRV-UTRA-FA
Parameter Description
STATUS This parameter indicates whether to use UTRAN carrier information.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 192
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
N_EQUIP: Does not use UTRAN carrier information.
EQUIP: Uses UTRAN carrier information.
DUPLEX_TYPE This parameter is the duplex mode information of UTRAN carrier.
FDD: Frequency Division Duplex.
TDD: Time Division Duplex.
UARFCN_UL This parameter sets the Uplink Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
(ARFCN) value for the UTRA Frequency.
It executes Data Rule Check (DRC) to ensure that the same Uplink ARFCN
value based on the EQUIP state is not entered.
UARFCN_DL This parameter sets the Downlink Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
(ARFCN) value for the UTRA Frequency. It executes Data Rule Check (DRC)
to ensure that the same Downlink ARFCN value based on the EQUIP state is
not entered.
CHG-EUTRA-A2CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A2CNF
Parameter Description
PURPOSE This parameter is the purpose of using the Event A2 per cell. It is used to
activate the measurement gap as default.
LteHo: Used for Gap Activate.
LteBlind: Used for Blind HO.
IRatHo: Used for IRAT HO.
IRatBlind: Used for IRAT Blind HO.
Ca: Used for Carrer Aggregation.
CaPeriodicMr: Used for Add Smart Carrier Aggregation Periodic Measure
Config.
Srvcc: Used for Single Radio Voice Call Continuity.
Mdt: Used for Minimization of Drive Tests.
CaInterFreq: Used for Inter Frequency Carrier Aggregation.
InterFreqAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Frequency Anr.
InterRatAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Rat Anr.
ACTIVE_STATE This parameter indicates whether event A2 is enabled/disabled per target
frequency. This change will be applied to UE from next RRC signaling
procedure (for example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new
setting will not be updated to the current active UEs.
Inactive: Event A2 is not used.
Active: Event A2 is used. If HO of the target frequency is not needed in the
site, this is inactive.
CHG-INTWO-OPT/RTRV-INTWO-OPT
Parameter Description
INTER_RAT_DATA_OPTION This parameter indicates whether to force redirection during the inter RAT PS
handover for Data Call.
Data_UeCapability: Redirection or handover according to UE Capability.
Data_BlindOnly: Redirection is executed regardless of condition.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 193
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification
[3] 3GPP TS36. 413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN);
S1 Application Protocol (S1AP)
[4] 3GPP TS23.401 Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects;
GPRS enhancements for E-UTRAN access
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 194
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
BENEFIT
The operator can provide connected mobility to its subscribers from E-UTRAN
to UTRAN.
Users in connected state can move from E-UTRAN to UTRAN.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
By using this feature, serving eNB can include system information of the target
cell in the redirection message. So, the call setup delay in UTRAN can be reduced.
The operator needs to provide PS data service continuously even when LTE/3G
dual mode UE enters the 3G-only coverage area. As one of the methods to send
the data UE to UTRAN, eNB initiates the redirection (release with redirect)
procedures.
This is indicated by the redirect carrier information in the RRC CONNECTION
RELEASE message. If UE supports the enhanced redirection to UTRAN and
System Information (SI) of neighboring UTRAN cell is available, carry out
Redirection with SI to reduce the call setup time is UTRAN.
The following figure shows the PS redirection to UTRAN with SI procedures:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 195
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
In case of data user in connected mode, Samsung LTE system provides two types
of methods for inter-RAT mobility to UTRAN, that is, PS redirection and PS
handover. The operator can choose which method is preferred for the inter-RAT
mobility based on their requirements. If forced redirection mode is chosen, inter-
RAT PS redirection is always used for inter-RAT connected mode mobility to 3G
(forced redirection option). On the other hand, if forced redirection mode is not
chosen, inter-RAT PS handover is preferred to PS redirection. Though PS
handover is preferred in the system setting, the serving eNB may perform PS
redirection because some reasons, for example, UE not support UTRAN
measurement/handover or no neighbor UTRAN cell is defined.
In case of UE which is candidate of PS redirection, the serving eNB configures
Event A2 (Serving is worse than a threshold_0) measurement to trigger PS
redirection. When the Event A2 measurement report from UE is received, PS
redirection to a target UTRA carrier is performed. On triggering of PS redirection,
the serving eNB redirects UE to the selected carrier by sending
RRCConnectionRelease message, which includes redirectedCarrierInfoIE. It
system information of the neighboring cells in the selected carrier is available, the
system information is included in RRCConnectionRelease message. Otherwise,
redirected UTRA carrier information is only included in the message (Redirection
to UTRAN without SI feature). To acquire system information from neighboring
UTRAN cells, the serving eNB and neighboring UTRAN cells should support
RIM procedures.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 196
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
The following figure shows the call flow for redirection to UTRAN procedure:
Before redirection, uplink and downlink data traffic of LTE UE goes through eNB,
S-GW, and P-GW.
1 As UE moves away from the source eNB, then eNB determines the redirection
to UTRAN (Event A2 is triggered).
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 197
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 198
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
To enable this feature, operator should configure the GERAN Frequency
Information by executing the CHG-UTRA-FA command and configure A2
report configuration for ci_A2PurposeIRatHo and/or ci_A2PurposeIRatBlind.
If interRatDataOption in CHG-INTWO-OPT is set to Data_BlindOnly, Blind
Redirection is executed regardless UEs capabilities on Measurement for
UTRAN and PS handover to UTRAN.
isAllowedRim parameter should be set as True by executing the CHG-HO-
OPT. This parameter configures the RIM procedure and rimSupport
parameter should be set as True by executing the CHG-NBR-UTRAN
command.
Key Parameters
CHG-UTRA-FA/RTRV-UTRA-FA
Parameter Description
STATUS This parameter indicates whether to use UTRAN carrier information.
N_EQUIP: Does not use UTRAN carrier information.
EQUIP: Uses UTRAN carrier information.
DUPLEX_TYPE This parameter is the duplex mode information of UTRAN carrier.
FDD: Frequency Division Duplex.
TDD: Time Division Duplex.
UARFCN_UL This parameter sets the Uplink Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
(ARFCN) value for UTRA Frequency.
It executes Data Rule Check (DRC) to ensure that the same Uplink ARFCN
value based on the EQUIP state is not entered.
UARFCN_DL This parameter sets the Downlink Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
(ARFCN) value for the UTRA Frequency. It executes Data Rule Check (DRC)
to ensure that the same Downlink ARFCN value based on the EQUIP state is
not entered.
CHG-EUTRA-A2CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A2CNF
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 199
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
PURPOSE This parameter is the purpose of using the Event A2 per cell. It is used to
activate the measurement gap as default.
LteHo: Used for Gap Activate.
LteBlind: Used for Blind HO.
IRatHo: Used for IRAT HO.
IRatBlind: Used for IRAT Blind HO.
Ca: Used for Carrer Aggregation.
CaPeriodicMr: Used for Add Smart Carrier Aggregation Periodic Measure
Config.
Srvcc: Used for Single Radio Voice Call Continuity.
Mdt: Used for Minimization of Drive Tests.
CaInterFreq: Used for Inter Frequency Carrier Aggregation.
InterFreqAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Frequency Anr.
InterRatAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Rat Anr.
ACTIVE_STATE This parameter indicates whether event A2 is enabled/disabled per target
frequency. This change will be applied to UE from next RRC signaling
procedure (for example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new
setting will not be updated to the current active UEs.
Inactive: Event A2 is not used.
Active: Event A2 is used. If HO of the target frequency is not needed in the
site, this is inactive.
CHG-INTWO-OPT/RTRV-INTWO-OPT
Parameter Description
INTER_RAT_DATA_OPTION This parameter indicates whether to force redirection during the inter RAT PS
handover for Data Call.
Data_UeCapability: Redirection or handover according to UE Capability.
Data_BlindOnly: Redirection is executed regardless of condition.
CHG-HO-OPT/RTRV-HO-OPT
Parameter Description
RIM_ENABLE This parameter indicates whether to support the RAN Information Management
(RIM) function for Inter RAT (WCDMA, GEARN).
False: Does not perform the RIM function.
True: Performs the RIM function.
CHG-NBR-UTRAN/RTRV-NBR-UTRAN/CRTE-NBR-UTRAN/DLT-NBR-
UTRAN
Parameter Description
RIM_SUPPORT This parameter is whether the UTRAN neighbor cell supports the RIM. This
parameter indicates whether or not the RIM procedure of a neighbor UTRAN
cell is supported. If it is set to False, then the RIM procedure is not executed. If
it is set to True, then the RIM procedure is executed. It must be set accurately
since the RIM procedure execution is determined by the setting.
False: RIM is not supported.
True: RIM is supported.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 200
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification
[3] 3GPP TS36. 413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN);
S1 Application Protocol (S1AP)
[4] 3GPP TS23.401 Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects;
GPRS enhancements for E-UTRAN access
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 201
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
BENEFIT
The operator can provide CS service to its subscribers by using legacy CS
network (UTRAN).
Users can make a CS call while staying in E-UTRAN, by transition to legacy CS
network (UTRAN).
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
With the default LTE data network connection in operation, a mobile terminating
(incoming) CS voice call triggers paging via LTE network to UE. This paging
message initiates CSFB, as the device sends a NAS EXTENDED SERVICE
REQUEST to the network to transition to 3G network. Once transitioned, the
legacy call setup procedures are followed to setup the CS call.
Mobile originating (outgoing) calls follow the same transition from LTE (PS) to
3G (CS), except for the paging step. In 3G networks, PS data sessions can also be
established simultaneously for data services. After the voice call ends and UE
returns to idle state or Cell_PCH state, the device should perform cell reselection
procedures to reselect LTE cell. If UE has still PS session after the voice call ends,
then UE remains in 3G cell.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 202
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
3G network coexists with LTE network residing between UE and core network.
The MME serves users while in LTE access network, while for 3G SGSN serves
users when utilizing data services and MSC (Mobile Switching Center) when
utilizing voice services. To support CS Fallback signaling, MME connects to MSC
with SGs interface. The SGs interface is used for the mobility management and
paging procedures between EPS and CS domain. Also, it is used for the delivery of
both mobile originating and mobile terminating SMS.
The following figure shows the architecture and interfaces for CSFB:
In general, UE notifies to MME about the type of attach required during the attach
procedure. In case Attach Type in the Attach request message is Combined
EPS/IMSI Attach, combined CS and PS updates are executed. In case of
Combined EPS/IMSI Attach there is a requirement to use SGs interface, between
MME and MSC.
To enable CSFB to UTRAN based on Redirection with SI feature, the parameter
INTER_RAT_CS_REDIRECTION should be set as True by executing CHG-
INTWO-OPT command. This parameter is used for the selection of the
interworking option per cell.
Also, RIM_ENABLE parameter should be set as TRUE by executing the
CHG-HO-OPT. This parameter performs to enable the RIM procedure per eNB.
The following figure shows redirection based CSFB to UTRAN procedures when
UE is in idle mode:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 203
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
1) The UE, in idle state, originates a voice call or receives a mobile terminated
voice call.
2~5) Since UE is in idle state, it starts RRC connection establishment procedures
with eNB to make a SRB connection. The UE sends NAS Extended Service
Request message to MME, which is included in RRC Connection Setup Complete
message.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 204
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
6) The MME sends eNB S1-AP Initial Context Setup Request message that
includes CSFB indicator.
7) The eNB processes the AS security activation.
8) The eNB transmits S1-AP Initial Context Setup Response message to MME. At
this step, eNB does not setup a DRB connection because UE is going to redirect to
UTRAN.
9) The eNB sends RRC Connection Release message to UE. The message includes
UTRA carrier frequency to which UE will be redirected, the cell reselection
priority of the UTRA frequency, and system information of one or more cells on
the redirected UTRA frequency.
10~14) The eNB transmits UE Context Release Request message to MME to
release S1 bearer connection between eNB and S-GW. S5 bearer between S-GW
and P-GW is retained. If UE sends Routing Area Update message to SGSN, then
SGSN will trigger RAU procedure with old MME. In this case, SGSN will make a
bearer connection between itself and PGW and MME will remove the S5 bearer
connection. Usually, CSFB UE sends Routing Area Update message because it
changes the Routing Area, but, depending on UE implementation it may not
trigger RAU procedure because it will go back to LTE network as soon as it ends
the CSFB call.
15~17) The UE connects to UTRAN and sets up a CS session. Also, it performs
UTRAN location update procedures. At this step, UE is not expected to set up a PS
session because UE is in idle state.
The following figure shows redirection based CSFB to UTRAN procedures when
UE is in connected mode:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 205
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 206
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
6) The eNB sends RRC Connection Release message to UE. The message includes
UTRA carrier frequency to which UE will be redirected, the cell reselection
priority of UTRA frequency, and system information of one or more cells on the
redirected UTRA frequency. At this step, eNB releases both SRB and DRB.
7~11) The eNB transmits UE Context Release Request message to MME to
release S1 bearer connection between eNB and S-GW. S5 bearer between S-GW
and P-GW is retained but the state is changed to idle mode. If UE sets up a PS
bearer in UTRAN, SGSN will make a bearer connection between SGSN and P-
GW (GGSN) for seamless IP mobility and MME will remove the S5 bearer
connection.
12~14) The UE connects to UTRAN and sets up a CS session. Also, it performs
UTRAN location update procedures. At this step, UE is expected to set up a PS
session as well because there is an ongoing active bearer. The PS session can be
continued in UTRAN with the same IP address.
According to the characteristics of the deployed site, the number of UTRA
frequencies is configurable. Up to 6 different UTRA frequencies can be assigned
per cell. Also, the purpose of each UTRA frequency can be configurable based on
supported service as follows:
CS_ONLY(1): for CSFB (Redirection w/o SI, Redirection w/ SI, HO), SRVCC
PS_ONLY(2): for PS mobility (Redirection w/o SI, Redirection w/ SI, HO)
BOTH(0): for all cases
When reviewing UE behavior under a failure to reach the target RAT/frequency,
the version of the document Samsung refers to the 3gpp specification 3GPP TS
36.304 is Rel-9 (9.11.0).
If UE has been instructed to complete Redirection process with a target UARFCN
and cannot find the target UARFCN, UE shall try to camp on any suitable cell
based on Stored Information. If UE fails to camp on any suitable cell based on the
Stored Information or UE has no Stored Information or it , then UE should execute
a complete 3G band search before trying again to complete other RAT/band
searches (that is, back to 4G). In more detail, if UE has not been able to find the
target UARFCN and has to start the complete 3G band search then, during that 3G
search, UE should execute a cell selection process & not a cell re-selection process.
If cell selection is not achieved on 3G layer, UE could move from 3G to LTE
during the subsequent cell selection phase on the basis of inter-RAT weighting
(the preference for LTE UEs move to LTE layer).
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
To enable this feature, operator should configure the UTRAN Frequency
Information by executing the CHG-UTRA-FA command.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 207
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Key Parameters
CHG-UTRA-FA/RTRV-UTRA-FA
Parameter Description
STATUS This parameter indicates whether to use UTRAN carrier information.
N_EQUIP: Does not use UTRAN carrier information.
EQUIP: Uses UTRAN carrier information.
DUPLEX_TYPE This parameter is the duplex mode information of UTRAN carrier.
FDD: Frequency Division Duplex.
TDD: Time Division Duplex.
UARFCN_UL This parameter sets the Uplink Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
(ARFCN) value for the UTRA Frequency.
It executes Data Rule Check (DRC) to ensure that the same Uplink ARFCN
value based on the EQUIP state is not entered.
UARFCN_DL This parameter sets the Downlink Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
(ARFCN) value for the UTRA Frequency. It executes Data Rule Check (DRC)
to ensure that the same Downlink ARFCN value based on the EQUIP state is
not entered.
CHG-HO-OPT/RTRV-HO-OPT
Parameter Description
RIM_ENABLE This parameter indicates whether to support the RAN Information Management
(RIM) function for Inter RAT (WCDMA, GEARN).
False: Does not perform the RIM function.
True: Performs the RIM function.
CHG-NBR-UTRAN/RTRV-NBR-UTRAN/CRTE-NBR-UTRAN/DLT-NBR-
UTRAN
Parameter Description
RIM_SUPPORT This parameter is whether the UTRAN neighbor cell supports the RIM. This
parameter indicates whether or not the RIM procedure of a neighbor UTRAN
cell is supported. If it is set to False, then the RIM procedure is not executed. If
it is set to True, then the RIM procedure is executed. It must be set accurately
since the RIM procedure execution is determined by the setting.
False: RIM is not supported.
True: RIM is supported.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 208
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2.
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification.
[3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN);
S1 Application Protocol (S1AP).
[4] 3GPP TS23.272 Circuit Switched Fallback in Evolved Packet System; Stage 2.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 209
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
BENEFIT
The operator can provide CS service to its subscribers by using legacy CS
network (UTRAN).
Users can make a CS call while staying in E-UTRAN, by transition to legacy CS
network (UTRAN).
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
With the default LTE data network connection in operation, a mobile terminating
(incoming) CS voice call triggers paging via LTE network to UE. This paging
message initiates CSFB, as the device sends a NAS EXTENDED SERVICE
REQUEST to the network to transition to 3G network. Once transitioned, the
legacy call setup procedures are followed to setup the CS call. If UE does not
support PS handover to UTRAN, CSFB to UTRAN with redirection procedure is
used.
Mobile originating (outgoing) calls follow the same transition from LTE (PS) to
3G (CS), except for the paging step. In 3G networks, PS data sessions can also be
established simultaneously for data services. After the voice call ends and UE
returns to idle state or Cell_PCH state, the device should perform cell reselection
procedures to reselect LTE cell. If UE has still PS session after the voice call ends,
then UE remains in 3G cell.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 210
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
3G network coexists with LTE network residing between the UE and the core
network. The MME serves users while in LTE access network, while for 3G
SGSN serves users when utilizing data services and MSC (Mobile Switching
Center) when utilizing voice services. To support CS Fallback signaling, MME
connects to MSC with SGs interface. The SGs interface is used for the mobility
management and paging procedures between EPS and CS domain. Also, it is used
for the delivery of both mobile originating and mobile terminating SMS.
The following figure shows the architecture and interfaces for CSFB:
In general, UE notifies to MME about the type of attach required during the attach
procedure. In case Attach Type in the Attach request message is Combined
EPS/IMSI Attach, combined CS and PS updates are executed. In case of
Combined EPS/IMSI Attach there is a requirement to use SGs interface, between
MME and MSC.
To enable CSFB to UTRAN with PS Handover feature, the parameter
INTER_RAT_CS_REDIRECTION should be set as True by executing the
CHG-INTWO-OPT command. This parameter is used for the selection of the
interworking option per cell.
And RIM_ENABLE parameter should be set as FALSE by executing the
CHG-HO-OPT command. This parameter performs to disable the RIM
procedure per eNB.
The following figure shows PS handover based CSFB to UTRAN procedures
when UE is in idle mode:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 211
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
1) The UE, in idle state, originates a voice call or receives a mobile terminated
voice call.
2~5) Since UE is in idle state, it starts RRC connection establishment procedures
with eNB to make a SRB connection. The UE sends NAS Extended Service
Request message to MME, which is included in RRC Connection Setup Complete
message.
6) The MME sends eNB S1-AP Initial Context Setup Request message that
includes CSFB indicator.
7) The eNB processes the AS security activation.
8) The eNB transmits S1-AP Initial Context Setup Response message to MME.
9) The eNB provides the UTRAN measurement order to UE. (if available)
10) The handover preparation procedure between Source E-UTRAN and target
UTRAN is processed.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 212
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
11) The eNB, including the HO command received from CSFB indicator and
target UTRAN, transmits the Mobility from EUTRA Command to UE.
12) The UE switches over to UTRAN target cell designated by eNB and performs
the rest of handover procedure.
The following figure shows PS handover based CSFB to UTRAN procedures
when UE is in connected mode:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 213
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
8) The eNB, including the HO command received from CSFB indicator and target
UTRAN, transmits the Mobility from EUTRA Command to UE.
9) The UE switches over to UTRAN target cell designated by eNB and performs
the rest of handover procedure.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
To enable this feature, operator should configure the UTRAN Frequency
Information by executing the CHG-UTRA-FA command and the UTRAN Periodic
Measurement information for StrongestCell report purpose by executing the CHG-
UTRA-PRD command.
Key Parameters
CHG-UTRA-FA/RTRV-UTRA-FA
Parameter Description
STATUS This parameter indicates whether to use UTRAN carrier information.
N_EQUIP: Does not use UTRAN carrier information.
EQUIP: Uses UTRAN carrier information.
DUPLEX_TYPE This parameter is the duplex mode information of UTRAN carrier.
FDD: Frequency Division Duplex.
TDD: Time Division Duplex.
UARFCN_UL This parameter sets the Uplink Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
(ARFCN) value for the UTRA Frequency.
It executes Data Rule Check (DRC) to ensure that the same Uplink ARFCN
value based on the EQUIP state is not entered.
UARFCN_DL This parameter sets the Downlink Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
(ARFCN) value for the UTRA Frequency. It executes Data Rule Check (DRC)
to ensure that the same Downlink ARFCN value based on the EQUIP state is
not entered.
CHG-GERAN-PRD/RTRV-GERAN-PRD
Parameter Description
PURPOSE This parameter represents the usage of the periodic report used for
interoperating with the UTRAN.
RatPeriodicalPurposeReportStrongestCells: CS Fallback (CSFB): Used for
the solicit measurement report while performing.
StrongestCellsForSON: Used for the operation of SON.
ReportCGI: Used for the acquisition of the CGI information.
Mlb: Used for measurement report of MLB.
ACTIVE_STATE This parameter indicates whether to use UTRA periodic report. This change
will be applied to UE from next RRC signaling procedure (for example, Attach
or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new setting will not be updated to the
current active UEs.
Inactive: UTRA periodic report is not used.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 214
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
Active: UTRA periodic report is used.
MAX_REPORT_CELL This parameter is the maximum number of cells included in the measurement
report for UTRA periodic report. This information is the maximum number of
Cells that can be included in a single message (that is, Measurement Report)
when a device is reporting the measurement results. When applying the new
value to the active UEs during the parameter change, it may cause system
overload so the application of the changed parameter is done when a new
connection request (Attach or Idle to Active) is received from a device.
REPORT_INTERVAL This parameter is the interval of measurement reports for UTRA periodic
report. This information is for setting the Measurement Report transmission
interval when a device is reporting measurement results. This change will be
applied to UE from next RRC signaling procedure (for example, Attach or Idle
to Active). To avoide overload, a new setting will not be updated to the current
active UEs.
REPORT_AMOUNT This parameter is the periodic measurement report count when interoperating
with the UTRAN. The reports are transmitted as many times as the specified
count.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 215
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification
[3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN);
S1 Application Protocol (S1AP)
[4] 3GPP TS23.272 Circuit Switched Fallback in Evolved Packet System; Stage 2
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 216
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
BENEFIT
The operator can provide idle mobility to its subscribers to GERAN.
Users in idle state can move to GERAN.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The eNB supports UE's idle mobility through its SIB broadcasting. In the idle
mode, UE receives the SIB broadcast by the cell it has camped onto, and performs
inter-RAT cell reselection to GERAN based on the cell reselection parameter
contained in the SIBs.
The SIBs are used to perform the following functionality:
The SIB1 provides information that is required in evaluating if UE is allowed to
access a cell. The UE uses this for PLMN selection and cell selection. Also,
SIB1 defines the scheduling of other system information. The UE acquires
other SIBs of the cell using this information.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 217
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
The SIB3 provides the common information required for intra-frequency, inter-
frequency and/or inter-RAT cell reselection. Also, it conveys the specific
information for intra-frequency cell reselection.
The SIB7 provides information about GERAN frequencies and parameters for
cell re-selection.
The GERAN cell reselection parameters broadcasted via SIB7 are as follows:
GERAN carrier frequencies per GERAN carrier frequency group
oA set of GERAN carrier frequencies can be provided in three ways
(explicitListOfARFCNs, equallySpacedARFCNs, and
variableBitMapOfARFCNs) as per 3GPP.
Cell reselection priority per GERAN carrier frequency group
Cell reselection thresholds per GERAN carrier frequency group
Cell reselection timer for GERAN cell reselection
Cell reselection timer for speed dependant GERAN cell reselection
oFor fast moving UE speed dependent GERAN cell reselection scaling factors
are applied. If the number of reselections during the period TCRmax is
greater than NCR_H high mobility is detected. If the number exceeds
NCR_M and not NCR_H then medium mobility is detected. In the
high/medium mobility states Qhyst and TreselectionRAT are multiplied by
the Speed dependent scaling factor Qhyst and Treselection. The reselection
to GERAN is performed if (Srxlev_GSM - Qrxlevmin in SIB7) > (Srxlev
of LTE cell - Qrxlevmin in SIB3 + Qhyst in SIB3)
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 218
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
The UE reselects the GERAN cell when RSRP signal strength from LTE serving
cell decreases to less than the threshold calculated and the signal strength of
GERAN target cell increases to more than the calculated threshold (3GPP TS
36.304 Section 5.2.4.5).
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 219
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
To enable this feature, operator should configure the SIB7_PERIOD in CHG-
SIB-INF and the GERAN Frequency Information by executing the CHG-
GERAN-FA command.
Key Parameters
CHG-SIB-INF/RTRV-SIB-INF
Parameter Description
SIB7_PERIOD This parameter is the transmission period for the system information block type
7 of the cell in eNB. The SIB7 contains information for IRAT cell reselection to
GERAN.
ms80: 80 ms.
ms160: 160 ms.
ms5120: 5120 ms.
not_used: SIB7 is not transmitted.
CHG-GERAN-FA/RTRV-GERAN-FA
Parameter Description
STATUS This parameter indicates whether GERAN FA object is valid.
N_EQUIP: Invalid.
EQUIP: Valid.
FOLLOWING_ARFCNS The following ARFCNs are the choice option to select the remaining ARFCN
values except starting ARFCN.
explicitList: used for explicitListOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 ~ geranArfcn31.
equallySpaced: used for equallySpacedARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0,
arfcnSpacing and numberOfFollowingARFCNs.
variableBitMap: used for variableBitMapOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 and
variableBitMapOfARFCNs.
GERAN_ARFCN0 This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of
GERAN FA object (Start ARFCN).
GERAN_ARFCN1 ~ This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of
GERAN_ARFCN31 GERAN FA object.
ARFCN_SPACING If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, arfcnSpacing becomes Space, d,
between a set of equally spaced ARFCN values.
NUMBER_OF_FOLLOWING If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, numberOfFollowingARFCNs
_ARFCNS becomes The number, n, of the remaining equally spaced ARFCN values in
the set. The complete set of (n+1) ARFCN values is defined as: {s, ((s + d)
mod 1024), ((s + 2*d) mod 1024) ... ((s + n*d) mod 1024)}, where s is
startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).
VARIABLE_BIT_MAP_OF_ If followingARFCNs is set to variableBitMap, variableBitMapOfARFCNs
ARFCNS [16] becomes Bitmap field representing the remaining ARFCN values in the set.
The leading bit of the first octet in the bitmap corresponds to the ARFCN = ((s
+ 1) mod 1024), the next bit to the ARFCN = ((s + 2) mod 1024), and so on. If
the bitmap consist of N octets, the trailing bit of octet N corresponds to ARFCN
= ((s + 8*N) mod 1024). The complete set of ARFCN values consists of
ARFCN = s and the ARFCN values, where the corresponding bit in the bitmap
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 220
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
is set to 1 and s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification
[3] 3GPP TS36.304 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User
Equipment (UE) procedures in idle mode
[4] 3GPP TS23.401 Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects;
GPRS enhancements for E-UTRAN access
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 221
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
BENEFIT
The operator can provide connected mobility to its subscribers between E-
UTRAN and GERAN.
Users in a connected state can move between E-UTRAN and GERAN, remaining
in the connected state.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 222
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
To support seamless data service when UE moves from E-UTRAN to GERAN
coverage, Samsung eNB supports PS handover to GERAN under the following
conditions:
Target GERAN shall support PS handover
UE shall support measurement reporting for GERAN frequencies in E-UTRA
connected mode (FGI#15 for B1, FGI#23 for B2).
UE shall support handover to GERAN (FGI#9).
GERAN frequencs shall be configured for PS handover
oEach GERAN frequency group can be configured to support CS service, PS
service, or both.
oA set of GERAN frequencies can be provided in three ways
(explicitListOfARFCNs, equallySpacedARFCNs,
variableBitMapOfARFCNs) as per 3GPP.
Once the above conditions are met, serving eNB sends measurement configuration
including event A2 (Serving is worse than a threshold value) to trigger GERAN
measurement. On reception of measurement report triggered by event A2,
Samsung eNB configures GERAN measurement using event B1 or B2. The
serving eNB also configures measurement gap for inter-RAT measurement, and
UE performs GERAN measurement during the configured gap period. If
measurement report for event B1 or B2 is received, the serving eNB starts
handover preparation to the target cell.
The following figure shows PS handover procedure to the GERAN:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 223
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 224
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
4)~10) The handover preparation procedure between source E-UTRAN and target
GERAN is processed. The resource allocation is made so that the UE can maintain
data services at the target GERAN after PS handover through this procedure.
When data forwarding is available, the tunnel setup for data forwarding is made.
11) The source eNB receives a handover command from the source MME.
12) The source eNB transmits mobility from E-UTRA command to UE, including
the HO command received from the GERAN.
13) The UE makes transition to the GERAN target cell as per the direction from
the eNB, and transmits XID response to the GERAN.
14) The target BSC informs handover completion by transmitting PS handover
complete to target SGSN. It also transmits XID response to the target SGSN.
15)~21) The target SGSN processes handover completion procedure with the
source MME.
22) The UE performs the Routing Area update. After that, it keeps data services in
the GERAN.
23)~27) The source MME releases the resources used in E-UTRAN after complete
PS handover with GERAN. When a tunnel for data forwarding is setup, the source
MME and target SGSN release the data forwarding tunnel.
In case PS handover from GERAN, handover decision is made by GERAN and
eNB starts handover preparation, if it receives S1AP Handover Request message
from MME.
The following figure shows PS handover procedure from the GERAN:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 225
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 226
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
To enable this feature, operator should configure the GERAN Frequency
Information by executing the CHG-GERAN-FA command and A2 report
configuration for ci_A2PurposeIRatHo and B2 report configuration for the each
GERAN carrier.
The handover target GERAN cell needs to be registered in the serving cell
neighboring cell list.
Key Parameters
CHG-GERAN-FA/RTRV-GERAN-FA
Parameter Description
STATUS This parameter indicates whether GERAN FA object is valid.
N_EQUIP: Invalid.
EQUIP: Valid.
FOLLOWING_ARFCNS The followingARFCNs is the choice option to select the remaining ARFCN
values except startingARFCN.
explicitList: used for explicitListOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 ~ geranArfcn31.
equallySpaced: used for equallySpacedARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0,
arfcnSpacing and numberOfFollowingARFCNs.
variableBitMap: used for variableBitMapOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 and
variableBitMapOfARFCNs.
GERAN_ARFCN0 This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of
the GERAN FA object. (Start ARFCN)
GERAN_ARFCN1 ~ This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of
GERAN_ARFCN31 GERAN FA object.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 227
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
ARFCN_SPACING If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, arfcnSpacing becomes Space, d,
between a set of equally spaced ARFCN values.
NUMBER_OF_FOLLOWING If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, numberOfFollowingARFCNs
_ARFCNS becomes The number, n, of the remaining equally spaced ARFCN values in
the set. The complete set of (n+1) ARFCN values is defined as: {s, ((s + d)
mod 1024), ((s + 2*d) mod 1024) ... ((s + n*d) mod 1024)}, where s is
startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).
VARIABLE_BIT_MAP_OF_ If followingARFCNs is set to variableBitMap, variableBitMapOfARFCNs
ARFCNS [16] becomes Bitmap field representing the remaining ARFCN values in the set.
The leading bit of the first octet in the bitmap corresponds to the ARFCN = ((s
+ 1) mod 1024), the next bit to the ARFCN = ((s + 2) mod 1024), and so on. If
the bitmap consist of N octets, the trailing bit of octet N corresponds to ARFCN
= ((s + 8*N) mod 1024). The complete set of ARFCN values consists of
ARFCN = s and the ARFCN values, where the corresponding bit in the bitmap
is set to 1 and s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).
CHG-EUTRA-A2CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A2CNF
Parameter Description
PURPOSE This parameter is the purpose of using the Event A2 per cell. It is used to
activate the measurement gap as default.
LteHo: Used for Gap Activate.
LteBlind: Used for Blind HO.
IRatHo: Used for IRAT HO.
IRatBlind: Used for IRAT Blind HO.
Ca: Used for Carrer Aggregation.
CaPeriodicMr: Used for Add Smart Carrier Aggregation Periodic Measure
Config.
Srvcc: Used for Single Radio Voice Call Continuity.
Mdt: Used for Minimization of Drive Tests.
CaInterFreq: Used for Inter Frequency Carrier Aggregation.
InterFreqAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Frequency Anr.
InterRatAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Rat Anr.
ACTIVE_STATE This parameter indicates whether event A2 is enabled/disabled per target
frequency. This change will be applied to UE from next RRC signaling
procedure (for example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new
setting will not be updated to the current active UEs.
Inactive: Event A2 is not used.
Active: Event A2 is used. If HO of the target frequency is not needed in the
site, this is inactive.
CHG-GERAN-B2CNF/RTRV-GERAN-B2CNF
Parameter Description
PURPOSE This parameter is the usage of GERAN Event B2 report. It is used for inter-
RAT Handover.
InterRatHandover: In case of Inter-RAT handover.
Srvcc: In case of SRVCC.
InterRatSPID: inter-RAT handover is executed for specific SPID with
handover mobility option.
OnDemandHandover: Enable the forced handover triggering by operator
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 228
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
Spare_1: Reserved.
Spare_2: Reserved.
ACTIVE_STATE This parameter indicates whether the GERAN Event B2, which is triggered
when Inter RAT neighbor becomes better than threshold, is enabled/disabled.
This change will be applied to the UE from next RRC signaling procedure (for
example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new setting will not be
updated to the current active UEs.
Inactive: GERAN Event B2 is not used.
Active: GERAN Event B2 is used.
CHG-NBR-GERAN/RTRV-NBR-GERAN/CRTE-NBR-GERAN/DLT-NBR-
GERAN
Parameter Description
STATUS The validity of GERAN neighboring cell information.
N_EQUIP: Invalid
EQUIP: Valid
TARGET_CELL_ID The ID of GERAN neighboring cell to eNB.
LAC This parameter is the Location Area Code of GERAN neighbor cell located
around eNB. The location area code of GERAN neighboring cell to eNB.
RAC This parameter is the routing area code of GERAN neighbor cell located
around eNB.
NETWORK_COLOUR_COD The network color code of GERAN neighboring cell to eNB. Codes are from 0
E to 7. Ensure that not to enter previously entered information. If all three of the
networkColourCode, baseStationColourCode, and ARFCN information match
previously entered information, the system determines it to be a duplicated
entry.
BASE_STATION_COLOUR This parameter is the base station color code of GERAN neighbor cell located
_CODE around eNB.
MCC [4] The PLMN information (MCC) of GERAN neighboring cell to eNB. It is a three-
digit number with each digit being from 0 to 9.
MNC [4] The PLMN information (MNC) of GERAN neighboring cell to eNB. It is a three-
digit or two-digit number with each digit being from 0 to 9.
ARFCN This parameter is the ARFCN of the GERAN neighbor cell located around the
eNB.
BAND_INDICATOR The band indicator of GERAN neighboring cell to eNB.
dcs1800: Indicates DCS 1800 band.
pcs1900: Indicates PCS 1900 band.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 229
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 230
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 231
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification
[3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN);
S1 Application Protocol (S1AP)
[4] 3GPP TS23.401 Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects;
GPRS enhancements for E-UTRAN access
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 232
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
BENEFIT
The operator can provide connected mobility to its subscribers from E-UTRAN
to GERAN.
Users in connected state can move from E-UTRAN to GERAN.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Cell Change Order without NACC could be performed under the following
conditions:
UE or target GERAN does not support PS handover
UE shall support measurement reporting for GERAN frequencies in E-UTRA
connected mode (FGI#15 for B1, FGI#23 for B2).
oOptionally, measurement could be omitted via configuration
UE shall support cell change order procedure (FGI#10).
System Information of the target cell is not provided (without NACC).
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 233
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Once the above conditions are met, serving eNB sends measurement configuration
including event A2 (Serving is worse than a threshold value) to trigger GERAN
measurement. On reception of measurement report triggered by event A2,
Samsung eNB configures GERAN measurement using event B1 or B2. The
serving eNB also configures measurement gap for inter-RAT measurement, and
UE performs GERAN measurement during the configured gap period. If
measurement report for event B1 or B2 is received, the serving eNB starts Cell
Change Order without NACC procedure
The following figure shows the procedure to perform Cell Change Order without
NACC to GERAN:
1 The eNB determines whether to switch the cell change order without NACC to
GERAN.
2 The eNB specifies GERAN carrier frequency and target GERAN cell to which
UE is to switch over and transmits the Mobility from EUTRA Command to
UE.
3 The eNB transmits UE Context Release Request to MME.
4 The MME transmits UE Context Release Command to eNB.
5 The eNB transmits UE Context Release Complete to MME.
6 The UE switches over to the target GERAN cell of GERAN carrier, which is
designated by eNB to the Mobility from EUTRA Command and connects to
GERAN. The procedures of GERAN location registration and GERAN call
setup are performed. Then, UE keeps providing its service in the GERAN.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 234
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
To enable this feature, operator should configure the GERAN Frequency
Information by executing the CHG-GERAN-FA command and configure A2
report configuration for ci_A2PurposeIRatHo and/or ci_A2PurposeIRatBlind.
If interRatDataOption in CHG-INTWO-OPT is set to Data_BlindOnly, Blind
Redirection is executed regardless UEs capabilities on Measurement for
GERAN and PS handover to GERAN.
The operator can put the high priority on CCO to GERAN without NACC by
executing the CHG-GERAN-INTWO command for Normal type based on UE
measurement and Blind type without UE measurement. The lower number
priority has the higher priority.
If blindCCOsupport in CHG-GERAN-INTWO is set to True, Blind CCO is
supported during interworking with GERRAN and Target GERAN cell for
Blind CCO should be configured by executing the CHG-GERAN-BLCCO
command.
Key Parameters
CHG-GERAN-FA/RTRV-GERAN-FA
Parameter Description
STATUS This parameter indicates whether GERAN FA object is valid.
N_EQUIP: Invalid.
EQUIP: Valid.
FOLLOWING_ARFCNS The followingARFCNs is the choice option to select the remaining ARFCN
values except startingARFCN.
explicitList: used for explicitListOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 ~ geranArfcn31.
equallySpaced: used for equallySpacedARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0,
arfcnSpacing and numberOfFollowingARFCNs.
variableBitMap: used for variableBitMapOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 and
variableBitMapOfARFCNs.
GERAN_ARFCN0 This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of
GERAN FA object. (Start ARFCN)
GERAN_ARFCN1 ~ This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of
GERAN_ARFCN31 GERAN FA object.
ARFCN_SPACING If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, arfcnSpacing becomes Space, d,
between a set of equally spaced ARFCN values.
NUMBER_OF_FOLLOWING If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, numberOfFollowingARFCNs
_ARFCNS becomes The number, n, of the remaining equally spaced ARFCN values in
the set. The complete set of (n+1) ARFCN values is defined as: {s, ((s + d)
mod 1024), ((s + 2*d) mod 1024) ... ((s + n*d) mod 1024)}, where s is
startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).
VARIABLE_BIT_MAP_OF_ If followingARFCNs is set to variableBitMap, variableBitMapOfARFCNs
ARFCNS [16] becomes Bitmap field representing the remaining ARFCN values in the set.
The leading bit of the first octet in the bitmap corresponds to the ARFCN = ((s
+ 1) mod 1024), the next bit to the ARFCN = ((s + 2) mod 1024), and so on. If
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 235
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
the bitmap consist of N octets, the trailing bit of octet N corresponds to ARFCN
= ((s + 8*N) mod 1024). The complete set of ARFCN values consists of
ARFCN = s and the ARFCN values, where the corresponding bit in the bitmap
is set to 1 and s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).
CHG-EUTRA-A2CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A2CNF
Parameter Description
PURPOSE This parameter is the purpose of using the Event A2 per cell. It is used to
activate the measurement gap as default.
LteHo: Used for Gap Activate.
LteBlind: Used for Blind HO.
IRatHo: Used for IRAT HO.
IRatBlind: Used for IRAT Blind HO.
Ca: Used for Carrer Aggregation.
CaPeriodicMr: Used for Add Smart Carrier Aggregation Periodic Measure
Config.
Srvcc: Used for Single Radio Voice Call Continuity.
Mdt: Used for Minimization of Drive Tests.
CaInterFreq: Used for Inter Frequency Carrier Aggregation.
InterFreqAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Frequency Anr.
InterRatAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Rat Anr.
ACTIVE_STATE This parameter indicates whether event A2 is enabled/disabled per target
frequency. This change will be applied to UE from next RRC signaling
procedure (for example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new
setting will not be updated to the current active UEs.
Inactive: Event A2 is not used.
Active: Event A2 is used. If HO of the target frequency is not needed in the
site, this is inactive.
CHG-INTWO-OPT/RTRV-INTWO-OPT
Parameter Description
INTER_RAT_DATA_OPTIO This parameter indicates whether to force redirection during the inter RAT PS
N handover for Data Call.
Data_UeCapability: Redirection or handover according to UE Capability.
Data_BlindOnly: Redirection is executed regardless of condition.
CHG-GERAN-INTWO/RTRV-GERAN-INTWO
Parameter Description
NORMAL_PRIORITY0 This parameter indicates the first priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
NORMAL_PRIORITY1 This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 236
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
NORMAL_PRIORITY2 This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
NORMAL_PRIORITY3 This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY0 This parameter indicates the first priority of blind type GERAN interworking
procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY1 This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY2 This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY3 This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_CCOSUPPORT This parameter indicates whether to support blind Cell Change Order (CCO)
during GERAN interworking.
False: Blind CCO not supported.
True: Blind CCO supported.
CHG-GERAN-BLCCO/RTRV-GERAN-BLCCO
Parameter Description
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 237
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
TARGET_GERAN_NBR_IDX This parameter is the target GERAN neighbor cell index where the blind CCO
will be performed for the relevant cell.- geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without
SI.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification
[3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN);
S1 Application Protocol (S1AP)
[4] 3GPP TS23.401 Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects;
GPRS enhancements for E-UTRAN access
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 238
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
BENEFIT
The operator can provide connected mobility to its subscribers from E-UTRAN
to GERAN.
Users in connected state can move from E-UTRAN to GERAN.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Cell Change Order with NACC could be performed under the following conditions.
UE or target GERAN does not support PS handover
UE shall support measurement reporting for GERAN frequencies in E-UTRA
connected mode (FGI#15 for B1, FGI#23 for B2).
oOptionally, measurement could be omited via configuration
UE shall support cell change order procedure (FGI#10).
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 239
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
1 The eNB determines whether to switch the cell change order with NACC to
GERAN.
2 The eNB specifies GERAN carrier frequency and target GERAN cell to which
UE is to switch over and, including the SI list of the target GERAN cell,
transmits the Mobility from EUTRA Command to UE.
3 The eNB transmits UE Context Release Request to MME.
4 The MME transmits UE Context Release Command to eNB.
5 The eNB transmits UE Context Release Complete to MME.
6 The UE switches over to the target GERAN cell of the GERAN carrier, which is
designated by eNB to the Mobility from EUTRA Command and connects to
GERAN. The procedures of GERAN location registration and GERAN call
setup are performed. Then, UE keeps providing its service in the GERAN.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
To enable this feature, operator should configure the GERAN Frequency
Information by executing the CHG-GERAN-FA command and configure A2
report configuration for ci_A2PurposeIRatHo and/or ci_A2PurposeIRatBlind.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 240
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Key Parameters
CHG-GERAN-FA/RTRV-GERAN-FA
Parameter Description
STATUS This parameter indicates whether GERAN FA object is valid.
N_EQUIP: Invalid.
EQUIP: Valid.
FOLLOWING_ARFCNS The followingARFCNs is the choice option to select the remaining ARFCN
values except startingARFCN.
explicitList: used for explicitListOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 ~ geranArfcn31.
equallySpaced: used for equallySpacedARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0,
arfcnSpacing and numberOfFollowingARFCNs.
variableBitMap: used for variableBitMapOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 and
variableBitMapOfARFCNs.
GERAN_ARFCN0 This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of
the GERAN FA object. (Start ARFCN)
GERAN_ARFCN1 ~ This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of
GERAN_ARFCN31 the GERAN FA object.
ARFCN_SPACING If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, arfcnSpacing becomes Space, d,
between a set of equally spaced ARFCN values.
NUMBER_OF_FOLLOWING If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, numberOfFollowingARFCNs
_ARFCNS becomes the number, n, of the remaining equally spaced ARFCN values in the
set. The complete set of (n+1) ARFCN values is defined as: {s, ((s + d) mod
1024), ((s + 2*d) mod 1024) ... ((s + n*d) mod 1024)}, where s is
startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).
VARIABLE_BIT_MAP_OF_ If followingARFCNs is set to variableBitMap, variableBitMapOfARFCNs
ARFCNS [16] becomes Bitmap field representing the remaining ARFCN values in the set.
The leading bit of the first octet in the bitmap corresponds to the ARFCN = ((s
+ 1) mod 1024), the next bit to the ARFCN = ((s + 2) mod 1024), and so on. If
the bitmap consist of N octets, the trailing bit of octet N corresponds to ARFCN
= ((s + 8*N) mod 1024). The complete set of ARFCN values consists of
ARFCN = s and the ARFCN values, where the corresponding bit in the bitmap
is set to 1 and s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).
CHG-EUTRA-A2CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A2CNF
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 241
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
PURPOSE This parameter is the purpose of using the Event A2 per cell. It is used to
activate the measurement gap as default.
LteHo: Used for Gap Activate.
LteBlind: Used for Blind HO.
IRatHo: Used for IRAT HO.
IRatBlind: Used for IRAT Blind HO.
Ca: Used for Carrier Aggregation.
CaPeriodicMr: Used for Add Smart Carrier Aggregation Periodic Measure
Config.
Srvcc: Used for Single Radio Voice Call Continuity.
Mdt: Used for Minimization of Drive Tests.
CaInterFreq: Used for Inter Frequency Carrier Aggregation.
InterFreqAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Frequency Anr.
InterRatAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Rat Anr.
ACTIVE_STATE This parameter indicates whether event A2 is enabled/disabled per target
frequency. This change will be applied to the UE from next RRC signaling
procedure (for example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new
setting will not be updated to the current active UEs.
Inactive: Event A2 is not used.
Active: Event A2 is used. If HO of the target frequency is not needed in the
site, this is inactive.
CHG-INTWO-OPT/RTRV-INTWO-OPT
Parameter Description
INTER_RAT_DATA_OPTION This parameter indicates whether to force redirection during the inter RAT PS
handover for Data Call.
Data_UeCapability: Redirection or handover according to UE Capability.
Data_BlindOnly: Redirection is executed regardless of condition.
CHG-GERAN-INTWO/RTRV-GERAN-INTWO
Parameter Description
NORMAL_PRIORITY0 This parameter indicates the first priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
NORMAL_PRIORITY1 This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
NORMAL_PRIORITY2 This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 242
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
NORMAL_PRIORITY3 This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY0 This parameter indicates the first priority of blind type GERAN interworking
procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY1 This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY2 This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY3 This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_CCOSUPPORT This parameter indicates whether to support blind Cell Change Order (CCO)
during GERAN interworking.
False: Blind CCO not supported.
True: Blind CCO supported.
CHG-GERAN-BLCCO/RTRV-GERAN-BLCCO
Parameter Description
TARGET_GERAN_NBR_ID This parameter is the target GERAN neighbor cell index where the blind CCO
X will be performed for the relevant cell.- geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without
SI.
CHG-HO-OPT/RTRV-HO-OPT
Parameter Description
RIM_ENABLE This parameter indicates whether to support the RAN Information Management
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 243
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
(RIM) function for Inter RAT (WCDMA, GEARN).
False: Does not perform the RIM function.
True: Performs the RIM function.
CHG-NBR-GERAN/RTRV-NBR-GERAN/CRTE-NBR-GERAN/DLT-NBR-
GERAN
Parameter Description
RIM_SUPPORT This parameter indicates whether or not the RIM procedure of a Neighbor
GERAN Cell is supported. It must be set accurately since the RIM procedure
execution is determined by the setting.
False: RIM is not supported.
True: RIM is supported.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification
[3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN);
S1 Application Protocol (S1AP)
[4] 3GPP TS23.401 Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects;
GPRS enhancements for E-UTRAN access
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 244
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
BENEFIT
The operator can provide connected mobility to its subscribers from E-UTRAN
to GERAN.
Users in connected state can move from E-UTRAN to GERAN.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The following figure shows the procedure to switch the redirection without SI to
GERAN:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 245
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
To enable this feature, operator should configure the GERAN Frequency
Information by executing the CHG-GERAN-FA command and configure A2
report configuration for ci_A2PurposeIRatHo and/or ci_A2PurposeIRatBlind.
If interRatDataOption in CHG-INTWO-OPT is set to Data_BlindOnly, Blind
Redirection is executed regardless UEs capabilities on Measurement for
GERAN and PS handover to GERAN.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 246
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
The operator can put the high priority on Redirection to GREAN without SI by
executing the CHG-GERAN-INTWO command for Normal type based on UE
measurement and Blind type without UE measurement. The lower number
priority has the higher priority.
Key Parameters
CHG-GERAN-FA/RTRV-GERAN-FA
Parameter Description
STATUS This parameter indicates whether GERAN FA object is valid.
N_EQUIP: Invalid.
EQUIP: Valid.
FOLLOWING_ARFCNS The followingARFCNs is the choice option to select the remaining ARFCN
values except startingARFCN.
explicitList: used for explicitListOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 ~ geranArfcn31.
equallySpaced: used for equallySpacedARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0,
arfcnSpacing and numberOfFollowingARFCNs.
variableBitMap: used for variableBitMapOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 and
variableBitMapOfARFCNs.
GERAN_ARFCN0 This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of
GERAN FA object. (Start ARFCN)
GERAN_ARFCN1 ~ This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of
GERAN_ARFCN31 GERAN FA object.
ARFCN_SPACING If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, arfcnSpacing becomes Space, d,
between a set of equally spaced ARFCN values.
NUMBER_OF_FOLLOWING If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, numberOfFollowingARFCNs
_ARFCNS becomes The number, n, of the remaining equally spaced ARFCN values in
the set. The complete set of (n+1) ARFCN values is defined as: {s, ((s + d)
mod 1024), ((s + 2*d) mod 1024) ... ((s + n*d) mod 1024)}, where s is
startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).
VARIABLE_BIT_MAP_OF_ If followingARFCNs is set to variableBitMap, variableBitMapOfARFCNs
ARFCNS [16] becomes Bitmap field representing the remaining ARFCN values in the set.
The leading bit of the first octet in the bitmap corresponds to the ARFCN = ((s
+ 1) mod 1024), the next bit to the ARFCN = ((s + 2) mod 1024), and so on. If
the bitmap consist of N octets, the trailing bit of octet N corresponds to ARFCN
= ((s + 8*N) mod 1024). The complete set of ARFCN values consists of
ARFCN = s and the ARFCN values, where the corresponding bit in the bitmap
is set to 1 and s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).
CHG-EUTRA-A2CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A2CNF
Parameter Description
PURPOSE This parameter is the purpose of using the Event A2 per cell. It is used to
activate the measurement gap as default.
LteHo: Used for Gap Activate.
LteBlind: Used for Blind HO.
IRatHo: Used for IRAT HO.
IRatBlind: Used for IRAT Blind HO.
Ca: Used for Carrer Aggregation.
CaPeriodicMr: Used for Add Smart Carrier Aggregation Periodic Measure
Config.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 247
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
Srvcc: Used for Single Radio Voice Call Continuity.
Mdt: Used for Minimization of Drive Tests.
CaInterFreq: Used for Inter Frequency Carrier Aggregation.
InterFreqAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Frequency Anr.
InterRatAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Rat Anr.
ACTIVE_STATE This parameter indicates whether event A2 is enabled/disabled per target
frequency. This change will be applied to the UE from next RRC signaling
procedure (for example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new
setting will not be updated to the current active UEs.
Inactive: Event A2 is not used.
Active: Event A2 is used. If HO of the target frequency is not needed in the
site, this is inactive.
CHG-INTWO-OPT/RTRV-INTWO-OPT
Parameter Description
INTER_RAT_DATA_OPTION This parameter indicates whether to force redirection during the inter RAT PS
handover for Data Call.
Data_UeCapability: Redirection or handover according to UE Capability.
Data_BlindOnly: Redirection is executed regardless of condition.
CHG-GERAN-INTWO/RTRV-GERAN-INTWO
Parameter Description
NORMAL_PRIORITY0 This parameter indicates the first priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
NORMAL_PRIORITY1 This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
NORMAL_PRIORITY2 This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
NORMAL_PRIORITY3 This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 248
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
BLIND_PRIORITY0 This parameter indicates the first priority of blind type GERAN interworking
procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY1 This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY2 This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY3 This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification
[3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN);
S1 Application Protocol (S1AP)
[4] 3GPP TS23.401 Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects;
GPRS enhancements for E-UTRAN access
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 249
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
BENEFIT
The operator can provide connected mobility to its subscribers from E-UTRAN
to GERAN.
Users in connected state can move from E-UTRAN to GERAN.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The following figure shows the procedure to switch the redirection with SI to
GERAN:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 250
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
To enable this feature, operator should configure the GERAN Frequency
Information by executing the CHG-GERAN-FA command and configure A2
report configuration for ci_A2PurposeIRatHo and/or ci_A2PurposeIRatBlind.
If interRatDataOption in CHG-INTWO-OPT is set to Data_BlindOnly, Blind
Redirection is executed regardless UEs capabilities on Measurement for
GERAN and PS handover to GERAN.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 251
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
The operator can put the high priority on Redirection to GERAN with SI
(Enhanced Redirection) by executing the CHG-GERAN-INTWO command for
Normal type based on UE measurement and Blind type without UE
measurement. The lower number priority has the higher priority.
isAllowedRim parameter should be set as True by executing the CHG-HO-
OPT command. This parameter configures the RIM procedure and
rimSupport parameter should be set as True by executing the CHG-NBR-
GERAN command.
Key Parameters
CHG-GERAN-FA/RTRV-GERAN-FA
Parameter Description
STATUS This parameter indicates whether GERAN FA object is valid.
N_EQUIP: Invalid.
EQUIP: Valid.
FOLLOWING_ARFCNS The followingARFCNs is the choice option to select the remaining ARFCN
values except startingARFCN.
explicitList: used for explicitListOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 ~ geranArfcn31.
equallySpaced: used for equallySpacedARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0,
arfcnSpacing and numberOfFollowingARFCNs.
variableBitMap: used for variableBitMapOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 and
variableBitMapOfARFCNs.
GERAN_ARFCN0 This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of
GERAN FA object. (Start ARFCN)
GERAN_ARFCN1 ~ This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of
GERAN_ARFCN31 GERAN FA object.
ARFCN_SPACING If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, arfcnSpacing becomes Space, d,
between a set of equally spaced ARFCN values.
NUMBER_OF_FOLLOWING If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, numberOfFollowingARFCNs
_ARFCNS becomes The number, n, of the remaining equally spaced ARFCN values in
the set. The complete set of (n+1) ARFCN values is defined as: {s, ((s + d)
mod 1024), ((s + 2*d) mod 1024) ... ((s + n*d) mod 1024)}, where s is
startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).
VARIABLE_BIT_MAP_OF_ If followingARFCNs is set to variableBitMap, variableBitMapOfARFCNs
ARFCNS [16] becomes Bitmap field representing the remaining ARFCN values in the set.
The leading bit of the first octet in the bitmap corresponds to the ARFCN = ((s
+ 1) mod 1024), the next bit to the ARFCN = ((s + 2) mod 1024), and so on. If
the bitmap consist of N octets, the trailing bit of octet N corresponds to ARFCN
= ((s + 8*N) mod 1024). The complete set of ARFCN values consists of
ARFCN = s and the ARFCN values, where the corresponding bit in the bitmap
is set to 1 and s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).
CHG-EUTRA-A2CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A2CNF
Parameter Description
PURPOSE This parameter is the purpose of using the Event A2 per cell. It is used to
activate the measurement gap as default.
LteHo: Used for Gap Activate.
LteBlind: Used for Blind HO.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 252
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
IRatHo: Used for IRAT HO.
IRatBlind: Used for IRAT Blind HO.
Ca: Used for Carrer Aggregation.
CaPeriodicMr: Used for Add Smart Carrier Aggregation Periodic Measure
Config.
Srvcc: Used for Single Radio Voice Call Continuity.
Mdt: Used for Minimization of Drive Tests.
CaInterFreq: Used for Inter Frequency Carrier Aggregation.
InterFreqAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Frequency Anr.
InterRatAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Rat Anr.
ACTIVE_STATE This parameter indicates whether event A2 is enabled/disabled per target
frequency. This change will be applied to UE from next RRC signaling
procedure (for example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new
setting will not be updated to the current active UEs.
Inactive: Event A2 is not used.
Active: Event A2 is used. If HO of the target frequency is not needed in the
site, this is inactive.
CHG-INTWO-OPT/RTRV-INTWO-OPT
Parameter Description
INTER_RAT_DATA_OPTION This parameter indicates whether to force redirection during the inter RAT PS
handover for Data Call.
Data_UeCapability: Redirection or handover according to UE Capability.
Data_BlindOnly: Redirection is executed regardless of condition.
CHG-GERAN-INTWO/RTRV-GERAN-INTWO
Parameter Description
NORMAL_PRIORITY0 This parameter indicates the first priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
NORMAL_PRIORITY1 This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
NORMAL_PRIORITY2 This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
NORMAL_PRIORITY3 This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 253
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY0 This parameter indicates the first priority of blind type GERAN interworking
procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY1 This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY2 This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY3 This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
CHG-HO-OPT/RTRV-HO-OPT
Parameter Description
RIM_ENABLE This parameter indicates whether to support the RAN Information Management
(RIM) function for Inter RAT (WCDMA, GEARN).
False: Does not perform the RIM function.
True: Performs the RIM function.
CHG-NBR-GERAN/RTRV-NBR-GERAN/CRTE-NBR-GERAN/DLT-NBR-
GERAN
Parameter Description
RIM_SUPPORT This parameter indicates whether or not the RIM procedure of a Neighbor
GERAN Cell is supported. It must be set accurately since the RIM procedure
execution is determined by the setting.
False: RIM is not supported.
True: RIM is supported.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 254
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification
[3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN);
S1 Application Protocol (S1AP)
[4] 3GPP TS23.401 Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects;
GPRS enhancements for E-UTRAN access
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 255
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
BENEFIT
The operator can provide CS service to its subscribers by using legacy CS
network (GERAN)
Users can make a CS call while staying in E-UTRAN, by transition to legacy CS
network (GERAN)
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 256
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Regardless of UE movement, CSFB is triggered when there is mobile originating
or mobile terminating call.
To support CSFB service, 2G network coexists with LTE network where in MME
serves users while in LTE access network, and SGSN serves users while in 2G
access network. In 2G network, SGSN serves users when utilizing data services
and MSC (Mobile Switching Center) when utilizing voice services. To support CS
Fallback signaling, MME connects to MSC with SGs interface. The SGs interface
is used for the mobility management and paging procedures between EPS and CS
domain. Also, it is also used for the delivery of both mobile originating and
terminating SMS.
The following figure shows the architecture and interfaces for CSFB:
In general, UE notifies to MME about the type of attach required during the attach
procedure. In case Attach Type in the Attach request message is Combined
EPS/IMSI Attach, combined CS and PS updates are executed. In case of
Combined EPS/IMSI Attach, there is a requirement to use SGs interface between
MME and MSC.
The following figure shows the procedure for performing CSFB with Redirection
to GERAN with SI:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 257
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 258
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
5) The eNB transmits the S1AP Context setup Response message to MME.
6) The eNB includes the GERAN carrier frequency to which UE is to switch over
and transmits the RRC Connection Release to UE with system information of
candidate cells. (Optionally, eNB may request measurement of GERAN before
step 6)
7~11) The eNB transmits UE Context Release Request to MME. The MME
processes the S1 release procedure with eNB.
13) The UE switches over to GERAN carrier frequency provided in the RRC
Connection Release by eNB and connects to GERAN carrier frequency. It initiates
the GERAN location registration procedure.
14) If GERAN cannot provide simultaneous CS and PS service, UE requests
GERAN to suspend the PS service.
15~16) The SGSN processes MME and bearers suspension procedure by UEs
request. The MME suspends S-GW and PS bearers by the request from SGSN.
17) Then, UE performs CS call setup and continues providing the CS service.
The following figure shows the call procedure for CSFB when UE is in Idle state:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 259
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
To enable this feature, operator should configure the GERAN Frequency
Information by executing the CHG-GERAN-FA command.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 260
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
The operator can put the high priority on CSFB to GERAN with Redirection with
SI (Enhanced Redirection) by executing the CHG-GERAN-INTWO command
for Normal type based on UE measurement and Blind type without UE
measurement. The lower number priority has the higher priority.
isAllowedRim parameter should be set as True by executing the CHG-HO-
OPT command. This parameter configures the RIM procedure and
rimSupport parameter should be set as True by executing CHG-NBR-
GERAN command.
Key Parameters
CHG-GERAN-FA/RTRV-GERAN-FA
Parameter Description
STATUS This parameter indicates whether GERAN FA object is valid.
N_EQUIP: Invalid.
EQUIP: Valid.
FOLLOWING_ARFCNS The followingARFCNs is the choice option to select the remaining ARFCN
values except startingARFCN.
explicitList: used for explicitListOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 ~ geranArfcn31.
equallySpaced: used for equallySpacedARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0,
arfcnSpacing and numberOfFollowingARFCNs.
variableBitMap: used for variableBitMapOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 and
variableBitMapOfARFCNs.
GERAN_ARFCN0 This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of
GERAN FA object. (Start ARFCN)
GERAN_ARFCN1 ~ This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of
GERAN_ARFCN31 GERAN FA object.
ARFCN_SPACING If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, arfcnSpacing becomes Space, d,
between a set of equally spaced ARFCN values.
NUMBER_OF_FOLLOWING If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, numberOfFollowingARFCNs
_ARFCNS becomes The number, n, of the remaining equally spaced ARFCN values in
the set. The complete set of (n+1) ARFCN values is defined as: {s, ((s + d)
mod 1024), ((s + 2*d) mod 1024) ... ((s + n*d) mod 1024)}, where s is
startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).
VARIABLE_BIT_MAP_OF_ If followingARFCNs is set to variableBitMap, variableBitMapOfARFCNs
ARFCNS [16] becomes Bitmap field representing the remaining ARFCN values in the set.
The leading bit of the first octet in the bitmap corresponds to the ARFCN = ((s
+ 1) mod 1024), the next bit to the ARFCN = ((s + 2) mod 1024), and so on. If
the bitmap consist of N octets, the trailing bit of octet N corresponds to ARFCN
= ((s + 8*N) mod 1024). The complete set of ARFCN values consists of
ARFCN = s and the ARFCN values, where the corresponding bit in the bitmap
is set to 1 and s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).
CHG-GERAN-INTWO/RTRV-GERAN-INTWO
Parameter Description
NORMAL_PRIORITY0 This parameter indicates the first priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 261
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
NORMAL_PRIORITY1 This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
NORMAL_PRIORITY2 This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
NORMAL_PRIORITY3 This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY0 This parameter indicates the first priority of blind type GERAN interworking
procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY1 This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY2 This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY3 This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
CHG-HO-OPT/RTRV-HO-OPT
Parameter Description
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 262
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
RIM_ENABLE This parameter indicates whether to support the RAN Information Management
(RIM) function for Inter RAT (WCDMA, GEARN).
False: Does not perform the RIM function.
True: Performs the RIM function.
CHG-NBR-GERAN/RTRV-NBR-GERAN/CRTE-NBR-GERAN/DLT-NBR-
GERAN
Parameter Description
RIM_SUPPORT This parameter indicates whether or not the RIM procedure of a Neighbor
GERAN Cell is supported. It must be set accurately since the RIM procedure
execution is determined by the setting.
False: RIM is not supported.
True: RIM is supported.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification
[3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN);
S1 Application Protocol (S1AP)
[4] 3GPP TS23.272 Circuit Switched Fallback in Evolved Packet System; Stage 2
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 263
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
BENEFIT
The operator can provide CS service to its subscribers by using legacy CS
network (GERAN)
Users can make a CS call while staying in E-UTRAN, by transition to legacy CS
network (GERAN)
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The CSFB to GERAN with Cell Change Order (CCO) without Network Assisted
Cell Change (NACC) function switches UE to GERAN by CCO without NACC
procedure.
When S1 message including the CS FB indicator is received from MME, eNB
provides the cell change order to UE and specifies carrier frequency and target cell
in the GERAN to which the CSFB indicator and UE are to switch over (CCO
without NACC). The UE switches over to the target cell of GERAN specified by
eNB and initiates the voice call sending/receiving procedure.
Whether to use CCO or release with redirection could be configured by LSM.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 264
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 265
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 266
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
6) The eNB specifies GERAN carrier frequency and target GERAN cell to which
UE is to switch over and transmits the Mobility from EUTRA command to UE.
(The eNB may request measurement of GERAN before step 6. This measurement
will increase total CSFB latency)
7~11) The eNB transmits UE Context Release Request to MME. The MME
processes the S1 release procedure with eNB.
13) The UE switches over to GERAN carrier frequency given by eNB and
connects to GERAN. It initiates the GERAN location registration procedure.
14) If GERAN cannot provide simultaneous CS and PS service, UE requests
GERAN to suspend the PS service.
15~16) The SGSN processes the bearers suspension procedure by UEs request.
The MME suspends S-GW and PS bearers by the request from SGSN.
17) Then, UE performs CS call setup and continues to provide the CS service.
The following figure shows the procedure for UE in idle state:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 267
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
To enable this feature, operator should configure the GERAN Frequency
Information by executing the CHG-GERAN-FA command.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 268
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
The operator can put the high priority on CSFB to GERAN with CCO without
NACC by executing the CHG-GERAN-INTWO command for Normal type
based on UE measurement and Blind type without UE measurement. The
lower number priority has the higher priority.
If blindCCOsupport in CHG-GERAN-INTWO is set to True, Blind CCO is
supported during interworking with GERRAN and Target GERAN cell for
Blind CCO should be configured by executing the CHG-GERAN-BLCCO
command.
Key Parameters
CHG-GERAN-FA/RTRV-GERAN-FA
Parameter Description
STATUS This parameter indicates whether GERAN FA object is valid.
N_EQUIP: Invalid.
EQUIP: Valid.
FOLLOWING_ARFCNS The followingARFCNs is the choice option to select the remaining ARFCN
values except startingARFCN.
explicitList: used for explicitListOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 ~ geranArfcn31.
equallySpaced: used for equallySpacedARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0,
arfcnSpacing and numberOfFollowingARFCNs.
variableBitMap: used for variableBitMapOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 and
variableBitMapOfARFCNs.
GERAN_ARFCN0 This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of
GERAN FA object. (Start ARFCN)
GERAN_ARFCN1~GERAN_ This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of
ARFCN31 GERAN FA object.
ARFCN_SPACING If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, arfcnSpacing becomes Space, d,
between a set of equally spaced ARFCN values.
NUMBER_OF_FOLLOWING If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, numberOfFollowingARFCNs
_ARFCNS becomes The number, n, of the remaining equally spaced ARFCN values in
the set. The complete set of (n+1) ARFCN values is defined as: {s, ((s + d)
mod 1024), ((s + 2*d) mod 1024) ... ((s + n*d) mod 1024)}, where s is
startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).
VARIABLE_BIT_MAP_OF_ If followingARFCNs is set to variableBitMap, variableBitMapOfARFCNs
ARFCNS [16] becomes Bitmap field representing the remaining ARFCN values in the set.
The leading bit of the first octet in the bitmap corresponds to the ARFCN = ((s
+ 1) mod 1024), the next bit to the ARFCN = ((s + 2) mod 1024), and so on. If
the bitmap consist of N octets, the trailing bit of octet N corresponds to ARFCN
= ((s + 8*N) mod 1024). The complete set of ARFCN values consists of
ARFCN = s and the ARFCN values, where the corresponding bit in the bitmap
is set to 1 and s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).
CHG-GERAN-INTWO/RTRV-GERAN-INTWO
Parameter Description
NORMAL_PRIORITY0 This parameter indicates the first priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 269
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
NORMAL_PRIORITY1 This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
NORMAL_PRIORITY2 This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
NORMAL_PRIORITY3 This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY0 This parameter indicates the first priority of blind type GERAN interworking
procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY1 This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY2 This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY3 This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_CCOSUPPORT This parameter indicates whether to support blind Cell Change Order(CCO)
during GERAN interworking.
False: Blind CCO not supported.
True: Blind CCO supported.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 270
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
CHG-GERAN-BLCCO/RTRV-GERAN-BLCCO
Parameter Description
TARGET_GERAN_NBR_IDX This parameter is the target GERAN neighbor cell index where the blind CCO
will be performed for the relevant cell.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification
[3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN);
S1 Application Protocol (S1AP)
[4] 3GPP TS23.272 Circuit Switched Fallback in Evolved Packet System; Stage
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 271
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
BENEFIT
The operator can provide CS service to its subscribers by using legacy CS
network (GERAN).
Users can make a CS call while staying in E-UTRAN, by transition to legacy CS
network (GERAN).
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 272
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Regardless of UE movement, CSFB is triggered when there is mobile originating
or mobile terminating call.
To support CSFB service, 2G network coexists with LTE network where in MME
serves users while in LTE access network, and SGSN serves users while in 2G
access network. In 2G network, SGSN serves users when utilizing data services
and MSC (Mobile Switching Center) when utilizing voice services. To support CS
Fallback signaling, MME connects to MSC with SGs interface. The SGs interface
is used for the mobility management and paging procedures between EPS and CS
domain. Also, it is used for the delivery of both mobile originating and terminating
SMS.
The following figure shows the architecture and interfaces for CSFB:
Cell Change Order with NACC could be performed under the following
conditions:
UE or target GERAN does not support PS handover
UE shall support measurement reporting for GERAN frequencies in E-UTRA
connected mode (FGI#15 for B1, FGI#23 for B2).
oOptionally, measurement could be omitted via configuration
UE shall support cell change order procedure (FGI#10).
System Information of the target cell is provided (with NACC).
The following figure shows the call flow for CSFB to GERAN with CCO with
NACC:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 273
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 274
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
6) The eNB specifies GERAN carrier frequency and the target GERAN cell to
which UE is to switch over and transmits the Mobility from EUTRA command to
UE including the SI lists of the target GERAN cell.
(The eNB may request measurement of GERAN before step 6. This measurement
will increase total CSFB latency)
7~11) The eNB transmits UE Context Release Request to MME. The MME
processes the S1 release procedure with eNB.
13) The UE switches over to GERAN carrier frequency given by eNB and
connects to GERAN. It initiates the GERAN location registration procedure.
14) If the GERAN cannot provide simultaneous CS and PS service, UE requests
GERAN to suspend the PS service.
15~16) The SGSN processes the bearers suspension procedure by UEs request.
The MME suspends S-GW and PS by the request from SGSN.
17) Then, UE performs CS call setup and continues to provide the CS service
The following figure shows the procedure for UE in idle state:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 275
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
To enable this feature, operator should configure the GERAN Frequency
Information by executing the CHG-GERAN-FA command.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 276
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
The operator can put the high priority on CSFB to GERAN with CCO with NACC
by using CHG-GERAN-INTWO command for Normal type based on UE
measurement and Blind type without UE measurement. The lower number priority
has the higher priority.
If blindCCOsupport in CHG-GERAN-INTWO is set to True, Blind CCO is
supported during interworking with GERRAN and Target GERAN cell for Blind
CCO should be configured by executing the CHG-GERAN-BLCCO command.
isAllowedRim parameter should be set as True using CHG-HO-OPT. This
parameter configures the RIM procedure and rimSupport parameter should be set
as True by executing the CHG-NBR-GERAN command.
Key Parameters
CHG-GERAN-FA/RTRV-GERAN-FA
Parameter Description
STATUS This parameter indicates whether GERAN FA object is valid.
N_EQUIP: Invalid.
EQUIP: Valid.
FOLLOWING_ARFCNS The followingARFCNs is the choice option to select the remaining ARFCN
values except startingARFCN.
explicitList: used for explicitListOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 ~ geranArfcn31.
equallySpaced: used for equallySpacedARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0,
arfcnSpacing and numberOfFollowingARFCNs.
variableBitMap: used for variableBitMapOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 and
variableBitMapOfARFCNs.
GERAN_ARFCN0 This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of
GERAN FA object. (Start ARFCN)
GERAN_ARFCN1~GERAN_ This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of
ARFCN31 GERAN FA object.
ARFCN_SPACING If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, arfcnSpacing becomes Space, d,
between a set of equally spaced ARFCN values.
NUMBER_OF_FOLLOWING If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, numberOfFollowingARFCNs
_ARFCNS becomes The number, n, of the remaining equally spaced ARFCN values in
the set. The complete set of (n+1) ARFCN values is defined as: {s, ((s + d)
mod 1024), ((s + 2*d) mod 1024) ... ((s + n*d) mod 1024)}, where s is
startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).
VARIABLE_BIT_MAP_OF_ If followingARFCNs is set to variableBitMap, variableBitMapOfARFCNs
ARFCNS [16] becomes Bitmap field representing the remaining ARFCN values in the set.
The leading bit of the first octet in the bitmap corresponds to the ARFCN = ((s
+ 1) mod 1024), the next bit to the ARFCN = ((s + 2) mod 1024), and so on. If
the bitmap consist of N octets, the trailing bit of octet N corresponds to ARFCN
= ((s + 8*N) mod 1024). The complete set of ARFCN values consists of
ARFCN = s and the ARFCN values, where the corresponding bit in the bitmap
is set to 1 and s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).
BAND_INDICATOR The band indicator of GERAN FA object.
dcs1800: Indicates DCS 1800 band.
pcs1900: Indicates PCS 1900 band.
CHG-GERAN-INTWO/RTRV-GERAN-INTWO
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 277
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
NORMAL_PRIORITY0 This parameter indicates the first priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
NORMAL_PRIORITY1 This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
NORMAL_PRIORITY2 This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
NORMAL_PRIORITY3 This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY0 This parameter indicates the first priority of blind type GERAN interworking
procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY1 This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY2 This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
BLIND_PRIORITY3 This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN
interworking procedure.
ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC.
ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.
enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI.
geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 278
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
BLIND_CCOSUPPORT This parameter indicates whether to support blind Cell Change Order(CCO)
during GERAN interworking.
False: Blind CCO not supported.
True: Blind CCO supported.
CHG-GERAN-BLCCO/RTRV-GERAN-BLCCO
Parameter Description
TARGET_GERAN_NBR_ID This parameter is the target GERAN neighbor cell index where the blind CCO
X will be performed for the relevant cell.- geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without
SI.
CHG-HO-OPT/RTRV-HO-OPT
Parameter Description
RIM_ENABLE This parameter indicates whether to support the RAN Information Management
(RIM) function for Inter RAT (WCDMA, GEARN).
False: Does not perform the RIM function.
True: Performs the RIM function.
CHG-NBR-GERAN/RTRV-NBR-GERAN/CRTE-NBR-GERAN/DLT-NBR-
GERAN
Parameter Description
RIM_SUPPORT This parameter indicates whether or not the RIM procedure of a Neighbor
GERAN Cell is supported. It must be set accurately since the RIM procedure
execution is determined by the setting.
False: RIM is not supported.
True: RIM is supported.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 279
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 280
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
BENEFIT
The operator can provide CS service to its subscribers by using legacy CS
network (GERAN).
Users can do a CS call while staying in E-UTRAN, by transition to legacy CS
network (GERAN).
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Regardless of UE movement, CSFB is triggered when there is mobile originating
or mobile terminating call.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 281
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
To support CSFB service, 2G network coexists with LTE network where in MME
serves users while in LTE access network, and SGSN serves users while in 2G
access network. In 2G network, SGSN serves users when utilizing data services
and MSC (Mobile Switching Center) when utilizing voice services. To support CS
Fallback signaling, MME connects to MSC with SGs interface. The SGs interface
is used for the mobility management and paging procedures between EPS and CS
domain. Also, it is also used for the delivery of both mobile originating and
terminating SMS.
The following figure shows the architecture and interfaces for CSFB:
Samsung eNB can use PS handover for CSFB to GERAN under the following
conditions:
Target GERAN shall support PS handover
UE shall support measurement reporting for GERAN frequencies in E-UTRA
connected mode (FGI#15 for B1, FGI#23 for B2).
UE shall support handover to GERAN (FGI#9).
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 282
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 283
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
To enable this feature, operator should configure the GERAN Frequency
Information by executing the CHG-GERAN-FA command and the GERAN
Periodic Measurement information for StrongestCell report purpose by using
CHG-GERAN-PRD command.
psHoSupport parameter should be set as True by executing the CHG-NBR-
GERAN command.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 284
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Key Parameters
CHG-GERAN-FA/RTRV-GERAN-FA
Parameter Description
STATUS This parameter indicates whether GERAN FA object is valid.
N_EQUIP: Invalid.
EQUIP: Valid.
FOLLOWING_ARFCNS The followingARFCNs is the choice option to select the remaining ARFCN
values except startingARFCN.
explicitList: used for explicitListOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 ~ geranArfcn31.
equallySpaced: used for equallySpacedARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0,
arfcnSpacing and numberOfFollowingARFCNs.
variableBitMap: used for variableBitMapOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 and
variableBitMapOfARFCNs.
GERAN_ARFCN0 This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of
GERAN FA object. (Start ARFCN)
GERAN_ARFCN1~GERAN_ This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of
ARFCN31 GERAN FA object.
ARFCN_SPACING If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, arfcnSpacing becomes Space, d,
between a set of equally spaced ARFCN values.
NUMBER_OF_FOLLOWING If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, numberOfFollowingARFCNs
_ARFCNS becomes The number, n, of the remaining equally spaced ARFCN values in
the set. The complete set of (n+1) ARFCN values is defined as: {s, ((s + d)
mod 1024), ((s + 2*d) mod 1024) ... ((s + n*d) mod 1024)}, where s is
startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).
VARIABLE_BIT_MAP_OF_ If followingARFCNs is set to variableBitMap, variableBitMapOfARFCNs
ARFCNS [16] becomes Bitmap field representing the remaining ARFCN values in the set.
The leading bit of the first octet in the bitmap corresponds to the ARFCN = ((s
+ 1) mod 1024), the next bit to the ARFCN = ((s + 2) mod 1024), and so on. If
the bitmap consist of N octets, the trailing bit of octet N corresponds to ARFCN
= ((s + 8*N) mod 1024). The complete set of ARFCN values consists of
ARFCN = s and the ARFCN values, where the corresponding bit in the bitmap
is set to 1 and s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).
BAND_INDICATOR The band indicator of the GERAN FA object.
dcs1800: Indicates DCS 1800 band.
pcs1900: Indicates PCS 1900 band.
CHG-GERAN-PRD/RTRV-GERAN-PRD
Parameter Description
PURPOSE The purpose for using information on the GERAN periodic event report.
StrongestCells: This purpose is used for ICIC.
StrongestCellsForSON: This purpose is used for SON.
ReportCGI: This purpose is used for CGI.
Mlb: This purpose is used for MLB.
ACTIVE_STATE This parameter indicates whether to use the GERAN periodic event report.
Inactive: The GERAN periodic event report is not used.
Active: The GERAN periodic event report is used.
MAX_REPORT_CELL The maximum number of cells to be included in a measurement report due to
the GERAN periodic event report.
REPORT_INTERVAL The interval of a measurement report of UE due to the GERAN periodic event
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 285
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
report.
REPORT_AMOUNT The maximum number of measurement reports of UE due to the GERAN
periodic event report.
CHG-NBR-GERAN/RTRV-NBR-GERAN/CRTE-NBR-GERAN/DLT-NBR-
GERAN
Parameter Description
PS_HO_SUPPORT This parameter indicates whether to support the PS-HO of the given GERAN
neighbor cell.
False: PS-HO is not supported.
True: PS-HO is supported.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 286
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification
[3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN);
S1 Application Protocol (S1AP)
[4] 3GPP TS23.272 Circuit Switched Fallback in Evolved Packet System; Stage 2
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 287
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
BENEFIT
To use a handover policy set for each QCI, a different handover policy can be
applied for a different service.
The mobility quality of VoLTE can be improved.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Operation Scenario
The operator sets the parameters as per their requirement for service based intra-
LTE handover.
Provisioning/Parameter Settings for service based Intra-LTE
Appropriate mobility profile is allocated to each QCI. Mobility Profile 0 is the
default configuration, which is allocated to the QCI that does not belong to
Mobility Profiles 1-4. In case of QCI 5, Mobility Profile 0 is allocated instead of
Mobility Profiles 1-4.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 288
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
The following table shows an example of mobility profile allocation for each QCI:
Mobility Profile # Mobility Profile 0 Mobility Mobility Mobility Mobility
Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4
QCIs allocated to Default configuration QCI 1 QCI 2, 3, 4 QCI 7, 8, 9 No allocated
each mobility group (Default value per QCI) QCI
Mobility control related items are set for each mobility profile as follows:
Preferred target carrier frequencies for E-UTRAN (FDD or TDD)
Handover triggering event
Measurement configuration
Blind redirection option
The UE may have multiple QCIs belonging to different mobility profiles. In such
cases, Mobility Profile of UE is determined by the mobility profile associated with
highest priority QCI of that UE. If highest priority QCI is associated with default
mobility profile, then service based handover scheme is disabled for that UE and
existing handover scheme will be applied.
The following table shows an example of Priority Allocation per QCI:
QCI # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Priority 9 2 4 3 5 1 6 7 8 9
The mobility profile for UE is determined based on the QCI of a bearer that is used
by UE. Therefore, a different handover policy can be used per QCI.
The operational scenario is as follows:
The following figure is an example of service based intra-LTE handover:
For example, UE A and UE B have QCI 1 and QCI 9 respectively and mobility
profile per QCI is set as shown in below table. That is, Mobility Profile 1 is
allocated to UE A and Mobility Profile 2 is allocated to UE B. In this case, if a
preferred carrier is set to Carrier A for Mobility Profile 1 and Carrier B for
Mobility Profile 2, UE A handovers to Carrier A and UE B handovers to Carrier B
as shown in above figure.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 289
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
The following table shows an example of Mobility Profile Allocation per QCI that
is Set in UE.
UE A B
QCI 1 9
Mobility Profile Mobility Profile 1 Mobility Profile 2
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Configure QCI Mobility Group ID to each QCI value by executing the CHG-QCI-
VAL command. If multiple bearers with different QCIs are configured for the same
UE, then the QCI Mobility Group ID with highest priority QCI will be chosen.
QCI Mobility Group specific handover parameters can be configured by
RTRV/CHG EUTRA-FAQCI, RTRV/CHG-EUTRA-A1CNFQ, RTRV/CHG-
EUTRA-A2CNFQ, RTRV/CHG-EUTRA-A3CNFQ, RTRV/CHG-EUTRA-
A4CNFQ, RTRV/CHG-EUTRA-A5CNFQ. If specific QCI Mobility Group is going
to use event A3 to handover to the specific FA, then use 1) CHG-EUTRA-FAQCI
to set handover type to be A3 and 2) CHG-EUTRA-A3CNFQ to set the active
status of the corresponding cell, handover purpose, qci group index, and FA index.
Key Parameters
RTRV-QCI-VAL/CHG-QCI-VAL (QCI Mobility Group configuration)
Parameter Description
QCI This parameter is the QoS Class Identifier (QCI). The range is 0 - 255.The
standard QCI defined in the standard document is 1 - 9. 0 and 10 - 255 can be
used by the operator optionally.
[Related Specifications] 3GPP TS 23.203 [Table 6.1.7] Standardized QoS
characteristics.
STATUS This parameter indicates the whether to use the QoS Class Identifier (QCI).
EQUIP: eNB uses the relevant QCI.
N_EQUIP: eNB does not use the relevant QCI.
PRIORITY This parameter is the priority of the QoS Class Identifier (QCI). The range is 1
to 16, and 1 means the highest priority.
QCI_MOBILITY_GROUP_ID This attribute defines the QCI Mobility Group ID of the QCI.
RTRV-EUTRA-FAQCI/CHG-EUTRA-FAQCI
Parameter Description
CELL_NUM The cell number to be changed.
FA_INDEX EUTRA frequency index. Up to 8 FAs can be assigned per cell.
QCI_GROUP_INDEX QCI Group index.
STATUS Whether the EUTRA FA is valid.
N_EQUIP: Invalid.
EQUIP: Valid.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 290
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
OFFSET_FREQ Frequency offset value applied to offsetFreq in RRC Connection
Reconfiguration.
HANDOVER_TYPE Handover Type per Carrier
ci_HoEventA3
ci_HoEventA4
ci_HoEventA5
RTRV-EUTRA-A1CNFQ/CHG-EUTRA-A1CNFQ
Parameter Description
CELL_NUM This parameter is the number of cells. This value must not exceed the
maximum number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by
FA/Sector. For example, if the maximum capacity provided to the carrier per
system is 1 FA/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.
QCI_GROUP_INDEX QCI Group index.
ACTIVE_STATE This parameter indicates whether event A1 is enabled/disabled per target
frequency.
Inactive: Event A1 is not used.
Active: Event A1 is used.
RTRV-EUTRA-A2CNFQ/CHG-EUTRA-A1CNFQ
Parameter Description
CELL_NUM This parameter is the number of cells. This value must not exceed the
maximum number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by
FA/Sector. For example, if the maximum capacity provided to the carrier per
system is 1 FA/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.
PURPOSE This parameter is the purpose of using the Event A2 per cell. It is used to
activate the measurement gap as default.
LteHo: Used for Gap Activate
LteBlind: Used for Blind HO
IRatHo: Used for IRAT HO
IRatBlind: Used for IRAT Blind HO
Ca: Used for Carrer Aggregation
CaPeriodicMr
Srvcc
Mdt
Spare_2: Reserved.
ACTIVE_STATE This parameter indicates whether event A2 is enabled/disabled per target
frequency.
Inactive: Event A2 is not used.
Active: Event A2 is used. If HO of the target frequency is not needed in the
site, this is inactive.
This change will be applied to UE from next RRC signaling procedure (for
example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new setting will not be
updated to the current Active UEs.
RTRV-EUTRA-A3CNFQ/CHG-EUTRA-A3CNFQ
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 291
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
CELL_NUM This parameter is the number of cells. This value must not exceed the
maximum number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by
FA/Sector. For example, if the maximum capacity provided to the carrier per
system is 1 FA/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.
PURPOSE This parameter is the purpose of using Event A3 event.
IntraLteHandover: Performs handover.
ReportStrongestCells: Performs the ANR operation.
IntraFrequencyLb
Spare_2: Reserved. Not used at this moment.
QCI_GROUP_INDEX QCI Group index.
FA_INDEX The FA_INDEX is a parameter corresponding to the FA_INDEX of EUTRA-FA.
The configuration conditions of A3 event (A3_OFFSET, TRIGGER_QUANTIY,
and so on.) can be set differently per FA. To configure A3 event for a specific
FA, the status of EUTRA-FA (FA_INDEX#n) must be EQUIP and the
ACTIVE_STATE of EUTRA-A3CNF (FA_INDEX#n) must be Active.
ACTIVE_STATE This parameter is the purpose of using Event A3 event. If this is set to Inactive,
the A3 event is not configured.
RTRV-EUTRA-A4CNFQ/CHG-EUTRA-A4CNFQ
Parameter Description
CELL_NUM This parameter is the number of cells. This value must not exceed the
maximum number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by
FA/Sector. For example, if the maximum capacity provided to the carrier per
system is 1 FA/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.
PURPOSE This parameter is the purpose of using Event A4 event.
A4PurposeUntraLteHandover: handover is executed
A4PurposeANR_Specific:the ANR operation is executed
A4PurposeCA: SCELL is configured
A4PurposeUnloading: the unloading operation is executed
A4PurposeSpare_2: it is not used at this moment because it is reserved for
future use.
QCI_GROUP_INDEX QCI Group index.
FA_INDEX The FA_INDEX is a parameter corresponding to the FA_INDEX of EUTRA-FA.
The configuration conditions of A4 event (A4_THRESHOLD_RSRP,
TRIGGER_QUANTIY, and so on.) can be set differently per FA. To configure
A4 event for a specific FA, the status of EUTRA-FA (FA_INDEX#n) must be
EQUIP and the ACTIVE_STATE of EUTRA-A4CNF (FA_INDEX#n) must be
Active. The ANR_Specific/CA/Unloading is only used to configure FA_INDEX
#0 and other values are ignored.
ACTIVE_STATE This parameter is the purpose of using Event A4 event. If this is set to Inactive,
the A4 event is not configured.
RTRV-EUTRA-A5CNFQ/CHG-EUTRA-A5CNFQ
Parameter Description
CELL_NUM This parameter is the number of cells. This value must not exceed the
maximum number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by
FA/Sector. For example, if the maximum capacity provided to the carrier per
system is 1 FA/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 292
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
PURPOSE This parameter is the purpose of using Event A5 event.
IntraLteHandover: Intra-LTE handover.
Spare_1: Reserved.
Spare_2: Reserved.
QCI_GROUP_INDEX QCI Group index.
FA_INDEX The FA_INDEX is a parameter corresponding to the FA_INDEX of EUTRA-FA.
The configuration conditions of A5 event (A5_THRESHOLD_RSRP1,
TRIGGER_QUANTIY, and so on.) can be set differently per FA. To configure
A5 event for a specific FA, the status of EUTRA-FA (FA_INDEX#n) must be
EQUIP and the ACTIVE_STATE of EUTRA-A5CNF (FA_INDEX#n) must be
Active.
ACTIVE_STATE This parameter is the purpose of using Event A5 event. If this is set to Inactive,
the A5 event is not configured.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 293
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
REFERENCE
N/A
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 294
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
BENEFIT
The operator can control idle mode camping RAT and carriers of UE based on
absolute priorities determined by subscription information.
The operator can control service frequency of UE based on absolute priorities
determined by subscription information.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The SPID information is received from MME (Initial Context Setup Request/UE
Context Modification/Downlink NAS Transport) or other eNB (Handover Setup
Request).
The eNB support to Inter-frequency handover or reselection priority based on
dedicated priority each SPID.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 295
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Specification
SPID Range
Values 1~128: Operator specific SPID values.
Values 129~256: Reference values
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 296
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
The following table shows eNB local configuration in idle and connected mode for
SPID = 255:
Configuration Parameter Value Description
UTRAN Carriers Priority High The selection priorities for idle and connected mode of all
UTRAN carriers are higher than the priorities for all
GERAN and E-UTRAN carriers
GERAN Carriers Priority Medium The selection priorities for idle and connected mode of all
GERAN carriers are lower than the priorities for all UTRAN
carriers and higher than the priorities for all E-UTRAN
carriers
E-UTRAN Carriers Priority Low The selection priorities for idle and connected mode of all
E-UTRAN carriers are lower than the priorities for all
UTRAN and GERAN carriers
The following table shows eNB local configuration in idle and connected mode for
SPID = 254:
Configuration Parameter Value Description
GERAN Carriers Priority High The selection priorities for idle and connected mode of all
GERAN carriers are higher than the priorities for all
UTRAN and E-UTRAN carriers
UTRAN Carriers Priority Medium The selection priorities for idle and connected mode of all
UTRAN carriers are lower than the priorities for all GERAN
carriers and higher than the priorities for all E-UTRAN
carriers
E-UTRAN Carriers Priority Low The selection priorities for idle and connected mode of all
E-UTRAN carriers are lower than the priorities for all
GERAN and UTRAN carriers
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 297
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Set dedicated priority of the FA to the specific SPID by using the RTRV/CHG-
EUTRA-PRIOR command for EUTRAN FA,the RTRV/CHG-UTRA-PRIOR
command for UTRAN FA, and the RTRV/CHG-GERAN-PRIOR command
for GERAN FA.
If operator needs to create a UE with specific SPID to intra-LTE handover to FA
with the highest dedicate priority using A4 or A5 measurement event,
aSet spidMobilityOption of the specific Cell/PLMN/FA/SPID with the highest
dedicatedPriority value to 'handoverOnly' or 'both' by executing the CHG-
EUTRA-PRIOR command.
bSet spidMeasureOption of the corresponding Cell/PLMN/FA/SPID to
'hoEventA4' or 'hoEventA5' by executing the CHG-EUTRA-PRIOR
command.
cSet activeState of the A4 or A5 event for the corresponding Cell/FA to be
active using CHG-EUTRA-A4CNF command or CHG-EUTRA-A5CNF
command with index A4purposeInterFrequencySPID or
A5purposeInterFrequencySPID (if service based handover feature is
applied, EUTRA-A4CNFQ or EUTRA-A5CNFQ with the relevant QCI
Mobility Group ID has to be considered also.).
If operator needs to create a UE with specific SPID to inter-RAT handover to FA
with the highest dedicate priority using B1 or B2 measurement event,
aSet spidMobilityOption of the specific Cell/PLMN/FA/SPID with the highest
dedicatedPriority value to 'handoverOnly' or by executing the using CHG-
UTRA-PRIOR or CHG-GERAN-PRIOR command.
bSet spidMeasureOption of the corresponding Cell/PLMN/FA/SPID to
'hoEventB1' or 'hoEventB2' by executing the CHG-UTRA-PRIOR or
CHG-GERAN-PRIOR command.
cSet activeState of the B1 or B2 event for the corresponding Cell/FA to be
active using CHG-UTRA-B1CNF/CHG-UTRA-B2CNF or CHG-
GERAN-B1CNF/CHG-GERAN-B2CNF (if the service specific handover
feature is applied, UTRA-B1CNFQ/UTRA-B2CNFQ or GERAN-
B1CNFQ/GERAN-B2CNFQ with the relevant QCI Mobility Group ID has
to be considered also.).
Key Parameters
RTRV-EUTRA-PRIOR/CHG-EUTRA-PRIOR
Parameter Description
CELL_NUM This parameter is the number of cells. This value must not exceed the
maximum number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by
FA/Sector. For example, if the maximum capacity provided to the carrier per
system is 1 FA/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 298
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
PLMN_ID PLMN index. It is mapping to MCC/MNC configured in plmnIdx of
PLDEnbPlmnInfo.
FA_ID This parameter is the Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (EUTRA)
frequency index. This parameter enters the FA value that each cell supports
and it is mapped to the FA_INDEX parameter value in the RTRV-EUTRA-FA
command.
SPID_INDEX This parameter is the Subscriber Profile ID (SPID). This parameter is the index
used to refer to the registration information of a subscriber.
SPID This parameter is the Subscriber Profile ID (SPID) for Radio Access Terminal
(RAT)/frequency priority value. The range of an entered value is 1 - 128 and a
value between 129 and 253 cannot be entered.
USED_FLAG This parameter shows whether the dedicated priority is used.
no_use: Dedicated priority is not used.
use: Dedicated priority is used.
DEDICATED_PRIORITY This parameter is the dedicated priority value. Enter a dedicated priority value
according to the FA_INDEX and SPID.
SPID_MOBILITY_OPTION Define addtional operations based on the mobility setting of the parameter for
SPID of the UE.
reselectionOnly(0): When UE is released, send the dedicated priority per FA
for SPID that the UE currently possesses among the FAs supported in UE
Radio Capability through IdleModeMobilityControlInfo. However, A4 or A5
based inter-frequency handover based on SPID shall not be performed.
handoverOnly(1): When the UE first receives SPID, if the FA configured to be
the highest DEDICATED_PRIORITY for the SPID is different from the
serving frequency of the UE but can be supported in UE Radio Capabiilty,
attach A4 or A5 event to induce inter-frequency handover.
RTRV-UTRA-PRIOR/CHG-UTRA-PRIOR
Parameter Description
CELL_NUM This parameter specifies the cell number to retrieve the periodic report config
information used for interoperating with the UTRAN.
PLMN_INDEX PLMN index. It is mapping to MCC/MNC configured in plmnIdx of
PLDEnbPlmnInfo.
FA_ID This parameter is the Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA) frequency
index. The operator can enter a FA value each cell supports and maximum 6
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 299
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
FAs can be entered. This parameter is mapped to the FA_INDEX parameter
value included in the RTRV-UTRA-FA command.
SPID_INDEX This parameter is the Subscriber Profile ID (SPID) index. This parameter is the
index used to refer to the registration information of a subscriber.
SPID Subscriber Profile ID for RAT/Frequency priority. SPID could not be setting
129~253.
USED_FLAG Whether to use dedicatedPriority.
CI_no_use: dedicatedPriority is not used.
CI_use: dedicatedPriority is used.
DEDICATED_PRIORITY Dedicated Priority Value for Frequency according SPID.
According to 3GPP TS36.300, if spid is 255, dedicated priority is set to 7.
SPID_MOBILITY_OPTION Define additional operations based on the mobility setting of the parameter for
SPID of the UE.
reselectionOnly(0): When UE is released, send the dedicated priority per FA
for SPID that the UE currently possesses among the FAs supported in UE
Radio Capability through IdleModeMobilityControlInfo. However, B1 or B2
based inter-RAT handover to UTRAN based on SPID shall not be performed.
handoverOnly(1): When UE first receives SPID, if the FA configured to be the
highest DEDICATED_PRIORITY for the SPID is different from the serving
frequency of UE but can be supported in UE Radio Capability, attach B1 or
B2 event to induce inter-RAT handover to UTRAN.
RTRV-GERAN-PRIOR/CHG-GERAN-PRIOR
Parameter Description
CELL_NUM The cell number to be changed.
PLMN_INDEX PLMN index. It is mapping to MCC/MNC configured in plmnIdx of
PLDEnbPlmnInfo.
FA_INDEX GERAN frequency index. Up to 6 FAs can be assigned per cell. It is mapping
to PLDGeranFaPriorInfo.
SPID_INDEX SPID index.
SPID Subscriber Profile ID for RAT/Frequency priority. SPID could not be setting
129~253.
USED_FLAG Whether to use dedicatedPriority.
CI_no_use: dedicatedPriority is not used.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 300
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
CI_use: dedicatedPriority is used.
DEDICATED_PRIORITY Dedicated Priority Value for Frequency according SPID.
According to 3GPP TS36.300, if spid is 254, dedicated priority is set to 7.
SPID_MOBILITY_OPTION Define additional operations based on the mobility setting of the parameter for
SPID of the UE.
reselectionOnly(0): When UE is released, send the dedicated priority per FA
for SPID that the UE currently possesses among the FAs supported in UE
Radio Capability through IdleModeMobilityControlInfo. However, B1 or B2
based inter-RAT handover to GERAN based on SPID shall not be
performed.
handoverOnly(1): When the UE first receives SPID, if the FA configured to be
the highest DEDICATED_PRIORITY for the SPID is different from the
serving frequency of the UE but can be supported in UE Radio Capability,
attach B1 or B2 event to induce inter-RAT handover to GERAN.
RTRV-EUTRA-A4CNF/CHG-EUTRA-A4CNF OR RTRV-EUTRA-
A4CNFQ/CHG-EUTRA-A4CNFQ
Parameter Description
PURPOSE This parameter is the purpose of using Event A4.
IntraLteHandover: handover is executed
ANR_Specific: the ANR operation is executed
CA: SCELL is configured
Sendback: the Sendback operation is executed
InterFrequencyLb: the Active Load Balancing operation is executed
ArpHandover: Enable inter frequency handover function for UEs that have a
specific ARP
OnDemandHandover: Enable the forced handover triggering by operator
InterFrequencySPID: inter-frequency handover is executed for specific SPID
with handover mobility option.
ACTIVE_STATE This parameter is the purpose of using Event A4. If this is set to Inactive, the
Event A4 is not configured.
RTRV-EUTRA-A5CNF/CHG-EUTRA-A5CNF OR RTRV-EUTRA-
A5CNFQ/CHG-EUTRA-A5CNFQ
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 301
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
PURPOSE This parameter is the purpose of using Event A5.
IntraLteHandover: Used for Intra LTE Handover.
CaInterFreq: Performs Inter frequency handover for Carrier Aggregation(CA)
UE
InterFrequencyMbms: Inter frequency handover to get MBMS service
ArpHandover: Enable Inter frequency handover function for UEs that have a
specific ARP
OnDemandHandover: Enable the forced handover triggering by operator
InterFrequencySPID: Inter frequency handover for the specific SPID with
handover mobility option
ACTIVE_STATE This parameter is the purpose of using Event A5. If this is set to Inactive, the
Event A5 is not configured.
RTRV-UTRA-B1CNF/CHG-UTRA-B1CNF or RTRV-UTRA-B1CNFQ/CHG-
UTRA-B1CNFQ
Parameter Description
PURPOSE This parameter specifies the use of the UTRAN Event B1 used for
interoperating with the UTRAN.
InterRatHandover: Used for handover to the UTRAN. (0)
ANR_Specific: Used for the ANR operation with the UTRAN. (1)
Srvcc: Used for the Srvcc with the UTRAN. (2)
Mlb: Used for MLB. (3)
InterRatSPID: inter-RAT handover is executed for specific SPID with
handover mobility option. (4)
ACTIVE_STATE This parameter is the purpose of using Event B1. If this is set to Inactive, the
Event B1 is not configured.
RTRV-UTRA-B2CNF/CHG-EUTRA-B2CNF or RTRV-EUTRA-B2CNFQ/CHG-
EUTRA-B2CNFQ
Parameter Description
PURPOSE This parameter is the purpose to retrieve the B2 report configuration
information used for interoperating with the UTRAN.
InterRatHandover: Used for handover to the UTRAN. (0)
Srvcc: Used for SRVCC. (1)
InterRatSPID: inter-RAT handover is executed for specific SPID with
handover mobility option. (2)
ACTIVE_STATE This parameter is the purpose of using Event B2. If this is set to Inactive, the
Event B2 is not configured.
RTRV-GERAN-B1CNF/CHG-GERAN-B1CNF or RTRV-GERAN-
B1CNFQ/CHG-GERAN-B1CNFQ
Parameter Description
PURPOSE This parameter is the usage of information on the GERAN Event B1 report. It is
used for inter-RAT Handover and SON ANR function.
InterRatHandover: Used for InterRAT Handover (0)
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 302
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Parameter Description
ANR_Specific: Used for SON ANR (1)
Srvcc: Used for SRVCC (2)
Mlb: For MLB. (3)
InterRatSPID: inter-RAT handover is executed for specific SPID with
handover mobility option. (4)
ACTIVE_STATE This parameter is the purpose of using Event B1. If this is set to Inactive, the
Event B1 is not configured.
RTRV-GERAN-B2CNF/CHG-GERAN-B2CNF or RTRV-GERAN-
B2CNFQ/CHG-GERAN-B2CNFQ
Parameter Description
PURPOSE This parameter is the usage of the GERAN Event B2 report. It is used for inter-
RAT Handover.(0)
InterRatHandover: For Inter-RAT handover.(0)
Srvcc: For SRVCC. (1)
InterRatSPID: inter-RAT handover is executed for specific SPID with
handover mobility option. (2)
ACTIVE_STATE This parameter is the purpose of using Event B2. If this is set to Inactive, the
Event B2 is not configured.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification
[3] 3GPP TS36.304 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User
Equipment (UE) procedures in idle mode
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 303
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 4 Mobility Control
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 304
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler
BENEFIT
This feature enables to enhance flexibility in spreading the resources across the
frequency domain to exploit frequency diversity.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
3GPP LTE defines three downlink resource allocation types as follows:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 305
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 306
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler
The number of bits used to signal the RBG subset is either 1 or 2 depending on
the number of subsets. The resource blocks allocated to UE always belong to a
single RBG subset.
The resource block offset flag indicates whether the subsequent Resource Block
bitmap should be aligned with the bottom of the lowest Resource Block within
the subset, or aligned with the top of the highest Resource Block within the
subset. This offset is necessary because the bit map is not sufficiently large to
include all Resource Blocks within the subset.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 307
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler
Contiguous virtual resource blocks are contiguous both before and after mapping
onto their physical resource blocks. In this case, the set of allocated physical
resource blocks is the same as the set of allocated virtual resource blocks. In
addition, the resource block allocation is the same in both time slots belonging
to the subframe.
Contiguous allocations can range from a single virtual resource block to the
complete set of virtual resource blocks spanning the entire channel bandwidth.
Contiguous virtual resource block allocation is signaled using Resource
Indication Values (RIV). The calculation of the RIV is same as when
calculating the RIV for type 0 uplink resource allocations.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
The PDSCH resource allocation type is automatically determined by Samsung
scheduler based on the DCI format and the traffic type and cannot be directly
controlled by the operator.
Key Parameters
There are no related parameters.
REFERENCE
[1] Telefonica, Req20, The Vendors LTE solution shall support functionality to
enquire UE capability and record number of UEs per eNodeB and per cell for each
UE category, Telefonica RFP (12.04)
[2] 3GPP TS 36.213 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical layer procedures
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 308
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler
BENEFIT
DL frequency selective scheduling to use sub-band CQI of all subbands.
DL radio resource scheduling to serve the best resource allocation.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The aperiodic CQI is sent by PUSCH and be triggered by the CQI request field
within UL grant. The eNB configures the following types of CQI reporting
through the RRC signaling:
Wideband reporting
UE-selected sub-band reporting
Higher layer configured sub-band reporting
In UE-selected sub-band reporting, the UE reports average CQI of M number of
preferred sub-band in addition to wideband CQI. While it reports wideband CQI
and sub-band CQI of all subbands in higher layer configured sub-band reporting.
Because higher layer configured CQI reporting provides more information than
UE-selected sub-band reporting, the Samsung eNB only operates higher layer
configured CQI reporting.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 309
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler
The eNB uses aperiodic CQI for frequency selective scheduling because sub-band
information of periodic sub-band CQI is limited, as follows:
The UE reports only the selected sub-band CQI in bandwidth part.
The UE does not transmit sub-band CQIs for the entire bandwidth simultaneously,
which leads to longer reporting time.
The eNB also uses aperiodic CQI in DL Carrier Aggregation. When the Carrier
Aggregation feature is enabled, the use of two bits for CSI request is applicable.
According to CSI request field, aperiodic CQI reporting is triggered for Pcell or
Scell.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Execute CHG-CQI-REP to set CQI_REPORT_APERIODIC_SETUP to
ci_Config_Setup for enabling aperiodic CQI report when DL Frequency
Selective Scheduling (FSS) is enabled.
Execute CHG-CQI-REP to set CQI_REPORT_APERIODIC_SETUP_R10 to
ci_Config_PcellScellSetup for enabling aperiodic CQI report when Carrier
Aggregation feature is enabled.
Key Parameters
RTRV-CQI-REP/CHG-CQI-REP
Parameter Description
CQI_REPORT_APERIODIC_SETUP This parameter is set to enable or disable the use of aperiodic
report mode.
Release: Aperiodic report mode is disabled.
Setup: Aperiodic report mode is enabled.
CQI_REPORT_APERIODIC_SETUP_R10 Config aperiodic report mode for Rel 10.
0: ci_Config_ReleaseAll
1: ci_Config_PcellSetup
2: ci_Config_ScellSetup
3: ci_Config_PcellScellSetup
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS 36.212 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Multiplexing and channel coding
[2] 3GPP TS 36.213 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical layer procedures
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 310
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler
BENEFIT
Enable link adaptation from facilitating this feature
Enable downlink radio resource scheduling to serve the best resource allocation
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
In cellular communication systems, the quality of signal received by UE depends
on channel quality from serving cell, level of interference from other cells, and
noise level. To optimize system capacity and coverage for a given transmission
power, the transmitter should try to match the information data rate for each user
to the variations in received signal quality. This is commonly referred to as link
adaptation and is typically based on Adaptive Modulation and Coding (AMC).
The degrees of freedom for the AMC consist of the modulation and coding
schemes:
Modulation Scheme
Low-order modulation (that is, few data bits per modulated symbol, for
example, QPSK) is more robust and can tolerate higher levels of interference
but provides a lower transmission bit rate. High-order modulation (that is,
more bits per modulated symbol, for example, 64QAM) offers a higher bit rate
but is more prone to errors due to its higher sensitivity to interference, noise
and channel estimation errors; it is therefore useful only when the SINR is
sufficiently high.
Code rate
In case of given modulation, the code rate can be chosen depending on the
radio link conditions: a lower code rate can be used in poor channel conditions
and a higher code rate in the case of high SINR. The adaptation of the code
rate is achieved by applying puncturing or repetition to the output of a mother
code.
A key issue in the design of AMC scheme for LTE was whether all Resource
Blocks (RBs) allocated to one user in a subframe should use the same Modulation
and Coding Scheme (MCS) or whether the MCS should be frequency dependent
within each subframe. It was shown that in general only a small throughput
improvement arises from a frequency-dependent MCS compared to RB-common
MCS in the absence of transmission power control, and therefore the additional
control signalling overhead associated with frequency-dependent MCS is not
justified. Therefore in LTE the modulation and channel coding rates are constant
over the allocated frequency resources for a given user, and time-domain channel-
dependent scheduling and AMC is supported instead. In addition, when multiple
transport blocks are transmitted to one user in a given subframe using multistream
Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO), each transport block can use an
independent MCS.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 312
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler
The AMC can exploit UE feedback by assuming that the channel fading is
sufficiently slow. This requires the channel coherence time to be at least as long as
the time between UEs measurement of the downlink reference signals and
subframe containing correspondingly-adapted downlink transmission on the
Physical Downlink Shared CHannel (PDSCH). However, a trade-off exists
between the amount of CQI information reported by UEs and accuracy with which
the AMC can match the prevailing conditions. Frequent reporting of CQI in the
time domain allows better matching to channel and interference variations, while
fine resolution in the frequency domain allows better exploitation of frequency-
domain scheduling. However, both lead to increased feedback overhead in the
uplink. Therefore, eNB can configure both time-domain update rate and
frequency-domain resolution of the CQI.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 313
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler
CQI Feedback
In case of CQI feedback, eNB employs periodic reporting of the CQI and UE will
transmit the reports using the PUCCH. Only wideband and UE-selected sub-band
feedback is possible for periodic CQI reporting, for all downlink (PDSCH)
transmission modes. The type of periodic reporting is configured by eNB by RRC
signalling. In case of wideband periodic CQI reporting, the period can be
configured to {2, 5, 10, 16, 20, 32, 40, 64, 80, 160} ms or OFF, and UE reports
one wideband CQI value for the whole system bandwidth. In case of UE selected
sub-band, the total number of sub-bands N is divided into J fractions called
bandwidth parts. One CQI value is computed and reported for a single selected
sub-band from each bandwidth part, along with the corresponding sub-band index.
The value of J depends on the system bandwidth as summarized in below table.
The following table shows the periodic CQI reporting with UE-selected sub-bands:
sub-band size (k) and bandwidth parts (J) versus downlink system bandwidth.
System Bandwidth (RBs) Sub-band Size (k RBs) Number of Bandwidth parts (J)
6-7 (Wideband CQI only) 1
8-10 4 1
11-26 4 2
27-63 6 3
64- 110 8 4
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
This feature is basically enabled and operator cannot disable.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 314
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler
Key Parameters
RTRV-CQI-REP/CHG-CQI-REP
Parameter Description
TRANSMISSION_MODE Transmission mode.
ci_tm1: Single-antenna port (port 0), DCI format 1 or 1A is used.
ci_tm2: Transmit diversity, DCI format 1 or 1A is used.
ci_tm3: Open-loop spatial multiplexing, DCI format 2A or 1A is used.
ci_tm4: Closed-loop spatial multiplexing, DCI format 2 or 1A is used.
ci_tm5: MU-MIMO, DCI format 1D or 1A is used.
ci_tm6: Closed-loop rank-1 precoding, DCI format 1B or 1A is used.
ci_tm7: Single-antenna port (port 5), DCI format 1 or 1A is used.
ci_tm8: Single-antenna port (port 7/port 8), DCI format 2B or 1A is used
ci_tm9: UE specific RS based Transmission (Rel 10)
ci_tm10: UE specific RS based Transmission (Rel 11)
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS 36.212 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Multiplexing and channel coding
[2] 3GPP TS 36.213 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical layer procedures
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 315
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler
BENEFIT
Extending uplink cell coverage and helpful for applications such as VoIP
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The TTI bundling (or subframe bundling) is intended to improve the uplink
coverage performance of VoLTE service, that improves air-interface performance
in scenarios where coverage is limited by UE transmit power capability.
To provide good quality of VoLTE service, both VoLTE packet error rate and
latency are important factors. In case of UE in cell edge, however, bit error rate
can be increased due to high path loss and limited UE transmission power. High
bit error rate can increase both residual VoLTE packet error rate and latency due to
HARQ retransmissions.
The following figure shows the UL subframe bundling operation which can
improve VoLTE service quality in the cell edge and extend the cell coverage.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 316
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 317
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler
When UL subframe bundling is used, the number of HARQ process is halved from
8 to 4. The timing of HARQ acknowledgement is based on the timing of last TTI
within the bundle, that is, acknowledgement is sent 4 subframes after last TTI in
the bundle. The retransmission delay is 16 subframes (16ms) when using UL
subframe bundling, compared to the retransmisson delay of 8 subframes (8ms)
when UL subframe bundling is not used.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 318
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler
The UL subframe bundling lowers effective transmisson rate and improves the
packet error rate. Latency is also reduced because waiting time for HARQ
ACK/NACK is not required for the first four re-transmissions. Furthermore,
signaling overhead is reduced for ACK/NACK transmissions. On the other hand,
spectral efficiency can be degraded by applying UL subframe bundling feature.
Whether or not to use UL subframe bundling is instructed by RRC message to
each UE. In case of efficient operation of UL subframe bundling, the target UE
selection is important because unnecessary UL subframe bundling assignment can
degrade the spectral efficiency. If UL subframe bundling feature is enabled in eNB,
the eNB checks channel conditions of UEs with on-going QCI 1 VoLTE bearer
and choose some UEs in bad channel condition for UL subframe bundling.
Samsung eNB selects UEs for UL subframe bundling by optimized criterion
considering various channel condition related information, but no configurable
parameter is provided.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
The operator can activate or deactivate UL sub-frame bundling by setting the
parameter TTI_BUNDLING in PLD to True (= 1) or False (= 0) respectively. This
parameter means whether to use sub-frame bundling in the cell or not.
Turn ON TrchInfoFunc::TTI_BUNDLING = 1
Turn Off TrchInfoFunc::TTI_BUNDLING = 0
Key Parameters
RTRV-TRCH-INF/CHG-TRCH-INF
Parameter Description
CELL_NUM Indexing parameter
TTI_BUNDLING This parameter is used to enable to use TTI bundling.
False: TTI bundling is not used.
True: TTI bundling is used.
MAX_HARQTX_BUNDLING The maximum HARQ transmission count is subframe bundling mode.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS 36.213 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical layer procedures
[2] 3GPP TS 36.321 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Medium Access Control (MAC) protocol specification
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 319
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler
BENEFIT
Resource overhead caused by SIBs can be adjusted in consideration of reliable
reception of system information.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The system information consists of Master Information Block (MIB) and System
Information Block (SIB). MIB is the only system information transferred using the
BCH and PBCH. SIBs are transferred using the DL-SCH and PDSCH. SIB1 has
its own RRC message whereas other SIBs except SIB1 are encapsulated within the
more general System Information RRC message. UE start by reading the MIB and
provides sufficient information to read SIB1. SIB1 provides scheduling
information for the remaining SIB. A summary of the information included within
the MIB and each of the SIB is provided in below table.
System Information Content
Master Information Block Downlink channel bandwidth, PHICH configuration, and SFN
System Information Block 1 PLMN Id, tracking area code, cell selection parameters, frequency band, cell
barring, and scheduling information for other SIB
System Information Block 2 Access class barring, RACH, BCCH, PCCH, PRACH, PDSCH, PUSCH,
PUCCH parameters, UE timers and constants, and uplink carrier frequency
System Information Block 3 Cell reselection parameters
System Information Block 4 Intra-frequency neighbouring cell information for cell reselection
System Information Block 5 Inter-frequency neighbouring cell information for cell reselection
System Information Block 6 UMTS neighbouring cell information for cell reselection
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 320
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 321
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler
Normal Case
Normally UE reads system information in RRC Idle mode to acquire the
parameters necessary to access the network. While UE read SIBs to access the
network, UE does not need to acquire SIBs in urgent since SIBs are repeated
periodically. SIB1 is repeated at a rate of 20ms by 3GPP specification, and other
SIBs are repeated according to the periodicity indicated by SIB1 in the range of
{80ms, 160ms, 320ms, 640ms, 1280ms, 2560ms, 5120ms}. In normal case, the
less number of RBs can be used to allocate SIBs to reduce resource overhead and
increase capacity.
Exceptional Case
In certain cases, UE need to acquire SIBs immediately, that is, modification of
System Information, ETWS, and CMAS. The UE in RRC connected should
receive SIBs as fast as possible in case of SI modification since UE needs to
communicate with eNB using new system information. If UE communicates with
eNB using old system information, the communication will fail, and moreover
transmission of UE causes interference to other UEs. In case of ETWS and CMAS,
UE needs to receive quickly to response against disasters.
Samsung eNBs control number of RBs for SIBs using two weight factors,
BCCH_SCALING_FACTOR and BCCH_REDUCE_FACTOR as follows:
Exceptional case: Number of SIB RBs = Default RBs x
BCCH_SCALING_FACTOR/16
Normal case: Number of SIB RBs = Number of SIB RBs for Exceptional
case/BCCH_REDUCE_FACTOR
In the above cases, defaults RBs are fixed number of RBs for SIB determined by
its TBS. If BCCH_REDUCE_FACTOR = 1, number of SIB RBs in Normal case
becomes same as that in Exceptional case.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
This feature is basically enabled and operator cannot disable.
The operator can control number of RBs for SIB by related parameters.
Key Parameter
RTRV-MACCTRLCH-FUNC/CHG-MACCTRLCH-FUNC
Parameter Description
BCCH_SCALING_FACTOR This parameter determines the number of RBs for BCCH in exceptional case,
which is given by :
The number of default RB x BCCH_SCALING_FACTOR/16.
BCCH_REDUCE_FACTOR This parameter determines the number of BCCH RBs in normal case in
conjunction with BCCH_SCALING_FACTOR, which is given by :
The number of default RB x
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 322
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler
Parameter Description
BCCH_SCALING_FACTOR/BCCH_REDUCE_FACTOR/16.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS 36.211 E-UTRA Physical Channels and Modulations
[2] 3GPP TS 36.213 E-UTRA Physical Layer Procedures
[3] 3GPP TS 36.331 E-UTRA Radio Resource Control (RRC) Protocol
Specification
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 323
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler
BENEFIT
The UL peak throughput can be achieved while PDCCH symbols are flexibly
changed.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The PUCCH is used to transfer Uplink Control Information (UCI). Number of
PUCCH resources is sum of number of resources for format 1/1a/1b and that for
format 2.
The PUCCH format 1/1a/1b includes Scheduling Request (SR) and HARQ-ACK.
HARQ-ACK can be seperated as Semi-Persistent Scheduling (SPS) and PDCCH
based scheduling. The locations of each PUCCH resources are shown in below
figure, where CQI is located in edge of system bandwidth. SPS HARQ-ACK and
SR is located inside of CQI, where the number of SPS HARQ-ACK and SR is
determined by higher-layer RRC parameter N(1)PUCCH. The position of HARQ-
ACK by PDCCH based scheduling is nearest to PUSCH region.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 324
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler
In the above figure, the position of HARQ-ACK resource depends on CCE index
and PDSCH subframe index, and can be separated by CFI. This means some
HARQ-ACK resources are not used when the corresponding DL subframe uses
small number of PDCCH symbols. Because positions of PUCCH HARQ-ACK
resources are close to PUSCH region, unused RBs for PUCCH HARQ-ACK can
be used for PUSCH transmission. Hence, UL throughput can be increased by
restricting CFI and reduce HARQ-ACK resources, especially in TDD.
Another way is to change maximum number of PUSCH RBs dynamically based
on CFI as below figure. By flexibly changing number of PUSCH RBs, UL
throughput can be maintained while adapting number of PDCCH symbol.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 325
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
The operator can activate of deactivate this feature by setting the parameter
CFI_PUSCH_ALLOC_ENABLE in PLD.
Turn ON PuschConfIdle::CFI_PUSCH_ALLOC_ENABLE = 1
Turn OFF PuschConfIdle::CFI_PUSCH_ALLOC_ENABLE = 0
Key Parameter
RTRV-PUSCH-IDLE/CHG-PUSCH-IDLE
Parameter Description
CFI_PUSCH_ALLOC_ENAB This parameter is used to enable this feature.
LE 0: This feature is not used.
1: This feature is used.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 326
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS 36.211 E-UTRA Physical Channels and Modulations
[2] 3GPP TS 36.213 E-UTRA Physical Layer Procedures
[3] 3GPP TS 36.331 E-UTRA Radio Resource Control (RRC) Protocol
Specification
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 327
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 6 Radio
Transmission
BENEFIT
The operator can support LTE service with channel bandwidth of 3 MHz.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
3GPP has specified a set of six channel bandwidths, ranging from 1.4 MHz to 20
MHz. These are presented in the following table:
Parameter Channel Bandwidth
1.4 MHz 3 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHz 15 MHz 20 MHz
Number of Resource Blocks 6 15 25 50 75 100
Number of Subcarriers 72 180 300 600 900 1200
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 328
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 6 Radio Transmission
A Resource Block (RB) represents the basic unit of resource for LTE air-
interface. The eNB scheduler allocates RBs to UE when allowing data transfer.
The subcarriers belong to Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access
(OFDMA) technology in downlink, and Single Carrier Frequency Division
Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) technology in uplink.
There are 12 subcarriers per RB so the number of subcarriers equals 12 x number
of RBs.
Each subcarrier occupies 15 kHz so the total subcarrier bandwidth equals 15 kHz
x number of subcarriers.
The downlink subcarrier bandwidth includes an additional 15 kHz to
accommodate a null subcarrier at the center of all other subcarriers. The null
subcarrier provides 15 kHz of empty spectrum within which noting is
transmitted.
The total subcarrier bandwidth is less than the channel bandwidth to allow for the
roll-off of emissions and to provide some guard band.
The larger channel bandwidths provide support for the higher throughputs.
Smaller channel bandwidths provide support for lower throughputs but are
easier to accommodate within existing spectrum allocations.
3GPP also specifies a subcarrier spacing of 7.5 kHz (in addition to the subcarrier
spacing of 15 kHz). The subcarrier spacing of 7.5 kHz is only used in cells
which are dedicated to Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Services (MBMS).
There are 24 rather than 12 carriers per RB when using 7.5 kHz subcarrier
spacing so the total bandwidth of a RB remains the same.
The following figure shows a time-frequency resource structure in 3 MHz channel
bandwidth LTE system:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 329
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 6 Radio Transmission
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Execute the RTRV-CELL-IDLE command to retrieve both DL_BANDWIDTH
and UL_BANDWIDTH used by an operating cell.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 330
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 6 Radio Transmission
Key Parameters
RTRV-CELL-IDLE
Parameter Description
CELL_NUM The cell number. This value must not exceed the maximum number of cells
supported by the system.
PHY_CELL_ID This parameter is the Physical cell ID. It is used to allow the UE to identify
the cell in a radio section, and to recover the cell specific reference signal.
It should be allocated to avoid conflict between neighbor cells.
CELL_TYPE This parameter is the type that is operating the cell:
macroCell: Operates many normal cells.
openCell: Operates a single normal cell.
hybridCell: Operates CSG cells as well as normal cells.
csgCell: Operates only Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) cells.
DUPLEX_TYPE This parameter is the communication method that is used while operating
the cell:
FDD: Frequency Division Duplex.
TDD: Time Division Duplex.
DL_ANT_COUNT This parameter is the number of Tx antennas used by an operating cell.
UL_ANT_COUNT This parameter is the number of Rx antennas used by an operating cell.
EARFCN_DL This parameter is the downlink absolute radio frequency channel number
(ARFCN) used in the evolved universal terrestrial radio access network (E-
UTRAN) system of an operating cell. The center frequency must be
changed to E-UTRA absolute radio frequency channel number (EARFCN).
[Related Specifications] Refer to 3GPP TS 36.101, 5.7.3.
EARFCN_UL This parameter is the Uplink ARFCN used in the E-UTRAN system of an
operating cell. The center frequency must be changed to EARFCN.
[Related Specifications] Refer to 3GPP TS 36.101, 5.7.3.
DL_BANDWIDTH This parameter is the downlink bandwidth used by an operating cell:
1.4MHz: 1.4 MHz bandwidth that uses 6 Physical RBs.
3MHz: 3 MHz bandwidth that uses 15 physical RBs.
5MHz: 5 MHz bandwidth that uses 25 physical RBs.
10MHz: 10 MHz bandwidth that uses 50 physical RBs.
15MHz: 15 MHz bandwidth that uses 75 physical RBs.
20MHz: 20 MHz Bandwidth that uses 100 physical RBs.
UL_BANDWIDTH This parameter is the uplink bandwidth used by an operating cell.
1.4MHz: 1.4 MHz bandwidth that uses 6 Physical RBs.
3MHz: 3 MHz bandwidth that uses 15 physical RBs.
5MHz: 5 MHz bandwidth that uses 25 physical RBs.
10MHz: 10 MHz bandwidth that uses 50 physical RBs.
15MHz: 15 MHz bandwidth that uses 75 physical RBs.
20MHz: 20 MHz Bandwidth that uses 100 physical RBs.
FREQUENCY_BAND_INDICAT This parameter is the frequency band indicator information, which is about
OR where the frequency of an operating cell is located. This information is
broadcasted to the UE through SIB 1.
GROUP_ID This parameter is the Group ID of the carrier where the cell belongs.
FORCED_MODE This parameter indicates whether to change the configuration regardless of
the cell status.
False: Set the value considering the cell status.
True: Set the value without considering the cell status.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 331
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 6 Radio Transmission
Parameter Description
DL_CRS_PORT_COUNT This parameter is the number of downlink CRS ports that are supported by
the system.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS 36.101: Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User
Equipment (UE) radio transmission and reception
[2] 3GPP TS 36.104: Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Base Station (BS) radio transmission and reception
[3] 3GPP TS 36.211: Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical channels and modulation
[4] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 332
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 6 Radio Transmission
BENEFIT
The operator can support FDD-LTE service.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The Frame structure type 1 is applicable to half duplex FDD.
The following figure shows the frame structure type 1:
The smallest one is called a slot, which is of length Tslot = 0.5 ms.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 333
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 6 Radio Transmission
Two consecutive slots are defined as a subframe of length one ms, and 20 slots,
numbered from 0 to 19, constitute a radio frame of 10ms. Channel-dependent
scheduling and link adaptation operate on a subframe level. Therefore, the suframe
duration corresponds to the minimum downlink TTI, which is of one ms duration,
compared to a 2 ms TTI for the HSPA and a minimum 10 ms TTI for the UMTS.
A shorter TTI for fast link adaptation and is able to reduce delay and better exploit
the time varying channel through channel dependent scheduling.
Each slot consists of a number of OFDM symbols including CPs. CP is a kind of
guard interval to combat inter-OFDM-symbol interference, which should be larger
than the channel delay spread. Therefore, the length of CP depends on the
environment where the network operates, and it should not be too large as it brings
a bandwidth and power penalty. With a subcarrier spacing f = 15 kHz, the
OFDM symbol time is 1/f 66.7 us.
The LTE defines two different CP lengths:
Normal CP
Extended CP
A normal CP and an extended CP correspond to seven and six OFDM symbols per
slot, respectively. The extended CP is for multicell multicast/broadcast and very
large cell scenarios with large delay spread at a price of bandwidth efficiency, with
length 16.7 us. The normal CP is suitable for urban environment and high data rate
applications. Note that the normal CP lengths are different for the first and
subsequent OFDM symbols, which is to fill the entire slot of 0.5 ms. For example,
with 10 MHz bandwidth, the sampling time is 1/(15000x1024) s and the number of
CP samples for the extended CP is 256, which provides the required CP length of
256/(15000x1024)1.67 us. In case of 7.5 kHz subcarrier spacing, there is only a
single CP length, corresponding to three OFDM symbols per slot.
The typical parameters for frame structure are as follows:
Parameter Transmission bandwidth [MHz]
1.4 3 5 10 15 20
Occupied bandwidth [MHz] 1.08 2.7 4.5 9.0 13.5 18.0
Guard band [MHz] 0.32 0.3 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
Sampling frequency [MHz] 1.92 3.84 7.68 15.36 23.04 30.72
FFT size 128 256 512 1024 1536 2048
Number of occupied subcarriers 72 180 300 600 900 1200
Number of resource blocks 6 15 25 50 75 100
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
The separate activate procedure is not necessary for this feature.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 334
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 6 Radio Transmission
Key Parameters
There is no related parameter.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS 36.211 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);
Physical channels and modulation
[2] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 335
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
LTE-SV0303, OTDOA
INTRODUCTION
In the Observed Time Difference of Arrival (OTDOA) positioning method, UE
makes an observation of the arrival time difference of Reference Signal (RS) from
two or more eNBs. Then, the position of UE can be calculated based on the known
position of eNBs and the time differences.
The time difference between the RS from the serving cell and the neighbor cells
are called Reference Signal Time Difference (RSTD). To measure the RS from
(probably far away) neighbor cells, a special positioning signal is defined in
Release 9 and called Positioning Reference Signal (PRS). PRS was introduced to
improve the hearability of neighboring cells within completing measurements for
the downlink OTDOA positioning method. 3GPP recognized that the hearability of
the existing cell-specific reference signals was not sufficient to support the
OTDOA positioning method. Therefore, hearability can be challenging as a result
of neighboring cells being co-channel with the serving cell, especially at locations
where the serving cell signal strength is high.
In case of E-SMLC, UE provide RSTD information through the LPP protocol
layer and eNB provides PRS and base station information through the LPPa
protocol layer. Then, E-SMLC makes a final decision on the position of UE. The
MME transparently relays LPP and LPPa layer information to E-SMLC.
BENEFIT
The operator can provide an OTDOA-based location service.
End users can get more accurate location-based services such as maps and
navigations.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 336
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
Limitation
Air interface throughput is impacted due to PRS broadcasting as there is no
PDSCH data in the subframe where PRS located.
In rural areas, there are fewer measureable cells which may impact accuracy.
PRS subframe configuration needs to be manually planned to ensure no
overlapping with PBCH, SIBs, Paging, and Measurement Gap scheduling.
No SON Functionality is available to support automatic PRS configuration, PRS
configurations will have to be manually planned and configured.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The OTDOA positioning method makes use of Reference Signal Time Difference
(RSTD) measurements from UE. The RSTD quantifies the subframe timing
difference between a reference cell and a neighboring cell. The accuracy of the
positioning calculation is improved if UE can provide RSTD measurements from
an increased number of cells. RSTD is measured in units of Ts (1/30720 ms) and is
reported to the Enhanced Serving Mobile Location Center (E-SMLC) where the
location calculation is completed. E-SMLC is a network element within the
operator's infra network.
The UE receives an LTE Positioning Protocol (LPP) Provide Assistance Data
message from E-SMLC. This message is packaged by MME as a NAS message
before being packaged by eNB as an RRC message. The Provide Assistance Data
message includes both the reference and neighboring cells information. The
reference cell does not have to be the current serving cell for UE.
The PRS are able to coexist with both the cell specific reference signals and the
physical layer control information at the start of each subframe (PCFICH, PHICH,
and PDCCH). Also, PRS occupies an increased number of resource elements
within a subframe relative to the cell specific reference signals to help improve
RSTD measurement accuracy. The sequence used to generate the positioning
reference signal is a function of the physical cell identity (PCI) and the cyclic
prefix duration (normal or extended). The PRS are broadcasted using antenna port
6. They are not mapped onto resource elements allocated to the PBCH, Primary
synchronization signal nor secondary synchronization signal. The PRS are only
defined for 15 kHz subcarrier spacing. They are not supported for 7.5 kHz
subcarrier spacing used by Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Services (MBMS).
Below figure shows examples of PRS for normal cyclic prefix. There is a
dependency upon the number of antenna ports used for the cell specific reference
signal. Additional symbols are used by the cell specific reference signal when
broadcast from four antenna ports.
The following figure is Mapping of positioning reference signals (normal cyclic
prefix):
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 337
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 338
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
Number of DL Frames
Number of Antenna Ports
SFN Initialization Time
E-UTRAN Access Point Position
PRS Muting Configuration
To implement RSTD measurement, UE need some assistance date send from E-
SMLC via LTE Positioning Protocol (LPP) interface. The UE receives an LPP
Provide Assistance Data message from the E-SMLC. This message is packaged by
MME as a NAS message before being packaged by eNB as an RRC message. The
Provide Assistance Data message includes information regarding both the
reference and neighboring cells.
The content of the reference cell information is presented in below table. Similar
information is also provided for each of the neighboring cells.
Information Element
physCellId
cellGlobalId
earfcnRef
antennaPortConfig
cpLength
prsInfo prs-Bandwidth
prs-ConfigurationIndex
numDL-Frames
prs-MutingInfo
After receive the OTDOA assistance data, UE shall start RSTD measurement and
report the measurement results to E-SMLC through LPP interface where the
location calculation is completed.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 340
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
In case of activate OTDOA function, the OTDOA_ENABLE parameter value
must be set to '1(True)' (executing the CHG-POS-CONF command).
In case of activate measurement gap exclusion function, the
MEAS_GAP_OFFSET_EXCLUDED parameter value must be set to 'True'
(executing the CHG-POS-CONF command).
In case of activate PRS power boost function, the
PRS_POWER_BOOST_OFFSET parameter value must be set greater than '0'
(executing the CHG-POS-CONF command).
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 341
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
Key Parameters
RTRV-POS-CONF/CHG-POS-CONF
Parameter Description
OTDOA_ENABLE If the otdoaEnable value is set to 1 (ON) to execute OTDOA included in the UE
Positioning function, eNB transmits a PRS signal and UE transmits related
configuration, and so on to eNB. If the otdoaEnable value is set to 0 (OFF),
eNB does not transmit PRS but transmits the information of the cell.
PRS_BANDWIDTH The positioning reference signal (PRS) bandwidth value. If operator enters this
value, eNB forwards the value to the MAC layer.
Transmission bandwidth of PRS. Values from 0 to 5 are mapped with
prsBw6_1.4 MH, prsBw6_1.4 MHz, prsBw15_3 MHz, prsBw25_5 MHz,
prsBw50_10 MHz,
MEAS_GAP_OFFSET_EXC This attribute represents that measurement gap offset exclusion function is
LUDED activated or deactivated.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.455 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); LTE
Positioning Protocol A (LPPa)
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 342
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 343
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
BENEFIT
The voice quality reduction related to RTP loss and delay, which are used as
VoLTE service quality indicators by operator, is enhanced.
The operator can recognize VoLTE related counters.
User experienced VoLTE service is enhanced by reducing packet loss or
preventing silence period during VoLTE session calls.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 344
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
VoLTE-aware UL Grant
The VoLTE service is characterised by small sized periodic packets, for example,
about 60byte packets every 20ms. The UE needs to send buffer status report (BSR)
MAC control element to eNB to obtain uplink grant for sending these small sized
data packets. Since VoLTE traffic is periodic in nature, UE periodically sends
BSR to eNB. There could be scenarios where UE has data available for
transmission but the networks view of UE state is otherwise. Below are two such
cases:
1 The UE transmits BSR along with VoLTE packet and this MAC PDU fails to
receive at eNB even after maximum HARQ re-transmission attempts.
2 The UE transmits a non-zero BSR after transmission of a zero BSR. The BSR
can be received at eNB in reverse order if the zero BSR transmitted encounters
more HARQ re-transmissions.
Both of these scenarios would result in no UL grant allocation for UE and hence
no data transmission for hundreds of milliseconds. This causes silence periods
during VoLTE call.
The VoLTE-aware UL grant function allocates dummy UL grants to UE even if
the uplink buffer status of UE is calculated as zero. UL scheduler allocates uplink
grant based on the recent non-zero BSR of UE, when
32 milliseconds after the point when the internal buffer occupancy of UE is
calculated as zero.
32 milliseconds after receiving zero BSR from UE
This may reduce the overall UL resource, but enhances VoLTE service quality in
poor uplink radio coverage scenarios.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 345
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 346
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 347
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
This feature is basically activated and cannot be deactivated by operator.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 348
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
Key Parameters
There are no related parameters.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 349
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
REFERENCE
N/A
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 350
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
BENEFIT
The operator can provide eMBMS service and increase radio resource utilization.
Wide MBSFN area is provided that minimizes eMBMS interference between
cells.
Continuous eMBMS service is provided even in case when eNB fails and restarts.
Resilient MCE system is provided by 1:1 active and standby redundancy
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 351
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
M2 Interface Management
According to 3GPP TS36.443 V11.3.0, MCE and eNB setup M2 connection and
support following procedures.
M2 SETUP procedures to make M2 connection
M2 RESET procedures
ENB CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedures to update application level eNB
configuration data
MCE CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedures to update application level MCE
configuration data
ERROR INDICATION procedures
M3 Interface Management
According to 3GPP TS36.444 V11.6.0, MCE and MME setup M3 connection and
support following procedures.
M3 SETUP procedures to make M3 connection
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 352
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
M3 RESET procedures
MCE CONFIUGRATION UPDATE procedures to update application level MCE
configuration data
MCE can make multiple M3 connections with different MMEs.
MCE Redundancy
Samsung MCE provides active and standby redundancy. When an active server
fails, the standby server takes over the role without any service impact. Following
figure shows an example configuration of MCE. Maximum 5 active and standby
pairs are equipped in a single chassis (HS23). Active and standby servers share the
same IP interface so that the active and standby architecture is transparent to eNB
or MME. Active server periodically backups data to standby server. When active
server fails (SW or HW fails or board reset), the standby server will take over the
role in a few seconds. After switchover, MCE makes SCTP setup with all of the
eNBs, and MCE also makes SCTP setup with MME. However, these switchover
procedures have no impact on ongoing eMBMS data sessions.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 353
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
In case of MBMS Service Area that needs to be synchronized over multiple MCEs,
operator shall configure following system parameters the same over the MCEs.
MBMS Service Area ID
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 354
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
RFAP
RFAP Offset
MSP
MCS Level(Signalling and Data)
The number eMBMS sufbrames per radio frame
Configuration of MBSFN Areas that corresponds to the MBMS Service Area.
Refer to Information included in MBMS Scheduling Information(3GPP
TS36.443 V10.1.0 9.1.7)
Information included in MCCH related BCCH Configuration Item (3GPP
TS36.443 V10.1.0 9.2.1.13), excluding MBSFN Area ID and Cell Information
List.
In addition, following requirements must be met.
The MCEs shall be connected to the same BMSC.
The same MBMS Service Area must be configured over the same frequency, the
same PLMN
All eNBs in the same MBMS Service must be SFN synchronized.
The MBSFN Areas that serve the MBMS Service Area must not support other
MBMS Service Areas that cover local regions.
Following is overall procedures to apply the coordinated scheduling information to
MCEs and eNBs.
1 LSM shall provide coordinated scheduling information to the concerned MCEs
2 Upon receiving the M2 setup request from eNB, the MCE shall provide MCCH
configuration information for the cluster MBSFN area
3 Upon receiving the M2 setup response from MCE, eNB shall schedule MCCH
by given configurations
4 Upon receiving the M3 session start message for the specific MBMS service
area from MME, MCE shall schedule PMCH/MCH by the coordinated
scheduling information
5 Upon receiving the M2 MBMS SCHEDULING INFORMATION message for
the specific MBSFN area, eNB MAC shall schedule PMCH/MCH by the
given information
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
The relevant MCE PLD is set as follows:
CHG-MBMSENB-CONF: eNB-MCC/MNC, eNB IP address, and so on, eMBMS
status The indexes increases to 3000
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 355
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
CHG-MBSFN-MAPPINGINFO: Set the MBSFN area. (To set the MBSFN area,
set the MBMS Service Area Id and the MBMS Synchronisation Area Id.)
Key Parameters
CHG-MBMSENB-CONF/RTRV- MBMSENB-CONF
Parameter Description
ENB_INDEX Index of eNB. The value entered when registering the MBMS eNB is used.
STATUS The validity of the MBMS eNB information.
ENB_MNC[4] The PLMN information (MCC) that represents the MBMS eNB. It is a three-digit
number with each digit being from 0 to 9.
ENB_MNC[4] The PLMN information (MNC) that represents the MBMS eNB. It is a three-digit
or two-digit number with each digit being from 0 to 9.
ENB_IP_V4 Enter the IP address of the MBMS eNB in the IP version 4 format.
ENB_IP_V6[16] Enter the IP address of the MBMS eNB in the IP version 6 format.
SECONDARY_ENB_IP_V4 Enter the secondary IP address of the MBMS eNB in the IP version 4 format.
SECONDARY_ENB_IP_V6[ Enter the secondary IP address of the MBMS eNB in the IP version 6 format.
16]
CHG-MBSFN-MAPPINGINFO/RTRV-MBSFN-MAPPINGINFO
Parameter Description
MBSFN_AREA_ID Index for change and retrieve MBSFN area id.
STATUS Status of MBSFN Mapping Info
MBSFN_SYNC_AREA_ID MBSFN SYNC AREA ID
MBMS_SERVICE_AREA_ID MBSFN Service AREA ID
..[ ]
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 356
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
REFERENCE
N/A
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 357
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
BENEFIT
This feature facilitates efficient radio resource allocation with the statistical
multiplexing of the logical channels into a given physical subframe.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
eMBMS Channels
The channels used in LTE eMBMS are largely classified into a logical channel, a
transport channel, and a physical channel and they are mapped with each channel
as shown below:
Logical channel: MCCH, MTCH
Transport channel: MCH
Physical channel: PMCH
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 358
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 359
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
The MCE performs resource allocation based on the existing MBSFN area, PMCH,
MTCH, and more after receiving the MBMS session start request message from
the BMSC. If the resource allocated for eMBMS is not sufficient, MCE transmits
MBMS session start failure message to MME.
In Step 0, MCE selects on which MBSFN area a new channel will be added based
on the service ID included to MBMS session start request message. Depending on
the service, channels may be added to multiple MBSFN areas.
Step 1 is calculating the number of all physical radio frames available in CSAP in
the MBSFN areas decided in Step 0
Calculates the data rate encoded to the signaling MCS required for PMCH
Calculates the number of all subframes to be encoded only with the data MCS
excluding the data volume encoded to MCS
Calculates the estimated radio resource volume required by a new channel by
referring to RLC header and MCS level applied to QCI in addition to GBR
required by the new channel.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 360
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
This feature is enabled when eNB and MCE support eMBMS service.
Resource is allocated according to the PLD of REL_MBMS_SCHEDULING_INFO.
Some parameters can be changed by executing the CHG-MBMSSCH-INF
command.
However, it is desirable to change such PLD values after fully being aware of the
role of each parameter.
For example, CSAP, RFAP, and offset are connected with one another and if the
overlapped MBSFN area is allowed, it will follow the eMBMS Radio Resource
Algorithm.
Therefore, PLD provides only the function of reading set values - according to the
algorithm - instead of settable values.
Only for the session whose QCI has the same value, multiplexing MTCH to
PMCH is possible.
Also, refer to the feature eMBMS QoS for data MCS mapping depending on QCI.
Multiple MBSFN functions as functions of supporting up to 8 MBSFN areas in a
cell may configure PLDEnbMbsfnAreaInfo per MBSFN area of a cell.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 361
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
Key Parameters
The following parameters are related to eMBMS resource allocation:
Parameters Description
MBSFN_AREA_ID mbsfnAreaId for change and retrieve
STATUS Status of MBMS Scheduling Info
SUBFRAME_ALLOC_TYPE Subframe Allocation Type
MAX_SUBFRAME_NUM Max Subframe Number
MCH_SCHEDULING_PERIOD MCH Scheduling Period
CSAP Common Subframe Allocation Period
RFAP Radio Frame Allocation Period
OFFSET Radio Frame Allocation Offset
REFERENCE
N/A
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 362
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
BENEFIT
In live broadcasting service, the time gap between the video played in device and
the live scene in the stadium is eliminated and the UE can watch the
synchronized video in the stadium.
In voice service such as Push-To-Talk, the voice messages can be delivered
without unnecessary delay at eNB.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 363
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
There can be eMBMS interference in border area when two or more MCEs setup
ADR session for the same eMBMS session, even though they coordinate
resource allocation through LSM, such as RFAP.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Basic Concept
When MBMS session is started, BMSC transmits MBMS data unit periodically
according to specified synchronization sequence. If the data to be transmitted does
not exist, since void packet, without user data, along with timestamp are
transmitted, eNB could receive timestamp increasing packet successively. eNB
transmits packet at the calculated time according to timestamp + offset base. If the
packet is empty, data will not be transmitted for the corresponding time period.
Therefore, from the moment of first timestamp binding to corresponding SFN, all
the packets in the session will have same delay until the end of the session.
During packet transmission in the session, to prevent delay, eNB will discard
buffered packets and will transmit recently arrived packet. This is similar to
eliminating front of movie film, to make earlier showing time. All eNB must be
synchronized between transmitting data, so MCE makes decision of the moment of
packet discard, the moment of packet transmission starting and send notice to all
broadcasting target eNBs.
Adaptive Delay Reduction function is performed through gap control between
SFN (eNB transmits according to SFN) and timestamp, which is specified in the
MBMS data packet. For example, as seen in the figure below, if the offset value is
512, then arrived packet (with timestamp value = 6) near SFN=512 will be
transmitted on SFN=518. Then 60 ms packet delay happens. If the offset value is
changed to 508, the packet (with timestamp=6) will be transmitted on SFN=514.
As a result, delays can be reduced by 40 ms.
Call procedure between eNB, MCE, BMSC are as follows: Steps 4)~5) is executed
for the MBMS session configured as
Minimum_Time_To_MBMS_Data_Tansfer=0.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 364
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
BMSC Functionality
BMSC transmits MBMS data after SESSION START message transmission to
MCE after the time specified on Minimum_Time_to_MBMS_Data_Transfer.
During Minimum_Time_to_MBMS_Data_Transfer time, all eNBs belonging to
MBMS Service Area perform session configuration, radio resource configuration,
multicast joining to prepare MBMS data transmission.
For Adaptive Delay Reduction feature, BMSC needs to provide following
functions.
When transmitting SESSION START message, BMSC sets up
Time_to_MBMS_Data_Transfer = 0 for the live streaming session in order
to minimize the delay. Then, after sending SESSION START, BMSC
transmits MBMS data packet or empty packet (Type 0).
Synchronization Sequence Length of session, subject to delay reduction, must be
less than 1.5 second. If Synchronization Sequence Length is greater than 1.5
second, the value of Minimum_Time_to_MBMS_Data_Transfer must not
set as zero. If this session is assigned as the session subject to delay
reduction, even though initially transmitted MBMS packet will be lost, time is
not shifted.
MBMS data sent during initial session will be lost when time is shifted. This loss
will occur for approximately 5 seconds, until MCE completes the delay reduction
procedure following the start message transmission. The packets received by eNB
after that will not be lost due to time shift function. However, packets arriving late
by backhaul network delay will be discarded according to normal eMBMS
operation.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 365
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
MCE Functionality
MCE performs Adaptive Delay Reduction function for the session configured as
Time_to_MBMS_Data_Transfer = 0. After receiving SESSION START
REQUEST message from MME, the procedures of SESSION START REQUEST
and SCHEDULING INFORMATION message transmission to the target eNB will
be performed the same way as for normal eMBMS session.
For the Adaptive Delay Reduction enabled session, the eNB will be notified that
the corresponding session is delay reduction session through SESSION START
message. Afterwards, based on received DELAY TIME INFORMATION
(SessionID, Offset, and Synchronization Sequence Length) from each eNB, MCE
detects eNB which was most delayed receiving MBMS data, and time shift value
is determined according to the late eNB. MCE transmits the final offset value to all
eNBs to make time shift.
Time shift is applied the same way even when eNB is restarted.
eNB Functionality
For the delay reduction function enabled session, the eNB will discard MBMS data
upon receiving SESSION START REQUEST message until receiving TIME
SHIFT REQUEST. The synchronization sequence length can be acquired through
synchronization sequence learning for the corresponding session. eNB transmits
the value of synchronization sequence length, the value of SFN (Offset) when
zero timestamp received and Session ID (MCE-MBMS-M2AP-ID) to MCE
through the DELAY TIME INFORMATION message.
When eNB receives TIME SHIFT REQUEST message, eNB modifies timestamp
of each packets to make radio transmission time shift.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Execute the command CHG-MBMSDELAY-INF to configure
'ADAPTIVE_DELAY_REDUCTION_USE' as to 'On' or 'Off'.
Execute the command RTRV-MBMSDELAY-INF to retrieve the existing
configuration settings.
Key Parameters
There are no prerequisite parameters except activating/deactivating parameters for
this feature.
CHG-ENBPDCP-INF/RTRV-ENBPDCP-INF
Parameter Description
DB_INDEX index of this tuple
ADAPTIVE_DELAY_REDUC This parameter represents On/Off of the Adaptive Delay Reduction functionality.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 366
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
Parameter Description
TION_USE
REFERENCE
N/A
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 367
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
BENEFIT
The operator can monitor eMBMS session and check the status and quality of
eMBMS service.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 368
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 369
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 370
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 371
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
The operator can check MBSFN area list that supports each MBMS service area
and they can retrieve the following information of each MBSFN area.
Input: MCE, MBSFN Area ID
Output: Refer to the following table
The following information is provided per MBSFN area.
Number Items Level Description Collection
Entity
1 Total Number of Per MBSFN The total number of eNBs registered to MCE
eMBMS eNBs Area MCE through M2 Setup among the eNBs
included in MBSFN area of the specified
MCE.
2 Total Number of Per MBSFN The total number of cells that were set to MCE
eMBMS Cells Aera provide eMBMS service to eNB through
M2 Setup Response among the eNBs
included in MBSFN area of the specified
MCE.
3 Total Number of Per MBSFN The total number of cells that were MCE
Reserved Cells Area notified as reserved cells to eNB through
M2 Setup Response among the eNBs
included in MBSFN area of the specified
MCE.
4 Subframe Per MBSFN Subframes that were set for eMBMS in MCE
Allocation Area MBSFN area of the specified MCE (SIB2
information).
5 RFAP Per MBSFN Radio Frame Allocation Pattern that was MCE
Area set for eMBMS in MBSFN area of the
specified MCE.
6 Number of PMCHs Per MBSFN The total number of the PMCHs that is MCE
Area providing service in MBSFN area (Up to
15).
7 PMCH Resources Per PMCH, Resources assigned to the PMCH among MCE
Per MBSFN the eMBMS Subframe resources
Area assigned to MBSFN area
8 Number of MTCHs Per PMCH, The total number of MTCHs provided in MCE
Per MBSFN MBSFN area per PMCH.
Area
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Execute the RTRV-SSL-CTRL command to retrieve the existing configuration
settings for Session Summary Log (SSL).
Execute the CHG-SSL-CTRL command to configure the settings for Session
Summary Log (SSL).
Execute the RTRV-MCERSC-STS command to retrieve the resource status of
Multi-cell/multicast Coordination Entity (MCE).
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 372
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
Key Parameters
CHG-SSL-CTRL/RTRV-SSL-CTRL
Parameter Description
DB_INDEX Index of this relation
MBMS_SSL_CREATE_CONDITION Deciding value how to apply Session Summary Log(SSL)
RTRV-MCERSC-STS
Parameter Description
MBSFN_AREA_ID Index of Multimedia Broadcast Single Frequency Network or Multicast
Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) area.
TOT_ENBS Total number of eNBs that have connected with MCE through M2 interface.
TOT_CELLS Total number of eMBMS service cells that have connected with MCE through
M2 interface except reserved cell.
TOT_REV_CELLS Total number of reserved cells that have still connected with MCE through M2
interface in MBSFN area.
RFAP Radio frame allocation period for MBSFN area.
SUBFRAME_ALLOC[12] MBSFN subframe configuration (subframe allocation: one frame item) in SIB2.
NUM_PMCH Total number of Physical Multicast Channels (PMCHs) allocated for eMBMS.
SF_ALLOC_END Ratio of the subframe resources allocated by MBSFN area and used actually in
PMCH.
N_MTCH_P0 Total number of MTCHs per 0-th PMCH provided by MBSFN area.
N_MTCH_P14 Total number of MTCHs per 14-th PMCH provided by MBSFN area.
REFERENCE
N/A
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 373
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
BENEFIT
This feature enables MBMS service to continue even in case of MME failure, or
MCE failure, or M3 path failure.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 374
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 375
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
The MBMS Session Start Request message with 'Re-establishment indication' flag
may differ from the existing one. In this case, MCE shall send MBMS Session
Update message to all eNBs of the corresponding MBMS Service Area.
MCE Restoration
When MCE restarts or it detects a failure in M3 link, it will make M3 setup and
sends M3 Reset message to MME. Then, MME will send MBMS Session Start
message to MCE.
In case of M3 link failure, MCE will release all eMBMS sessions that it has
managed.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
This feature is basically enabled and operator cannot disable.
Dependency with other feature, limitation and prerequisite: RTRV-MCECONN-
PARA/CHG-MCECONN-PARA :: MME_FAILOVER_TIMER.
Key Parameters
There are no related parameters.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 376
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
Node restoration-related parts cannot be checked but operator can observe that the
MBMS_SESSION_SETUP statistics of the other MME index are increasing.
MBMS_SESSION_SETUP: SessionStartAtt, SessionStartSucc, and so on.
Family Name Counter Name Description
MBMS_SESSION_SETUP SessionStartAtt Count of M3 Session Start attempts
transmitted by MME
SessionStartSucc Count of M3 Session Start successes
transmitted by MCE
SessionStartFail_CP_CAPA_CAC_F M3 Session Start failure count. A
AIL failure is due to the CAC by MCE.
SessionStartFail_M3AP_CU_FAIL M3 Session Start failure count. A
failure is due to the specified cause in
specification TS36.444.
SessionStartFail_M3AP_LINK_FAIL M3 Session Start failure count. A
failure is due to SCTP link failure.
SessionStopAtt Count of M3 MBMS Session Stop
received by the MCE.
SessionStopSucc Count of M3 MBMS Session Stop
successes transmitted by MCE.
SessionStopFail_CP_CC_FAIL Count of Failure of 'M3 MBMS Session
Stop' This failure is due to reception of
RESET during 'Session Strop'
procedure or block restart and so on.
SessionStopFail_M3AP_LINK_FAIL Count of Failure of 'M3 MBMS Session
Stop' This failure is due to SCTP link
failure.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS23.007
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 377
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
The backhaul data rate is high whereas the air interface throughput is very low
(that is, air interface throughput is low due to bad RF conditions and high BLER
rate) of the users. In such a scenario, packets are not getting scheduled at the rate
they are arriving. As a consequence of delayed scheduling, the effects are seen as
high TCP RTT latencies and higher than normal Packet Delay statistics. This
would cause high congestion at eNBs and result in in situations like the TCP
sender doing a retransmission (due to timeout) of a packet which was not even
transmitted on air.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 378
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
By discarding downlink packets at eNB whose discard timer has expired there are
two advantages.
1 By dropping all the packets which are, in a sense, expired downlink packets for
that QCI. Also by discarding older data packets at eNB, operator can control
what to drop rather than blindly dropping all incoming packets in case of a full
buffer.
2 By dropping aged downlink packets at eNB for non GBR bearers, there is a
possibility of detecting congestion earlier than dropping incoming new packets.
By detecting congestion the TCP senders adapt their sending rate, thereby
controlling congestion.
BENEFIT
The operator can prevent long queuing delay at eNB.
Users can experience improved end-user performance in terms of reduced TCP
round-trip time in congestion situation.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The TCP optimization is implemented for Acknowledged Mode Data (AMD) PDU
in PDCP/RLC layer of eNB. The eNB monitors age of the queued up packets.
When age of a packet exceeds the discard timer value, then such a packet is
discarded.
If the value of discard timer value is Infinity for QCI, packet discard operation
does not occur for that QCI.
If the discard timer value is set to a non-Infinity value, packets that are older than
discard timer will be discarded. The unit of the discard timer is in milliseconds.
Effect on TCP Congestion Control due to DISCARD TIMER timeout:
After the downlink packets are discarded at eNB, at the affected TCP sender (s),
the congestion window will be reduced.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 379
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
The TCP application can detect packet loss and adapt its data rate to the available
rate.
If a packet is discarded at eNB, it becomes a signal of light congestion for the
TCP sender
If there are many packet discarded at the eNB, it is a signal of serious congestion.
The congestion window is reduced when a missing packet(s) is detected, thereby
adapting the available rate by reducing the congestion window size.
In case of more information on Congestion Control at TCP, refer to TCP
Congestion Control RFC 2581 and RFC 5681
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Execute the CHG-PDCP-INF command to configure discard timer.
Execute the RTRV-PDCP-INF command to retrieve the existing configuration
settings.
Key Parameters
The existing CHG-PDCP-INF command will be used
Parameter Description
DISCARD_TIMER The parameter is a queue management parameter which indicates the maximum age
a packet can be held in the RLC queues at per QCI level.
Packets older than DISCARD_TIMER will be discarded at the RLC
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 380
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 7 Services
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS 36.323 'Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) specification'
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 381
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 8 RAN Sharing
BENEFIT
Multiple operators can share eNB in MORAN architecture.
Operator can reduce CAPEX and OPEX by sharing site, eNB and backhaul
network with partners.
Host operator can figure out how much data is consumed by each partner
operator.
The data usage can be utilized for the purpose of settlement among partner
operators.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 382
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 8 RAN Sharing
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The eNB provides the following functions for this feature:
Broadcast multiple PLMN IDs, up to six, in SIB.
Routing of signaling for call control based on the selected PLMN ID by UE.
Inter-PLMN handover support in shared network.
Radio resource sharing in shared cell.
In a shared cell, the eNB broadcasts the supporting PLMN ID list, up to six,
through SIB1. The first PLMN ID broadcasted to SIB 1 must be set to the same as
the PLMN ID of the global eNB ID. The first listed PLMN must be the same as
the primary PLMN of eNB. The supporting PLMN ID list per cell is configured by
the system parameter. The UE reads the PLMN IDs, and selects one based on its
selection process.
When the UE is expected to make RRC connection with eNB, the selected PLMN
ID is included in the RRC Connection Setup Complete message. The eNB uses
this PLMN ID to select the core network, and to transfer the Initial UE message.
Figure below depicts the signaling procedures of eNB.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 383
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 8 RAN Sharing
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 384
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 8 RAN Sharing
Definitions used to describe the relation between PLMN ID and the dedicated
carrier owner.
Owner PLMN: The operators PLMN ID that is the eNB owner or manager of the
eNB.
Sharing PLNM: The operators PLMN ID that shares eNB with a dedicated
carrier with eNB owner operator.
The rules for PLMN broadcasting in the dedicated carrier cells are as follows:
In the dedicated carrier cells of eNB owner or manager:
oOnly PLMN ID of owner PLMN is broadcasted in SIB1 as the primary
PLMN.
In the dedicated carrier cells that shares eNB with owner operator:
oTwo PLMN IDs shall be broadcasted in SIB1 (owner PLMN + sharing
PLMN). Owner PLMN ID shall be the primary PLMN and sharing PLMN
ID shall be the secondary PLMN.
oOwner PLMN, that is primary PLMN in SIB1, shall set to 'reserved for
operator' to prevent provide services to owner PLMNs subscribers in
sharing PLMN operators dedicated carrier.
The reason for including PLMN ID of owner PLMN in sharing PLMN carrier is to
enable SON related operation, for example ANR, and packets forwarding issue in
the shared eNB.
This feature supports up to 6 operators dedicated carriers MOCN sharing operation.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 385
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 8 RAN Sharing
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 386
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 8 RAN Sharing
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
To add additional PLMN ID broadcasted to the specific cell, do the following:
1 Execute RTRV/CHG-ENBPLMN-INFO to configure additional PLMN ID
(=MCC + MNC) to the unused PLMN_IDX.
2 Execute RTRV/CHG-CELLPLMN-INFO to set PLMN_USAGE of the newly
specified PLMN ID with the specific cell and the corresponding PLMN_IDX.
Key Parameters
RTRV-ENBPLMN-INFO/CHG-ENBPLMN-INFO
Parameter Description
PLMN_IDX The plmn index to be changed or retrieved. PLMN ID coreresponding to the
selected plmnIdx is mapped to the PLMN ID which is retrieved or changed by
command RTRV/CHG-ENBPLMN-INFO with the same plmnIdx number.
MCC[4] Mobile Country Code (MCC) that comprises Public Land Mobile Network
(PLMN).
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 387
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 8 RAN Sharing
Parameter Description
MNC[4] Mobile Network Code (MNC) that comprises Public Land Mobile Network
(PLMN).
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 388
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 8 RAN Sharing
If the operator does not use RAN sharing feature, some family of the statistics listed
above can be removed.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio
Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification
[3] 3GPP TS23.251 Network Sharing; Architecture and functional description
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 389
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 390
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 391
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
BENEFIT
The operator can reduce CAPEX and OPEX costs for configuring and managing
the NRT of LTE cells.
The system performance indicators such as HO success rate and call drop rate are
optimized by configuring NRT optimized for coverage and air status of each
LTE cell. This guarantees reliable mobility of UEs in the RRC_IDLE mode
and the RRC_CONNECTED mode.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Architecture
Samsung ANR function operates in eNB and LSM. The overall architecture is
shown in the following figure:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 392
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
As shown in figure above, Samsung ANR function is executed at eNB SON Agent
and at the LSM SON Manager. The operation of each entity in this architecture is
described below.
1 LSM
SON Manager: NRT Management Function
aCreates initial NRT
bPerforms LSM-based NR addition
cEstablishes bi-directional NR relationship based on LSM
2 eNB
SON Agent: NR Detection Function
aReceives the measurement report message for HO from the call processor
bReceives the measurement report message for periodic ANR from the call
processor
cAcquires ECGI and X2 TNL address from the Call Processor
SON Agent: NR Add Function
aAdds a neighbor cell by using the ECGI information
bAdds a neighbor eNB by using the X2 TNL address information.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 393
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 394
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 395
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
DRX_INACTIVITY_TIMER_ REPORT_CGI:
ci_drx_InactivityTimer_psf10
DRX_RETRANSMISSION_TIMER_ REPORT_CGI:
ci_drx_RetransmissionTimer_sf16
LONG_DRXCYCLE_START_OFFSET_TYPE_REPORT_CGI:
ci_sf2560_chosen
iiiTo handle the exception case of DRX operation, SON Agent runs the
EUTRA_REPORT_CGI_MR_TO_WAIT timer. If UE cannot acquire
the ECGI/CGI within the time, SON Agent terminates the DRX
operation to return the normal state of service.
dThe UE reads ECGI of new cell corresponding to the Unknown PCI in the
DRX period.
eThe UE transmits measurement report message including the acquired ECGI
to the serving cell.
fThe serving eNB checks whether PLMN ID in MR message is registered in
SonAnrPlmnBlackListInfo PLD.
iIn case that the PLMN ID is registered in SonAnrPlmnBlackListInfo PLD
and its usedFlag = use,
If EUTRA_BLOCK_FLAG = True, serving eNB terminates ANR
operation.
If EUTRA_BLOCK_FLAG = False, serving eNB performs step g.
iiIn case that the PLMN ID is not registered in SonAnrPlmnBlackListInfo
PLD or the PLMN ID is registered and its usedFlag = no_use,
Serving eNB performs step g
gThe serving eNB acquires IP address (X2 TNL address) of the new eNB from
MME.
hThe serving cell adds the new cell to its NRT.
iThe serving eNB reports to LSM that the new cell added to its NRT.
jThe LSM adds the serving cell to the new cell's NRT (Bi-directional NR
adding).
kThe serving eNB and new eNB determine whether to establish X2 connection
as follows (This function can be used if operator purchases the license key
of LTE-SW5012).
iIf the configuration of the X2 interface for the PLMN of the new eNB is
allowed, serving eNB sends X2 Setup Request to the new eNB.
iiIf the configuration of the X2 interface for the PLMN of the new eNB is
not allowed, set NoX2 = True for the neighbor eNB
X2 interface configuring command by PLMN: CHG-PLMNANR-ENB
ANR_TARGET_MCC: MCC of Neighbor eNB
ANR_TARGET_MNC: MNC of Neighbor eNB
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 396
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 397
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
dThe LSM finds the nearest cell which corresponds to the serving eNB and
unknown PCI, and adds new cell to the serving cells NRT without
consideration of the new cell's PLMN.
eThe LSM adds the serving cell to the new cells NRT (bi-directional NR
adding).
fThe serving eNB and new eNB set the X2 connection.
iIf configuration of the X2 interface for PLMN of the new eNB is not
allowed, set NoX2 = True for the neighbor eNB.
The following figure illustrates the LSM-based NR addition procedure:
Finds and Adds New Neighbor Cells Based on the ANR specific-event and
Renewal of NR Info.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 398
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
If a large volume of new cells are deployed to the network rapidly, neighbor cells
should be included in the NRT. As a result, reliable UE mobility can be supported.
In this scenario, Samsung ANR performs the additional NR adding function that
periodically finds and adds new neighbor cells. With this function, the optimum
NRT achievement rate is improved and reliable network operation is available.
The cycle of the function is set by date/hour/minute/performing duration and
through this cyclical operation and activation/deactivation flag, the operator can
control overheads which occur at eNB and UE.
The LTE cell decides which UEs will perform the function among the ones who
initially attach or enter the cell due to a handover according to the UE search rate
set by each cell (ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_TOTAL). Then, LTE cell decides
which selected UE measures among the LTE intra-frequency
(ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_INTRA_FREQ), the LTE inter-frequency
(ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_INTER_FREQ), and the UTRAN carriers
(ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_UTRAN). For example, if LTE network has two
carriers and UTRAN network has a few carriers, assume that UE search rates are
configured as ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_TOTAL = 5%,
ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_INTRA_FREQ = 40%,
ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_INTER_FREQ = 40%, and
ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_UTRAN = 20%. Then, 2% of UEs for the LTE intra-
frequency, 2% of UEs for the LTE inter-frequency, and 1% of UEs for the
UTRAN carriers will perform measurement for this function.
Samsung periodic ANR operation procedure uses the following steps:
1 To start the function, LTE cell selects the target UE among the ones which
initially attach or perform handover and the target carrier, and then sends the
RRC Connection Reconfiguration message to the target UE including the
ANR measurement configuration with target carrier to the target UE.
aThe function checks whether UE supports intra/inter-frequency ANR
operation based on the FeatureGroupIndicators IE included in the UE-
EUTRA-Capability IE
iIntra-frequency ANR support: 17th bit = 1
iiInter-frequency ANR support: 18th bit = 1 & 25th bit = 1
bTarget UE selection
iGenerates three random number (N1,N2,N3) ranging from 0 to 1
iiIf N1 < ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_TOTAL, LTE cell selects UE
cTarget carrier selection
iAccording to UE Capability, the method to select the target carrier for
ANR is as follows:
If UE supports LTE intra/inter-frequency ANR and the UTRAN ANR
operation, sets the intervals for LTE intra-frequency
(ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_INTRA_FREQ: y1), the LTE inter-
frequency (ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_INTER_FREQ:y2), and
the UTRAN carriers (ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_UTRAN:y3).
In this case, the intervals are separated into 3 parts:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 399
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 400
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
aIf the ANR measurement for the carrier of a new cell is not allowed, the
neighbor cell is not added (The detail on the unknown PCI detection is not
reported to LSM)
bPlease refer to the c~j of Section Finds and Adds New Neighbor Cells during
HO Execution due to UE Mobility for the detail operation of the next
procedure.
4 The serving cell runs NR information update procedure based on Validity Check
Flag, if PCI of best neighbor cell existed in NRT is reported.
aIf the value of Validity Check Flag is True, nothing occurs.
bIf the value of Validity Check Flag is False, serving cell sends
RRCConnectionReconfiguration to UE for ECGI/CGI acquisition. Then,
the serving cell updates NRT, if it is necessary.
The UE-based NR addition following the periodic NR adding function is shown
below:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 401
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
1) NR Ranking Calculation
The NR ranking reflects the validity or importance of NR included in the NRT.
Samsung eNB defines the NR rankings attribute as having the higher ranking
when more MR messages are received as the HO for the NR is triggered.
The NR ranking is performed as follows:
1 The NR ranking calculation is performed at a specified interval.
2 The NR related to ranking calculation must be included in NRT at least beyond
the ranking calculation interval.
3 The ranking value used between the ranking calculation intervals uses the
ranking value calculated in the previous interval.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 402
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 403
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
At k+2 (next ranking calculation time after k+1), the rank value of NR j
is calculated as the same way as NR i which is explained above.
2) NRT Size Management
The maxNRTSize presents maximum number of NRs that can be included in the
Intra-LTE NRT. NRT size management is performed as follows:
1 maxNRTSize: Unless a service provider requests for a separate value, default
value is set as 256.
2 Intra-LTE NRT is managed so that no more NRs than the maxNRTSize could be
included.
When the attempt of adding a new NR occurs, in the situation where the existing
number of NRs is as many as maxNRTSize in Intra-LTE NRT, the following
operations are performed depending on the ANR setting mode.
1 ANR setting mode = sonAutoApply or sonManualApply
oReason for new NR addition attempt
aNR addition by UE-based ANR function
bNR addition by LSM-based ANR function
cNR addition by LSM-based bi-directional addition function
dManual addition by the operator
oOperation procedure
aIn case of carriers which NRs as HO attribute (T) are larger than
minNRTSizeCarrier (i)
iParameter for setting the minimal number of effective neighbors by
carrier: minNRTSizeCarrier (Command: CHG-EUTRA-FA)
If the maxNRTSize change attempting value is larger than the value
adding the sum of minNRTSizeCarrier (i) for all carriers and the
number of NR belonging to the HO blacklist, it changes.
maxNRTSize: Maximum size for a NRT (Command: CHG-SON-
ANR)
bAmong NRs as CurrentRank -1 & HO attribute (T) set as carriers for Intra-
LTE NRT,
The NR whose CurrentRank = -1 is excluded from the list of removal since
it existed less than the NR ranking interval in NRT.
cThe lowest ranking NR with the remove attribute (T) is deleted and a new NR
is added.
2 ANR setting mode = sonFuncOff
oReason for new NR addition attempt
aNR addition by LSM-based bi-directional addition function
bManual addition by the operator
oOperation procedure
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 404
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
3) Unnecessary NR Removal
When the network is stabilized through the network optimization, this function
removes NRs which cannot receive MR messages among the NRs included when
the network was initially created, so that only valid NRs could be included in the
NRT. The operator can control this functions ON/OFF state, and at the NR
ranking calculation point k, the serving cell removes the NR i which meets the
following conditions.
aANR operation mode = sonAutoApply or sonManualApply &
bnrDelFlag = True &
nrDelFlag: ON/OFF control flag that determines the operational status.
cCumulatedMRi (k) thNumMrNrDel &
CumulatedMRi(k): The number of MR messages received for NR i
during thTimeNrDel period at the NR ranking calculation point k.
thNumMrNrDel: The threshold value to decide unnecessary NR.
disRemoveAllowed = True for NR i
The following figure shows the statistics based NR removal function used to delete
unnecessary NRs:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 405
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
In the previous figure, UE moves toward the neighbor cell (ECGI = 1002) and
transmits the measurement report message including PCI = 20 by HO triggering to
the serving cell (ECGI = 1000). The serving cell completes HO preparation using
the NR (ECGI = 1001) included in the NRT, and then transmits the HO command
message received from the NR. However, UE is moved to the new cell (ECGI =
1002), thus HO execution fails. As shown the figure above, Samsung ANR
removes the HO performance degradation causing NR from the NRT or manages
it as HO blacklist.
The operator can control this functions ON/OFF state, and at the NR ranking
calculation point k, the serving cell removes the NR i from the NRT or manages it
as HO blacklist which meets the following conditions.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 406
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 407
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Causes Meaning
Cell not available The concerned cell is not available.
6) HO blacklist management
1 NR can be managed as HO blacklist if the NR is determined as the invalid NR or
the NR causing HO performance degradation.
2 Serving cell performs validation check for the NR managed as HO blacklist by
acquiring ECGI of the NR through reportCGI once during ranking period.
3 NRs can be changed from HO blacklist to the HO whitelist for the following
cases
aA. ECGI information of the NR is changed by reportCGI operation.
bB. The value of hand-in statistics for the HO blacklist NR is larger than
thHandIn4Black2White.
cC. Operator changes the HO attribute of the NR from HO blacklist to HO
whitelist.
Automatic X2-NRT Management Function
1) X2 NR Priority (ranking) Calculation
The X2 NR ranking (priority) means the validity or significance of the X2 NR
included in X2 NRT. Samsung Intra-LTE ANR function defines that the X2 NR
ranking attribution has higher ranking as the more number of S1/X2 HO triggering
for X2 NR increases. X2 NR ranking is operated in the method shown below:
1 The X2 NR ranking calculation is performed after cell NR ranking.
2 The X2 ranking value used between the ranking calculation intervals uses the
ranking value calculated in the previous interval.
X2 NR ranking uses S1/X2 HO statistics and is calculated as shown below:
1 Collecting HOIn (i) statistics for X2 NR i in X2 NRT
oReceive HANDOVER REQUEST (S1/X2).
oIndex eNB i corresponding to the top ECGI in Last Visited Cell Information
IE included in UE History Information IE.
oIncrease HOInS1 (i) or HOInX2 (i) by HO triggering type.
oHOIn(i) = HOInS1 (i) + HOInX2 (i)
2 Collecting HOOut(i) statistics for X2 NR i in X2 NRT
oTransmit HANDOVER REQUIRED (S1) or HANDOVER REQUEST (X2).
oIncrease HOOutS1 (i) or HOOutX2(i) for eNB i as target of HO.
oHOOut(i) = HOOutS1 (i) + HOOutX2 (i)
3 Calculating the currentX2Rank value by X2 NR as follows:
currentX 2Ranki (k ) (1 ) previousX 2Ranki (k ) tempCurrentX 2Ranki (k )
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 408
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 409
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
3) Unnecessary X2 NR blacklisting
In order to reduce X2 signaling load caused by invalid X2 NR, if ratio of handover
attempt to an X2 NR is lower than predefined threshold, this function disconnects
the X2 link with the unnecessary X2 NR. The operator can control this functions
ON/OFF state. At the X2 NR ranking calculation point k, the serving eNB
disconnects X2 Link by changing the attribute of noX2 of X2 NR i which meets
the following conditions from False to True.
1 sonX2MgmtEnable = Auto &
2 nrX2BlackEnable = Auto &
3 &
oavg.tempCurrentX2Rank_{i}(k): The average occurrence ratio of handover
to X2 NR i during thTimeNrDel at the X2 NR ranking calculation point k
oweightThX2Black: weight factor for determining the threshold for judging the
X2 NR as an invalid X2 NR
oN_{NBR-eNB}: the number of X2 NRs which exist in X2-NRT more than
thTimeNrDel
4 noRemove = False for X2 NR i
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 410
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
4) X2 Link restoring
eNB restores the X2 Link of the X2 NR by changing the attribute of noX2 from
True to False if the currentX2Rank is larger than the predefined threshold at X2
NR ranking calculation point. The operator can control this functions ON/OFF
state. At the X2 NR ranking calculation point k, the serving eNB restores X2 Link
by changing the attribute of noX2 of X2 NR i which meets the following
conditions from True to False.
1 sonX2MgmtEnable = Auto &
2 nrX2ReEnable = Auto &
3 &
oweightThX2Black: weight factor for determining the threshold for judging
the X2 NR as an X2 NR to be restored
oN_{NBR-eNB}: the number of X2 NRs which exist in X2-NRT more than
ranking calculation period (rankPeriod)
4 noRemove = False for X2 NR i
Creates Neighbor Cell Lists for Measurement Configuration
The LTE cell can transmit to UE the measurement configurations of a maximum
of 32 frequencies and information of a maximum of 32 neighbor cells for each
configuration (cell individual offset). Cell individual offset is a parameter which
optimizes and improves each NRs HO performance in Samsung MRO function.
For the purpose of joint optimization with Samsung MRO function, Samsung
ANR function configures a maximum of 32 neighbor cell lists for each
frequencys measurement configuration in the order of ranking. HO performance
can be improved, when the cell individual offset value optimized for each neighbor
cell is transmitted to UE in the order of the nearest coverage with the serving cell.
The procedure for this operation is as follows.
1 NRs with isHOAllowed = True & isRemoveAllowed = False are configured in
the neighbor cell list in the order of ranking.
2 (If it is not filled) NRs with isHOAllowed = True & isRemoveAllowed = True
are configured in the neighbor cell list in the order of ranking.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 411
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Pre-condition
The UE must support Intra-LTE ANR capability (that is, the UE capability &
related feature group indicator bits are set to 1).
The UE has no GBR bearer (for example, QCI=1).
Feature Activation & Action
The related system parameters are configured as follows:
oThe ANR_ENABLE value must be set to Manual or Auto.
oTo enable periodic Scheduled ANR functionality, the NR_ADD_EVENT
value must be set to anrMrBased or bothMrBased.
oThe ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_TOTAL value must greater than 0.
oFor Intra-Frequency periodic ANR functionality, the
ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_INTRA_FREQ value must greater than 0.
oFor Inter-Frequency periodic ANR functionality, the
ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_INTER_FREQ value must greater than 0.
oThe concerned E-UTRA FAs ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE value must
greater than 0.
oThe DRX_CONFIG_SETUP value must be set to Drx_Config_Setup or
Drx_Config_reportCGI.
1 The eNB chooses UE for Scheduled ANR by ANR UE selection rules.
2 In case Intra-LTE ANR UE is selected, eNB configures ANR specific
measurement configuration for UE (at this time, measurement duration timer is
started in the eNB).
3 The UE transmits the measurement report to the eNB based on ANR specific
measurement configuration.
4 When eNB receives non-neighbor E-UTRA cell from UE, it requests cell global
identity to the UE (using reportCGI configuration).
5 If eNB successfully obtains the non-neighbor E-UTRA cells CGI from UE, it
registers the new E-UTRA cell into the own neighbor DB.
6 The eNB removes ANR specific measurement configuration for Scheduled ANR
from the UE when the measurement duration timer is expired.
(For mobility based Intra-LTE ANR) In case of the UE receives handover related
measurement report from the UE, the eNB perform from 4) to 5) steps.
Deactivation
The ANR_ENABLE value must be set to OFF.
To disable Scheduled ANR functionality, the NR_ADD_EVENT value must be
set to hoMrBased.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 412
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Key Parameters
This table describes SON property for NRT auto-configuration in LSM.
Parameters for Initial NRT auto-configuration
Parameters Description
R Count The number of neighbor cells used to calculate the inter-site distance for
Initial NRT, PCI, and RSI auto-configuration.
NRT Type Criteria for determining the effective distance used to generate the initial
NRT. It can be set to minimum, average, or distance.
Distance: Use of NRT Limit Distance as effective radius
Average: Use of R multiplied by NRT Multiple as effective radius where R
is the distance obtained by averaging the inter-site distance with the
neighbor cells in the nearest order (The number of neighbor cells is R
Count).
Minimum: Use of R multiplied by NRT Multiple as the effective radius
where R is the distance with nearest neighbor cell.
NRT Size The number of neighbor cells that can be included in the initial NRT.
NRT Multiple The coefficient which is multiplied to either the average distance of the cells
as many as R Count or the distance of the nearest neighbor cell.
NRT Limit The maximum distance to the neighbor cell that can be included in the Initial
Distance NRT.
The operator can set the operation mode of Samsung ANR function to
automatic/manual/deactivate or retrieve the mode through the following
commands and parameter.
Parameters for the operation mode control
CHG-SONFN-CELL/RTRV-SONFN-CELL
Parameters Description
ANR_ENABLE The Intra-LTE Automatic Neighbor Relation (ANR) operation is controlled in
3 modes.
Off (0): The Intra-LTE ANR function is not performed (X2-based NR
deletion and NR ranking calculation is performed).
Manual (1): Operator approval is required for NR deletion. Other ANR
functions are performed automatically.
Auto (2): All ANR functions are performed automatically.
The operator can configure or view method to manage X2 interface by using the
following commands and parameters.
Parameters for X2 interface management
CHG-SONFN-ENB/RTRV-SONFN-ENB
Parameters Description
SON_X2_MGMT_ENABLE The flag controlling whether the automatic X2 interface management
function is performed or not.
Off (0): The automatic X2 interface management function is not performed.
Auto (1): The automatic X2 interface management function is performed
(X2 ranking calculation and the size management of X2 Neighbor
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 413
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Parameters Description
Relation Table (NRT)).
NR_X2_BLACK_ENABLE The flag controlling whether the automatic X2 interface blacklisting function
is performed or not. (Prerequisite: SON_X2_MGMT_ENABLE = Auto)
Off (0): The automatic X2 interface blacklisting function is not performed.
Auto (1): The automatic X2 interface blacklisting function is performed.
NR_X2_RE_ENABLE The flag controlling whether the automatic X2 interface restore function is
performed or not. (Prerequisite: SON_X2_MGMT_ENABLE = Auto)
Off (0): The automatic X2 interface restoring function is not performed.
Auto (1): The automatic X2 interface restoring function is performed.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2
(Release 10).
[2] 3GPP TS 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol
specification (Release 10).
[3] 3GPP TS 36.902: E-UTRAN; Self-configuring and self-optimizing network
(SON) use cases and solutions.
[4] 3GPP TS 32.500: E-UTRAN; Concepts & Requirements.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 414
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 415
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
BENEFIT
With Samsung PCI optimization, the operator can reduce CAPEX/OPEX
required for network installation and expansion.
Samsung PCI optimization guarantees the end users have improved mobility
between cells.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 416
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Limitation
The location based PCI reallocation method of the PCI optimization might cause a
PCI collision and confusion with a cell that does not use the same EMS.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Samsung PCI optimization operates in eNB's SON agent and EMS's SON manager.
The overall structure is as follows:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 417
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Transmit timer triggering notify information to eNB which has smaller ECGI.
eNB: SON Agent
SON Agent: PCI Management Function
oTransmits a notify information message to the LSM and stores it in the DB
when PCI collision/confusion is determined.
oTimer running for waiting PCI reconfiguration when LSM trigger timer
oWhen timer expires, transmit a new PCI allocation message to the LSM.
SON Agent: PCI collision/confusion Detection Function
oDetects PCI collision/confusion using the X2_SETUP_REQUEST and
eNB_CONFIGURATION_UPDATE messages received from the call
processor.
oDetects a PCI collision/confusion using the ECGI information received from
the neighbor detection function.
PCI Auto-configuration
The PCI auto-configuration function is performed in LSM. It aims to allocate PCIs
based on the distance between cells to avoid PCI collision/confusion. Selects the
reference distance from the cells that allocates PCI, and then allocates PCIs,
assuring that all cells belonging to the same LSM within the reference distance
avoid PCI collision/confusion. The following picture shows a brief overview of the
PCI configuration.
There are two kinds of considering situation to avoid when PCI auto configuration
is performed.
PCI collision
oDefinition: where two cells with adjacent coverage use the same FA and PCI.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 418
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
PCI confusion
oDefinition: where two cells adjacent to the coverage of the serving cell (cell
B) use the same FA and PCI.
oProblem: handover ambiguity occurs because the cell B is cannot distinguish
which is the target cell.
oThe following figure shows PCI confusion:
PCI Optimization
PCI Collision/Confusion Detection
The PCI collision/confusion detection function is performed in SON agent of eNB.
There is a list of PCI collision/confusion detection occurrence situation & pre-
requisite as below. When PCI collision/confusion is detected, SON agent reports to
SON manager of LSM on the occurrence of PCI conflict and the 2TierNRT
creation.
PCI conflicts detection occurrence
oPCI change by operator
oNew neighbor cell enrolled by ANR operation and Manually added neighbor
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 420
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
oX2 message information (FA, PCI, and ECGI) from neighbor eNB
Pre-requisite
oNeighbor relation Table
o2Tier Neighbor relation Table
A pre-requisite for PCI confusion is that each cell creates and maintains its NRT
for handover. A serving cell is only aware of its immediate neighbor cell (that is,
NRT) and not its neighbor to neighbor PCI number (that is, 2TierNRT). PCI
confusion occurs as a result of 2TierNRT PCI clash hence, a cell also needs to
create a list of neighbor to neighbor cell PCI value, to detect PCI confusion. When
a cell receive a X2 message from its immediate neighbor cell, it updates 2TierNRT
PCI values, which is used for PCI confusion detection and deny PCI list, for new
PCI allocation. The figure below shows more details about PCI
Collision/Confusion Detection:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 421
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
PCI Reallocation
Upon receiving the report of PCI conflict, SON manager of LSM selects the target
cell for PCI reallocation. PCI reallocation procedures are performed once its cell is
selected.
NRT based PCI reallocation (default)
The NRT based PCI reallocation method is as follows:
o2TierNRT PCI number is reported from eNB.
oStep1) Delete the PCIs in the 2TierNRT from the PCI pool.
oStep2) Reconfigure new PCI by PCI auto-configuration procedure in the
same way self-configuration phase.
PCI Collision Detection Based on UE Mobility
The PCI collision detection function based on UE mobility focuses on the
resolution of PCI conflict between neighboring eNBs when UE moves from one
cell coverage to other one. By using this function, PCI collision can be detected
even though there is no neighbor relation between two adjacent cells. UE cannot
successfully perform HO: RLF occurs due to RF degradation and UE tries to
synchronize with the target cell again. UE requests RRC Connection Re-
establishment to the target cell but the request is rejected, because the target cell
does not have UE Context.
PCI collision detection occurrence
oThe UE moves from the serving cell to the target cell
oThe UE experiences RLF event
oThe UE tries RRC Re-establishment (RRE) procedure in the target cell
oThe eNB of the target cell can detect PCI that can be potentially involved in
the PCI collision
Condition for PCI collision detection
There are three defined conditions that control PCI collision detection:
oCondition 1: PCI in UE-Identity and PCI of the cell that receives Re-
establishment request from UE are the same.
oCondition 2: C-RNTI in UE-Identity has already existed in the cell that
receives Re-establishment request from UE
oCondition 3: Short MAC-I in UE-Identity is not identical to Short MAC-I
that is calculated by the target cell
oPCI collision is detected if condition 1 is satisfied and condition 2 is not
satisfied, or all three conditions are satisfied at the same time.
Pre-requisite
SON Manager at EMS differentiates PCI conflict message and PCI collision
notification
The following figure shows Samsung femto PCI collision detection based on
UE mobility:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 422
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Once SON Manager at LSM receives the notification of the PCI collision from
eNB, it selects the cell for PCI reallocation based on obtained ECGI
information. PCI reallocation procedure is the same as described previously.
To exclude the redundancy of notification of PCI collision, LSM saves PCI
collision event and waits until PCI reconfiguration time period starts. In this
case, LSM begins to resolve PCI collision one by one during PCI
reconfiguration period. If another timer that relates to PCI confusion event is
running, LSM turns off the timer.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Pre-condition
The PCI optimization function is activated in the LSM.
Feature Activation & Action
To activate this feature, PCID_ENABLE (system parameter) value must be set to
Auto or Manual.
1 The eNB monitors X2 Setup Request, X2 Setup Response, and X2 eNB
Configuration messages.
2 The eNB delivers PCI conflict information to the LSM when the PCI collision or
confusion is detected.
3 If the new PCI is reassigned from the LSM, the eNB applies the new PCI to the
system.
(SLR4.5.0) To activate PCI collision detection based on UE mobility information
feature, PCI_COLLISION_DETECT_FLAG (system parameter) value must
be set to True.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 423
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Feature Deactivation
To deactivate this feature, PCID_ENABLE (system parameter) value must be set
to OFF.
(SLR4.5.0) To deactivate PCI collision detection based on UE mobility
information feature, PCI_COLLISION_DETECT_FLAG (system parameter)
value must be set to False.
Key Parameters
The following tables show SON property for NRT auto-configuration in LSM:
SON property setting for PCI Auto-configuration
Parameters Description
R Count Number of neighbor cells used to calculate the inter-site distance for initial
NRT, PCI, RSI auto-configuration
PCI Type Criteria for determining the effective distance used to generate the initial PCI.
It can be set to minimum, average, or distance.
Distance: Use of PCI Limit Distance as effective radius
Average: Use of R multiplied by PCI Multiple as effective radius where R is
the distance obtained by averaging the inter-site distance with the neighbor
cells in the nearest order (The number of neighbor cells is R Count).
Minimum: Use of R multiplied by PCI Multiple as the effective radius where R
is the distance with nearest neighbor cell.
PCI Multiple The coefficient which is multiplied to either the average distance of the cells as
many as R Count or the distance of the nearest neighbor cell.
PCI Limit Distance The minimum distance to the neighbor cell that can be included in the Initial
PCI.
Pico PCI White List Set Pico PCI White List
Can set up to 10 ranges.
In case of entering none or space: allocated Pico PCI of that range
Can set as number or number-number. (ex:0-100,150-200,300)
Macro PCI White List Set Macro PCI White List
Can set up to 10 ranges.
In case of entering none or space: allocated Macro PCI of that range
Can set as number or number-number. (ex:0-100,150-200,300)
The operator can set the operation mode of the Samsung PCI Auto-configuration
function to automatic/manual/deactivate or retrieve the mode through the
following commands and parameter.
CHG-SONFN-ENB/RTRV-SONFN-ENB
Parameters Description
PCID_ENABLE Controls SON PCID operation at 3 stages.
Off (0): Performs X2 monitoring.
Manual (1): After initial PCI auto configuration, X2 monitoring and PCI
collision/confusion detection are performed, the PCID in which
collision/confusion was detected can be reallocated manually.
Auto (2): After initial PCI auto configuration, X2 monitoring and PCI
collision/confusion detection are performed, the PCID in which
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 424
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Parameters Description
collision/confusion was detected is reallocated automatically by the LSM
SON manager.
PCI_COLLISION_DETECT_F This parameter controls the UE based PCI collision detection function.
LAG False (0): The PCI collision detection function and related notification
message is not performed.
True (1): The PCI collision detection function and related notification is
performed.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2 (Release 9)
[2] 3GPP 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol
specification (Release 9)
[3] 3GPP 36.902: E-UTRAN; Self-configuring and self-optimizing network (SON)
use cases and solutions
[4] 3GPP 32.500: E-UTRAN; Concepts & Requirements
[5] 3GPP 32.501: E-UTRAN; Self-configuration of network elements; OAM
Requirements for Self Configuration Use Cases
[6] 3GPP 32.521: E-UTRAN; Self-Organizing Networks (SON) Policy Network
Resource Model (NRM) Integration Reference Point (IRP); Requirements
[7] 3GPP 32.522: E-UTRAN; Self-Organizing Networks (SON) Policy Network
Resource Model (NRM) Integration Reference Point (IRP); Information Service
(IS)
[8] 3GPP 32.541: E-UTRAN; OAM Requirements for Self Healing Use Cases
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 425
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 426
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
BENEFIT
The operator can reduce previously spent CAPEX and OPEX cost for configuring
and managing the RSI and PRACH parameters of LTE cells.
Minimize UE access delay and maximize UL capacity
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Samsung RACH optimization operates in eNB's SON agent and EMS's SON
manager. The overall structure is as follows:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 427
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 428
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Self-Configuration Procedure
RSI Auto-configuration
Samsung RSI auto-configuration is performed in EMS. Subsequently, it aims to
allocate RSI that minimizes RS range overlap based on the input distances
between cells. The RSI Auto-configuration function operates based on the
distances from the cell that requires RSI allocation to other currently operating
cells that use the same EMS. The closest cell among those is selected to configure
the virtual neighbor. After that, the used root sequence set is calculated using the
union of the virtual neighbor and the root sequence that the virtual neighbor is
using. RSI is allocated by selecting an available RS range among RS in the whole
root sequence pool excluding the used root Sequence set.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 429
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
4 Used Root Sequence set is configured by collecting root sequences that are used
by cells in Virtual NRT.
5 An available RS set is configured in the whole RS pool by excluding the used
root sequence set.
6 RSI is allocated by selecting an allocable RS range among the available RS set.
At this point, if there is no RS range among the available RS set that satisfies
the consecutive RS, eNB includes RS range which is used in the farthest cell
into the available RS set, and allocates RSI by selecting an allocable RS range
among the available RS set. The eNB repeats step 6) until an RSI can be
allocated to the growing cell.
As mentioned in document, each cell should use continuous 64 PRACH
preambles.
PRACH preamble can be reuse based cyclic shift value which defined in 3GPP
36.211 table 5.7.2-2 as below:
oN_{CS} for preamble generation (preamble formats 0-3)
ZeroCorrelationZoneConfig N_{CS} value
Unrestricted Set Restricted Set
0 0 15
1 13 18
2 15 22
3 18 26
4 22 32
5 26 38
6 32 46
7 38 55
8 46 68
9 59 82
10 76 100
11 93 128
12 119 158
13 167 202
14 279 237
15 419 -
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 430
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 431
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Self Optimization
The self-optimization function of Samsung RACH Optimization is divided into the
event triggering operation and the periodic operation that is based on the statistics
information collected during operation. The event triggering RO operation
performs required operations when one of the following events is occurred during
network operation: i) neighbor relation change, ii) change in root sequence of
neighbor cell, iii) activation of RS collision detection and RSI reallocation
function (from OFF to ON). The statistics based periodic RO operation controls
PRACH InitialReceivedTargetPower, the number of dedicated preambles, and so
on. according to periodically obtained RACH-related statistics.
RSI Conflict Detection and Reallocation
RS Collision Detection
RS collision refers to a situation where two cells in neighbor relation use the
same FA and RS. In this case, as UE of the two cells selects one preamble in
an overlapping RS range and then transmits the PRACH preamble to attempt
the initial connection to the network, the probability of contention increases.
Therefore, it can degrade the performance of the initial network connection.
The RS collision detection function is performed by SON Agent of eNB if RS
collision detection and corresponding RSI reallocation function is activated.
The RS collision detection function is performed for the following cases:
oFor the case of two cells with Inter-eNB neighbor relation: The function
operates when cell configuration change message is received through X2
interface.
oFor the case of Intra-eNB neighbor cell: The function operates when eNB
Configuration update of itself is performed.
The SON Agent reports the occurrence of RS collision to SON manager of
EMS when RS collision is detected.
RSI reallocation
The SON manager of EMS receives RS collision reports and selects target
cells for RS reallocation. The selection procedure is as follows:
o(Case 1) In case that the function is already activated, a cell that has a bigger
ECGI is selected as RSI reallocation cell based on the ECGIs of RS
collision target cells.
o(Case 2) In case that the status of RS collision detection and RSI reallocation
function for a cell is changed from inactive (OFF) to active (ON), the cell
is selected as RSI reallocation cell.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 432
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Then, SON manager in EMS requests the selected cell to report the neighbor
relation list. Meanwhile, for (Case 1), EMS transmits a timer triggering
message to a cell with a smaller ECGI, and the cell receiving the message
operates timer. If timer of the cell with a smaller ECGI has expired, the cell
considers that RSI reallocation to the cell with a bigger ECGI has failed and
requests the RSI reallocation again. At this point, if a RSI change message is
received from the cell with a bigger ECGI after the timer has started running,
timer of the cell with a smaller ECGI will be stopped. For (Case 2) where the
status of RS collision detection and RSI reallocation function for a cell is
changed from inactive (OFF) to active (ON), the operation of timer is not
performed.
The cell that received the NR list request transmits the NR list to EMS. Then,
EMS configures used root sequence set by collecting root sequence used by
neighbor cells in the NR list. When using the used root sequence set, EMS
allocates RSI in the same way for the self-configuration procedure. If no RSI
for reallocation is available, EMS does not reallocate RSI.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 433
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 434
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 435
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 436
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Pre-condition
The RACH optimization function is activated in the EMS.
The UE supports RACH report functionality (that is, UE Information procedure).
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 437
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Key Parameters
The following table describes SON property for RSI auto-configuration in LSM.
SON property window for RSI auto-configuration
Parameters Description
R Count Number of Cell to use for calculating average of NRT, PCI, RSI.
RSI Type Criteria of the effective radius when allocating RSI. Can set to minimum, average
or distance.
minimum: using R as distance with nearest neighbor cell.
distance: criteria of fixed distance.
average: use of R multiplied by RSI Multiple as effective radius where R is the
distance obtained by averaging the inter-site distance with the neighbor cells in
the nearest order (The number of neighbor cells is R Count).
RSI Multiple Expansion range of calculating the effective distance when allocating RSI.
RSI Limit Distance Minimum of the effective radius when allocating RSI.
The operator can set the operation mode of Samsung RACH Optimization function
to activate/deactivate the mode through the following commands and parameter.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 438
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
CHG-SONFN-CELL/RTRV-SONFN-CELL
Parameters Description
RACH_OPT_ENABLE The parameter is used to control the RACH Optimization operation in three
modes.
Off (0): RO function is disabled, except X2 interface monitoring
Manual (1): RO related parameters are change by operators confirmation.
Auto (2): All RO related parameters are change automatically
RSI_CONFLICT_ENABLE RSI reallocation function Enable/Disable
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 439
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2 (Release 9)
[2] 3GPP 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol
specification (Release 9)
[3] 3GPP 36.902: E-UTRAN; Self-configuring and self-optimizing network (SON)
use cases and solutions
[4] 3GPP 32.500: E-UTRAN; Self-Organizing Networks (SON); Concepts and
requirements
[5] 3GPP 32.501: E-UTRAN; Self-configuration of network elements; Concepts
and requirements
[6] 3GPP 32.521: E-UTRAN; Self-Organizing Networks (SON) Policy Network
Resource Model (NRM) Integration Reference Point (IRP); Requirements
[7] 3GPP 32.522: E-UTRAN; Self-Organizing Networks (SON) Policy Network
Resource Model (NRM) Integration Reference Point (IRP); Information Service
(IS)
[8] 3GPP 32.541: E-UTRAN; Self-Organizing Networks (SON); Self-healing
concepts and requirements
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 440
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 441
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
BENEFIT
Operator can reduce operational cost by automatic cell outage detection and
compensation functions.
After cell outage occurs, users in cell outage area can be in service in a short time.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Network Structure
The network architecture for COC in LTE system is as shown below. The main
network entities (NEs) in the network architecture include eNBs and EMS. The
connection between EMS and eNB represents a management interface. Also, eNBs
and EMS exchange information for the performance of COC through the
management interfaces.
The following figure is Network architecture for COC in LTE system:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 442
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 443
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 444
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
COC Algorithm
(Sub1) Cell Outage Detection
The eNB detects the occurrence of the cell outage for the cell outage detection
function and reports it to the EMS.
1 Detecting the occurrence of a cell outage
Samsung COC function defines an outage cell as follows:
oIf status of the cell is maintained as being disabled during a specific period of
time (DisableDuration)
If status of the cell is disabled due to the lock by operator, the cell is not
considered as an outage cell.
2 Reporting the occurrence of the cell outage to the EMS
If the cell managing by eNB is decided as an outage cell, the eNB reports the
CELL_OUTAGE_ DETECTION message to the EMS. The
CELL_OUTAGE_DETECTION message includes followings:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 445
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 446
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
The EMS delivers to eNB that manages the cells to participate in COC
transmission power of the RRH of the pre-determined cells to participate in
COC through the COC_COMP_RRH_RX_POWER_RECONFIG message.
The COC_COMP_RRH_RX_POWER_RECONFIG message includes the
eNB ID, ID of the cell to participate in COC, the RRH index of the cell, and
the transmission power value of the RRH.
The eNB that receives the COC_COMP_RRH_TX_POWER_RECONFIG
message sets the transmission power of the RRH of the cell managed by the
eNB to the transmission power value in
COC_COMP_RRH_TX_POWER_RECONFIG. After changing the power
transmission of the RRH, eNB delivers to UE the information on the changed
power transmission of the RRH through SIB2.
(Sub2) Checking status of the outage cell (Procedure 5)
After sending the COC_COMP_RRH_TX_POWER_RECONFIG message,
the EMS checks status of the outage cell regularly until the following
conditions are satisfied:
oReceiving the CELL_OUTAGE_CLEAR message from eNB which manages
the outage cell
oChecking that status of the outage cell is enabled by checking the status of
the cell regularly
(Sub1) Cell Outage Clear
When the EMS receives the CELL_OUTAGE_CLEAR message from eNB or
checks whether status of the outage cell is enabled, the following operation is
performed:
1 Detecting and reporting cell outage clear
2 Including the cells to participate in COC in the cells for CCO
3 Determining the transmission power of the RRH of the COC-related cells (the
outage cell and cells to participate in COC) before occurrence of the cell
outage
4 Delivering and setting the transmission power of the RRH of the COC-related
cells
The detail for the aforementioned procedure is as follows:
(Sub2) Detecting and reporting cell outage clear (Procedure 1)
aIn case of detecting cell outage clear by reporting to eNB
If status of the outage cell is changed from disabled to enabled, the eNB
decides the outage of the cell is cleared and reports the
CELL_OUTAGE_CLEAR message to the EMS. The
CELL_OUTAGE_CLEAR message includes the cell ID information of the
cell whose outrage is released.
bIn case of detecting the release of cell outage through checking the status of
the cell of EMS periodically
The EMS checks status of outage cell regularly and if status of outage cell
is changed to enabled, the EMS decides the status as cell outage clear.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 447
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
The operator sets the COC operation to auto or manual of the
SON_COC_FUNC_ENABLE value of eNB to operate the COC to activate the
COC operation. In addition, the operator sets the
SON_CCO_PWR_CTRL_ENABLE value of the cell to change the transmission
power to auto through the COC operation.
Provided, however, that the SON_COC_PWR_CTRL_ENABLE value cannot be
applied as auto for the cell in the eNB whose SON_COC_FUNC_ENABLE is Off.
The CCO operation-related parameter settings are as follows:
FrequencyRange: Frequency range considered when selecting cells to participate
in COC
DISABLE_DURATION: Waiting time to decide as cell outage
Key Parameters
The operator may set frequency range considered when selecting cells to
participate in COC by using FrequencyRange of SON Property.
Parameters Description
FrequencyRange Frequency range which will be considered when selecting cells to participate
in COC
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 448
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
The operator may change and retrieve the operating mode, either automatic or
release, in Samsung COC by using the following commands and parameters:
CHG-SONFN-ENB/RTRV-SONFN-ENB
Parameters Description
SON_COC_FUNC_ENABLE In SON, determines the enable of the cell outage compensation (COC) SON.
Off: Turn off the function.
Manual: Turn on the function. The operator applies the COC result after
checking it.
Auto: Turn on the function. Apply the COC result automatically.
The operator may change and retrieve the Tx power changing mode of each cell by
COC, either automatic or release, by using the following commands and
parameters:
CHG-SONFN-CELL/RTRV-SONFN-CELL
Parameters Description
SON_COC_PWR_CTRL_ENA In SON, determines the enable of the transmission power changing function
BLE by the cell outage compensation (COC) algorithm.
Off: Turn off the function.
Auto: Parameters may be changed by an algorithm.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2 (Release 9)
[2] 3GPP 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol
specification (Release 9)
[3] 3GPP 36.902: E-UTRAN; Self-configuring and self-optimizing network (SON)
use cases and solutions
[4] 3GPP 32.500: E-UTRAN; Concepts & Requirements
[5] 3GPP 32.501: E-UTRAN; Self-configuration of network elements; OAM
Requirements for Self Configuration Use Cases
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 449
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
BENEFIT
To reduce the optimization costs during the operation by adjusting the
transmission power of the RRH depending on the network status
To guarantee less call drop and seamless service by adjusting the transmission
power of the RRH depending on the network status
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 450
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Architecture
The figure below shows Samsung CCO-related network architecture and the main
network entities include eNBs and the EMS:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 451
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
CCO Function
CCO Operation Flow
The whole operating flow of Samsung CCO is as follows:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 452
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
CCO Algorithm
Samsung CCO has the purpose of optimizing the coverage. Also, it is used as a
function of adjusting the transmission power of the RRH automatically to optimize
the coverage during the operation of LTE system.
Samsung CCO operates as follows:
1 Detecting a coverage hole
oDetermining a coverage hole based on the information on the RLF report
from UE
2 Collecting and reporting information
oCollecting and reporting the coverage holes, UE In/Out and hand-out-related
statistics
3 Deciding the transmission power of the RRH
oDeciding transmission power of the RRH based on the information on the
collected network status
4 Configuring the transmission power of the RRH
oApplying transmission power of the RRH decided to the RRH
oChanging and delivering to UE the system parameters depending on the
decided transmission power of the RRH
Detailed explanation on the detailed operations of each algorithm is as follows:
(Sub2) Detecting a coverage hole
When the RLF is generated by using the RLF report information (serving
RSRP, serving RSRQ or neighbor RSRP) from UE, the eNB determines the
occurrence of the coverage hole if the predicted SINR is less than the SINR
threshold.
(Sub2) Collecting and reporting coverage hole statistics
When a coverage hole is detected during the CCO period, eNB calculates the
difference of the transmission power of the serving cell or neighbor cell. Also,
the both cells are having the same frequency with serving cell to remove the
coverage hole and collect the coverage hole-related statistics (count of
calculating difference of transmission power, and sum of the difference of the
transmission power). Besides, eNB collects the statistics relating to UE in to,
or UE out from, the cell managed by it during the Report period. The eNB
reports to the EMS the statistics relating to the collected coverage holes, UE
in-and-out and hand-out during the Report period.
Deciding the transmission power of the RRH
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 453
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
The EMS calculates the transmission power of the cell in every CCO period to
remove the coverage hole by using the statistical information relating to the
coverage hole, UE in-and-out and hand-out received from eNBs (count of
calculating difference of transmission power, and sum of the difference of the
transmission power) which are collected during CCO period as follows:
aEMS calculates each cells count of calculating difference of transmission
power and the count of UE in-and-out based on the statistical information
from eNB. For the count of calculating difference of transmission power
and the count of UE in-and-out, only the information that are collected by
neighbor cell with the same cell type (macro cell or pico cell).
bEMS calculates the ratio of the coverage hole for the current transmission
power of the cell by using the count of calculating difference of
transmission power and the count of UE in-and-out as shown below, and
calculates average coverage hole ratio based on IIR filtering.
Coverage hole ratio = count of calculating difference of transmission
power/UE in and out count
The above average coverage hole ratio for the transmission power of the
cell represents the degree of the occurrence of the coverage hole based on
the transmission power of the cell.
cEMS calculates sum of the difference of transmission power and the count of
calculating difference of transmission power by using the information on
the statistics from eNB. For the calculation of each cells sum of the
difference of transmission power and the count of calculating difference of
transmission power, only the information collected by neighbor cell with
the same cell type (macro cell or pico cell) is considered.
dEMS calculates the candidate transmission power for each cell to remove the
coverage hole by using the sum of the difference of transmission power
and the count of calculating difference of transmission power as follows:
Candidate transmission power = current transmission power + (the sum
of the difference of the transmission power/count of calculating
difference of transmission power)
eEMS decides the transmission power of each cell by using the average
coverage hole ratio within the scope of [candidate transmission power and
current transmission power] of the cell in a direction to removing the
coverage hole.
However, the collected statistical information for the cell whose UE in-and-out
count is less than UE in-and-out count threshold is saved and the transmission
power is maintained as it is.
Additionally, to prevent the coverage hole area from being increased by
reducing the transmission power of the cell and the neighbor cell, if there is a
neighbor cell whose hand-out account exceeds the hand-out threshold and
whose state of transmission power is reduced for the cell whose transmission
power is determined to be reduced through the aforementioned course, the
transmission power is prohibited from being reduced and the current
transmission power is maintained.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 454
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
The operator sets the CCO operation to auto or manual' of the
SON_CCO_FUNC_ENABLE value of eNB to operate the CCO to activate the
CCO operation. In addition, the operator sets the
SON_CCO_PWR_CTRL_ENABLE value of the cell to change the transmission
power to auto through the CCO operation.
However, the SON_CCO_PWR_CTRL_ENABLE value cannot be applied as
auto for the cell in the eNB whose SON_CCO_FUNC_ENABLE is OFF.
The CCO operation-related parameter settings are as follows:
POWER_RANGE: Scope of adjusting the transmission power
POWER_STEP_SIZE: Step size used to calculate the difference of the
transmission power
COVERAGE_HOLE_SINR: SINR threshold corresponding to the coverage hole
UE_IN_OUT_THRESHOLD: UE in-and-out count threshold
COVERAGE_HOLE_RATIO_EXPIRE_TIME: Average coverage hole ratio
maintaining time
Key Parameters
The operator may change and retrieve the operating mode, either automatic or
release, in Samsung CCO by using the following commands and parameters:
CHG-SONFN-ENB/RTRV-SONFN-ENB
Parameters Description
SON_CCO_FUNC_ENABLE In SON, determines the enable of the CCO (coverage & capacity
optimization) SON.
Off: Turn off the function
Auto: The changed parameter is automatically applied to operation when
the parameter is changed by the algorithm.
The operator may change and retrieve the Tx power changing mode of each cell by
CCO, either automatic or release, by using the following commands and
parameters:
CHG-SONFN-CELL/RTRV-SONFN-CELL
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 455
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Parameters Description
SON_CCO_PWR_CTRL_ENA In SON, decide enable of the transmission power changing function by CCO.
BLE Off: Turn off the function
Auto: Parameters may be changed by an algorithm.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2 (Release 9)
[2] 3GPP 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol
specification (Release 9)
[3] 3GPP 36.902: E-UTRAN; Self-configuring and self-optimizing network (SON)
use cases and solutions
[4] 3GPP 32.500: E-UTRAN; Concepts & Requirements
[5] 3GPP 32.501: E-UTRAN; Self-configuration of network elements; OAM
Requirements for Self Configuration Use Cases
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 456
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
BENEFIT
Power consumption can be reduced by switching off unnecessary cells.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Architecture
The architecture of Cell on/off function is as follow.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 457
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Operators can configure policies for Cell on/off function using EMS. The function
operates according to the configured policies.
The role of each blocks participating in this function is as follow.
1 EMS
EMS provides GUI for configuring policies for operator and transfers the
configured policies to eNB.
2 Call block
Call block executes Cell on/off function according to operator configured
policies. It will release calls in the cell at cell switch off condition and transfer
the result of cell switch off to neighbor cells. Moreover, cell activation can be
executed when traffic load is over threshold.
3 OAM
OAM block transfers Tx on/off message to RU according to the result of this
function and HW configuration.
4 RU
RU executes Tx on/off according to message from OAM block.
Operation
The concept of cell off operation is as follow.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 458
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Cell switch off operation can be executed only for the cells that are co-located in a
same site. The target cell to switch off will release existing call by forced handover.
When all calls are released in the cell, the cell will be switched off and the cell is
managed as dormant cell.
Pre-defined Time Schedule based ES
Time schedule based function operates cell switch on/off according to the time
schedule configured by operator. The policies that need to be configured by
operator are as follow.
Function on/off per cell
Co-located cell list per cell
Time schedule for on/off per cell
Traffic load threshold for cell switch off or cell activation
Whether to execute forced handover and timer configuration
Operation Flow for Cell on/off
Overall operation flow for pre-defined time schedule based Cell on/off is as follow.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 459
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Steps Description
1 Policies configured by operator are transferred to eNB.
2 Cells monitor periodically for the scheduled time.
3 At the scheduled time, the cell checks whether the traffic load threshold is configured by operator.
4 If traffic load threshold is configured by operator, the cell compares traffic load with the threshold.
If traffic load is less than threshold, the next process will be executed. Else, execute the
comparison at the next period.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 460
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Steps Description
5 The cell should block new calls.
6 Check whether all calls in the cell are released. If some calls are remained and the forced
handover option is configured by operator, the forced handover function is executed. If any call
remains after the Timer expires, the all calls are released.
7 If all calls are released in the cell, the cell will be switched off. When the cell becomes dormant
cell, it transfers eNB Configuration Update message to neighbor cells to inform cell switch off.
8 RU Tx off will be executed if all cells in the RU are switched off.
9 Execute cell switch on when the scheduled time ends. When the cell switches on, it transfers eNB
Configuration Update message to some of neighbor cells to inform cell switch on.
10 RU Tx on will be executed if RU Tx off is executed by this function.
Steps Description
1 If traffic load threshold is configured by operator, the cell compares traffic load with the threshold.
2 If traffic load is higher than threshold, the cell transfers Cell Activation message to some of
neighbor dormant cells. Else, execute the comparison at the next period.
3 Dormant cells executes cell switch on when they receive Cell Activation message.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 461
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Use the command CHG-GRCREL-CONF to set esCellOffMode to
ScheduleBased. Operator can disable this feature by setting the parameter to
Off.
If you want to use forced handover for faster graceful cell off, use the command
CHG-GRCREL-CONF to set esCellOffMode to withForcedHo.
If you want to use timer based release for active calls, use the command CHG-
GRCREL-CONF to set esCellOffTimerEnable to On.
Use the command CHG-GRCREL-CONF to set esCellOffTimer, when you want
to reconfigure timer for timer based release.
If FA priority of the cell is set to 7, the cell is not off although esCellOffMode of
a cell is set to ScheduleBased.
Key Parameters
RTRV-EUTRA-FA/CHG-EUTRA-FA
Parameter Description
PRIORITY_FOR_ES_CELL_ON_OFF This is priority for FA of cell on target. The cells of FA allocated
priority 7 is excluded in candidate cell off.
RTRV-SONFN-ENB/CHG-SONFN-ENB
Parameter Description
CELL_OFF_LOAD_THRESHOLD This is a threshold parameter for triggering cell off.
A cell load is lower than this threshold for triggering cell off.
CELL_ACT_LOAD_THRESHOLD This is a threshold parameter for activating cell on.
It is lower than this threshold for triggering cell off.
When a cell load is bigger than this threshold, the cell activates NBR
dormant cells.
RTRV-SONFN-CELL/CHG-SONFN-CELL
Parameter Description
ES_CELL_ON_OFF_ENABLE This parameter indicates whether to enable the ES Cell On/Off.
There are three modes (Off, ScheduleBased, TrafficBased). If the
parameter is Off, this cell is excluded Cell On/Off.
RTRV-GRCREL-CONF/CHG-GRCREL-CONF
Parameter Description
ES_CELL_OFF_MODE This parameter is used to set cell-off for energy saving operation mode when
estate, and esModeType (of CellEnergySavingStatus) is transited to enable
and cell off. There are normal and withForcedHo that triggers On-Demand
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 462
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Parameter Description
Forced HO at transition to cell-off.
ES_CELL_OFF_TIMER_ENAB This parameter is used to enable or disable timer operation. If you set this
LE parameter to ON, the timer is triggered at transition to set cell-off for energy
saving. And then, it make eNB forcibly release remained active calls in the
cell under cell-off for energy saving, when timer is expired.
ES_CELL_OFF_TIMER This parameter is used to set timer duration in esCellOffTimer.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS 36.423 (Rel.11)
[2] 3GPP TS 32.551 (Rel.11)
[3] 3GPP TS 36.300 (Rel.12)
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 463
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 464
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
The system operator may not operate the ES function OFF or run the ES function
ON in the following two ways:
The system operator may configure the time of the eNB working in the Saving
Mode by day and the eNB works in the Saving Mode according to the
schedule.
The eNB decides the operation mode by itself. The eNB predicts DL traffic usage
at an interval and decides whether it works in the Saving Mode or the Normal
Mode by using it.
BENEFIT
Reduction of OPEX without coverage/QoS loss.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Architecture
The following figure shows the structure of the Samsung ES function. The EMS
and eNB have blocks related to the ES function.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 465
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
The role of the ES-related function of the EMS SON-manager is to support the
system operator to set ES function-related settings using the PLD and to transmit
the settings to the eNB OAM. The setup information transmitted to the eNB OAM
by the SON-manager is largely divided into the following three.
Enable/disable settings of the ES function
Automatic apply (traffic analysis/prediction)-related parameter settings
Manual apply (pre-defined schedule based ES)-related parameter settings
The EMS SON-manager also receives reports on the operation status of the eNBs
ES function.
Function blocks for the implementation of the ES in the eNB are the SON-agent,
OAM, MODEM, scheduler and RU.
1 The eNB SON-agent determines the eNBs operating mode based on the time-
varying traffic information collected during the system operation and allows
the MODEM, scheduler and the RU to perform operations set by each
operating mode. To do this, the SON-agent consists of the following function
blocks.
2 The eNB OAM collects PM statistics information and provides it to the SON-
Agent. Also, the OAM performs as a bridge of information transfer between
the EMS SON-manager and the eNB SON-agent.
3 When the eNB SON-agent decides the eNB operating mode, the eNB scheduler
block limits the number of scheduled RBs or releases the limitation of the
number according to the decided eNB operating mode. In addition, the
scheduler delivers the operating mode decided in the modem.
4 The modem creates an appropriate signal by Tx branch depending on the
received operating mode from the scheduler.
5 The eNB RU control module is a module in the transceiver of the RU and
performs the role of actually implementing the Saving mode-related
commands by communicating with the Saving mode management module of
the SON-agent. In other words, it enables or disables some Tx branches.
(Disable or Enable).
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 466
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Operation
The following figure describes overall procedure of Samsung ES function
described in this document.
The SON-agent ES block of the eNB performs the following operations every one
hour.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 467
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
1 Analyzes the traffic load for D days from the past to the present. (Analyze traffic
load)
2 Predicts the traffic load required for the upcoming 1 hour based on this
information. (Predict traffic load)
3 Determines the mode to perform for the upcoming 1 hour based on the traffic
analysis and prediction. (Determine whether to enter the Saving Mode or not)
4 Enables the eNB to perform the determined operations.
If the eNB was decided to operate the Saving Mode during the interval (i) as a
time segment at the unit of every one coming hour, the SON-agent of the eNB
checks whether the failure of the eNB occurred every refresh period of the PM
statistical data (5 or 15 minutes) or the observed DL traffic was rapidly increased.
Based on the result, the eNB temporarily suspends the operation of the Saving
Mode during the shorter length of the time segment Interval (i, p) and returns to
the Normal Mode.
Traffic Prediction
The traffic load for the upcoming 1 hour is predicted as the larger value of the
following two metrics.
Time series average of the traffic load at the same hour for past D days
Weighted moving average of the traffic load for the recent M hours
Determination of Execution Mode
The Samsung ES function determines the operation mode for the upcoming 1 hour
every hour on the hour. The eNB operates in the Saving Mode for 1 hour if the
traffic load predicted should be below the threshold defined by Samsung ES
functionality. The threshold is defined in below table. Provided, however, that the
value may be changed depending on SLR version and the provided providers.
Mode Threshold Restriction for RB Allocation DL Tx Branch
(Predicted Traffic)
Normal Above 24 % No restriction All branches are enabled
ES Below 24 % Up to 48 % Some branches are disabled
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 468
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Execute the command RTRV/CHG-SONFN-CELL to retrieve/change the
operation mode and information of the Self-Organizing Network (SON)
function for each Cell.
Execute the command RTRV/CHG-ES-SCHED to retrieve/change the schedule
information of the Self-Organizing Network (SON) Energy Saving (ES)
function.
Execute the command RTRV/CHG-ES-COM to retrieve/change the ES Mode
Common information of the Self-Organizing Network (SON) Energy Saving
(ES) function.
Key Parameters
CHG-SONFN-CELL/RTRV-SONFN-CELL
Parameter Description
ENERGY_SAVINGS_ENABLE Controls SON Energy Saving in 3 modes.
Off: The Energy Saving functions except for traffic analysis is disabled.
Manual: The Energy Saving function in accordance with the schedule set by
the operator is enabled.
Auto: The Energy Saving functions based on the information obtained from
traffic analysis is enabled.
CHG-ES-SCHED/RTRV-ES-SCHED
Parameter Description
CELL_NUM The cell number. This value must not exceed the maximum number of cells
supported by the system.
WEEK_DAY The day for which the Energy Saving function is operated according to the
schedule.
HOUR This parameter is the activation time (h) of the energy saving feature
according to the schedule.
ES_STATE This setting is required for enabling the energy saving feature using the
schedule.
Inactive: The energy saving feature does not run.
Active: The energy saving feature runs based on the schedule.
SCHEDULED_ES_MODE ES Mode type in which the Energy Saving function is operated during one
hour according to the schedule.
CHG-ES-COM/RTRV-ES-COM
Parameter Description
DATA_VALIDITY This parameter is the number of days of traffic analysis to be used in
calculating the estimates for determining Energy Saving (ES) mode. For
traffic estimation, the average traffic load statistics are calculated for the
specified time over the last 15 days or the last 30 days as determined by this
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 469
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Parameter Description
parameter.
MOVING_AVERAGE_VALIDIT This parameter determines how many hours of data are used for calculating
Y the traffic estimates. When this parameter value is determined, it is weighted
with the MOVING_AVERAGE_WEIGHT parameter for calculating the traffic
estimates.
MOVING_AVERAGE_WEIGH This parameter is the weight of the recent hours to apply moving average for
T calculating the traffic estimates. When the number of hours (h) of data to use
is determined by the MOVING_AVERAGE_VALIDITY parameter, this
parameter value is used as weights for data of each hour for calculation.
Also, the first weight of this parameter indicates the most recent hour. If
MOVING_AVERAGE_VALIDITY is 2 hours and this parameter is
50,50,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0, it means that a weighting of 50% is applied to the last
2 hours.
RE_TX_THRESHOLD This parameter is the 4th Re Tx (third retransmission count of PDSCH
HARQ) threshold value for determining system abnormality. The unit used
is %. This refers to the ratio of the 4th value over the sum of the 1st through
4th values of the no. of DL transmission values in the statistics item DL-
HARQ status. If the no. of DL transmission value exceeds the major alarm
threshold value, it is deemed as a system abnormality. Before starting the
Self-Organizing Network (SON) Energy Saving (ES) feature, it must be
determined whether the current system status is normal. Therefore, if the
system is in abnormal status, the energy saving mode is disabled and the
normal mode is enabled. The energy saving feature remains disabled until
the system abnormality is resolved.
BLER_THRESHOLD This parameter is the 4th Re Tx BLER (PDSCH BLER for the third HARQ
retransmission) threshold value for determining system abnormality. The unit
used is %. This means the BLER for the 4th transmission among the DL
residual BLER values of the statistics item DL-HARQ status. If the DL
residual BLER value exceeds the major alarm threshold value, it is deemed
as a system abnormality. Before starting the Self-Organizing Network (SON)
Energy Saving (ES) feature, it must be determined whether the current
system status is normal. Therefore, if the system is in abnormal status, the
energy saving mode is disabled and the normal mode is enabled. The
energy saving feature remains disabled until the system abnormality is
resolved.
RLF_THRESHOLD RLF Threshold for system abnormality.
ALLOCATION_REDUCTION_ Allocation Reduction Factor for Traffic Abnormality
FACTOR
AUTO_ES_MODE ES Mode when Energy Saving is operated by Auto Apply.
RTRV-ES-TYPE
Parameter Description
ES_MODE_INDEX This parameter is the index used for saving the information of each Energy
Saving (ES) mode.
ES_MODE_TYPE This parameter is the Energy Saving (ES) mode to be activated when the
traffic load estimate is lower than ES_MODE_ENTERING_THRESHOLD
and ES_MODE_LEAVING_THRESHOLD.
Normal: Runs on Normal Mode Voltage and RB count.
Mode(#): Runs with variable voltage and RB count according to the mode.
The higher the mode, the less voltage and RB count are used to save
energy.
ES_MODE_PREDICTION_TH ES Mode Prediction Threshold
RESHOLD
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 470
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Parameter Description
ES_MODE_RB_ALLOCATION ES Mode RB Allocation Threshold
_THRESHOLD
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2 (Release 9)
[2] 3GPP 36.902: E-UTRAN; Self-configuring and self-optimizing network (SON)
use cases and solutions
[3] 3GPP 32.501: E-UTRAN; Self-configuration of network elements; OAM
Requirements for Self Configuration Use Cases
[4] 3GPP 32.541: E-UTRAN; OAM Requirements for Self Healing Use Cases
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 471
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
BENEFIT
Operator can save the cost for collecting the network performance measurement
data.
End-used service quality can be enhanced thanks to efficient network
optimization conducted by using MDT data
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Optimization of radio network performance is very important task for mobile
operators. Conventionally, operators conduct drive test to collect the radio
measurement, and parameter optimization is performed based on the gathered
information. Mobile operators have spent a lot of time and money for conventional
drive test and network optimization.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 472
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Target of Specific subscriber (IMSI) or equipment Specific area, for example, cells, TAs
configuration (IMEI, IMEI SV)
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 473
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Supported MDTs Both Logged and Immediate MDT Both Logged and Immediate MDT
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 474
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
UE pickup rate: The probability that a UE is chosen for MDT operation when the
UE satisfies all the requirements for UE selection. Operator may not want to
get measurement data from all the UEs who satisfy the requirements due to
large overhead.
In the RANs configuration and operation aspects, there are two types of MDT,
which are Immediate and Logged MDT. Data collection for Immediate MDT is
performed for the connected UEs by eNB, while Logged MDT data collection is
performed by each UE itself during idle mode. Immediate and Logged MDT can
be configured by both Signaling-based and Management-based MDT
configuration procedures.
In Immediate MDT, the following types of measurement data can be collected
while the UE is in connected mode.
M1: RSRP and RSRQ measurement by UE
M2: Power Headroom (PH) measurement by UE
M3: Uplink Received Interference Power of the connected cell (Rel.11)
M4: DL/UL Data Volume of the UE per QCI (Rel.11)
M6: Collecting all the event-triggered measurement reports configured for RRM
purpose (Rel.11)
For collecting data for M1, the eNBs RRC configures measurement reporting
trigger to the chosen UE. Reporting trigger for M1 can be 1) Periodic or 2) Serving
cell becomes worse than threshold; Event A2. The UE sends the measurement
report (RSRP and/or RSRQ of serving and neighboring cells) to the serving eNB if
the reporting condition is met, and the serving eNB collects the data and sends it to
the TCE.
On the other hand, no RRC reporting trigger is required for M2 because PHR is
carried by MAC signaling. If MDT data collection for M2 is configured, the
serving eNB collects the PHR information triggered by normal MAC mechanisms.
Similarly, M3 Received Interference Power and M4 Data Volume measurements
are also performed by the eNB itself so that no additional RRC signaling is
required. If M6 is set, all the existing event-triggered measurement reports
configured for RRM purposes are collected, for example, Event A1, A2, A3, A4,
A5, A6, B1, and B2 events. Differently from M1, RRC measurement configuration
is not additionally configured solely for MDT purpose. However the measured
metric is similar to M1, which are RSRP or RSRQ.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 475
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Additionally, UE RLF reporting (by Rel.9 or later UE) trace and RRC Connection
Establishment Failure (RCEF) reporting (by Rel.11 or later UE) trace are also
supported as management based MDT trace. RAN EMS orders some cells to trace
the RLF or RCEF reports sent by UEs. The, the eNB does not perform any specific
triggering action for the trace but just collects the RLF or RCEF information when
the reporting is received in the specified area. The collected information is sent to
the TCE server.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 477
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
1 Signalling Based Immediate MDT
oThe SIG_BASED_IMMEDIATE_MDT_ALLOWED (system parameter)
must be set to True in the eNB.
oProper information for TCE must be set.
2 Signalling Based Logged MDT
oThe SIG_BASED_LOGGED_MDT_ALLOWED (system parameter) must
be set to True in the eNB.
oProper information for TCE must be set.
3 Management Based Immediate MDT
oThe MGMT_BASED_IMMEDIATE_MDT_ALLOWED (system parameter)
must be set to True in the eNB.
oConfigures the MDT parameters and activates immediate MDT trace from
the LSM.
oProper information for TCE must be set.
4 Management Based Logged MDT
oThe MGMT_BASED_LOGGED_MDT_ALLOWED (system parameter)
must be set to True in the eNB.
oConfigures the MDT parameters and activates logged MDT trace from the
LSM.
oProper information for TCE must be set.
Key Parameters
CHG-MDTCTRL-PARA/RTRV-MDTCTRL-PARA
Parameter Description
SIG_BASED_IMMEDIATE_MD This parameter shows the whether to permit to the Signaling Based
T_ALLOWED Immediate MDT on demand.
False: Signaling Based Immediate MDT request is not allowed.
True: Signaling Based Immediate MDT request is allowed.
SIG_BASED_LOGGED_MDT_ This parameter shows the whether to permit to the Signaling Based Logged
ALLOWED MDT on demand.
False: Signaling Based Logged MDT request is not allowed.
True: Signaling Based Logged MDT request is allowed.
MGMT_BASED_IMMEDIATE_ This parameter shows the whether to permit to the Management Based
MDT_ALLOWED Immediate MDT on demand.
False: Management Based Immediate MDT request is not allowed.
True: Management Based Immediate MDT request is allowed.
MGMT_BASED_LOGGED_MD This parameter specifies the whether to permit to the Management Based
T_ALLOWED Logged MDT (Minimization Drive Test) on demand.
False: Management Based Logged MDT request is not allowed.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 478
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Parameter Description
True: Management Based Logged MDT request is allowed.
MDT_UE_PICKUP_RATE This parameter represents the selection rate which it uses when selecting
the Management Based MDT object UE. If the random number generated
between 0 is this value or less, select as MDT object UE.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP 37.320: UTRA and E-UTRA; Radio measurement collection for
Minimization of Drive Tests (MDT); Overall description; Stage 2 (Release 10)
[2] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2 (Release
10)
[3] 3GPP 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol
specification (Release 10)
[4] 3GPP 36.413: E-UTRAN; S1 Application Protocol (S1AP) (Release 10)
[5] 3GPP 36.423: E-UTRAN; X2 Application Protocol (X2AP) (Release 10)
[6] 3GPP 32.421: Telecommunication management; Subscriber and equipment
trace; Trace concepts and requirements (Release 10)
[7] 3GPP 32.422: Telecommunication management; Subscriber and equipment
trace; Trace control and configuration management (Release 10)
[8] 3GPP 32.423: Telecommunication management; Subscriber and equipment
trace; Trace data definition and management (Release 10)
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 479
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
BENEFIT
Operator can reduce the OPEX through the amount of manual processes involved
in initial network optimization through drive test.
The result of optimizing the network at the initial stage improves the effective
quality of users.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 480
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Architecture
Samsung DTO provides Smart SON Manager (SSOM) and Smart SON Server and
the overall architecture is as shown in the figure below:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 481
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
The main NEs of the DTO are as follows: In addition to the following NEs, CSM
(MME EMS), MME, and so on. are all NEs included in the DTO architecture for
the call trace function.
SSOM
Central node controlling the operation of DTO
Displaying real time RF information
Displaying moving routes
Displaying the result of the analyzed RF environment of the Smart SON Server
Displaying the recommended value of the antenna parameters of the Smart SON
Server
Changing remote e-tilt, azimuth, and power
(For DTO operation based on MDT information) Collects the UL RF information
by receiving the call trace report from eNB (the SRS received power)
(corresponding to the TCE under the 3GPP standards).
Smart SON Server
Analyzing RF environment
oReceives the collected DL RF information and site information during the
drive test from the SSOM.
o(For DTO operation based on DM application) Collects the UL RF
information by receiving the call trace report from eNB (the SRS received
power) (corresponding to the TCE under the 3GPP standards).
oReceives the analysis policy from the SSOM.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 482
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 483
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 484
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
oWhen start of the drive test (test route drive start) is ordered to the tested UE,
the DM application of the tested UE starts uploading the DM information
collected in real time to the DM web server.
oThe eNB delivers SRS received power information received from the Smart
Scheduler to the Smart SON server.
oThe RF information collected during the drive test is as follows:
Common IMSI of UE
GPS information Location
Height
Time
Lock/Unlock Status
Serving Cell PCID
Serving Cell ECGI
SFN (Serving Cell)
DL Serving RSRP
RSRQ
RSSI
SINR
Number(#) of Neighbor
# (Neighbor) PCID
RSRP
RSRQ
UL Serving SRS Rx. Power
Neighbor SRS Rx. Power
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 485
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
servFreqId-r10
measResultSCell-r10 rsrpResultSCell-
r10
rsrqResultSCell-
r10
measResultBestNeighCell- physCellId-r10
r10
rsrpResultNCell-
r10
rsrpResultNCell-
r10
~
Scell5 DL earfcn (Not included in MeasResults IE)
(MeasResultServFreq) ECGI (Not included in MeasResults IE)
PCI (Not included in MeasResults IE)
servFreqId-r10
measResultSCell-r10 rsrpResultSCell-
r10
rsrqResultSCell-
r10
measResultBestNeighCell- physCellId-r10
r10
rsrpResultNCell-
r10
rsrpResultNCell-
r10
Neighbor Top 1 physCellId
(=MeasResultEUTRA)
measResult rsrpResult
rsrqResult
~
Neighbor Top 8 physCellId
(=MeasResultEUTRA)
measResult rsrpResult
rsrqResult
triggering event Triggering event
UE GNSS pos ellipsoid-Point-r10,
Location ellipsoidPointWithAltitude-r10,
ellipsoidPointWithUncertaintyCircle-r11,
ellipsoidPointWithUncertaintyEllipse-r11,
ellipsoidPointWithAltitudeAndUncertaintyEllipsoid-r11,
ellipsoidArc-r11,
polygon-r11
(This is choice IE which is selected by UE, Included in LocationInfo-r10 IE of
MeasResults IE)
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 486
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
oOnce end of the drive test, the SSOM delivers the trace deactivation
command to the EMS and the trace ends. (Only available for Samsung
EPC.)
o(For DTO operation based on MDT information) SSOM delivers the MDT
deactivation command to the EMS and then the MDT for the test UE is
deactivated. (only available for Samsung EPC)
oDeliver the list of all PCIs included in the DM/MDT information through the
initial antenna parameter requesting message to the EMS and receive
initial parameters of all antennas belonging to the PCI from the EMS.
oDeliver the DM/MDT information to the Smart SON Server through the
drive test analysis starting message of the SSOM.
4 Selecting DTO area (optimized cluster)
oSelect the area to perform analysis and optimization based on the RF
information collected from the Smart SON Server.
5 Analyzing RF environment
oThe Smart SON Server performs analysis of RF environment to the DTO
area selected in 4) based on the RF information collected through the steps
1) to 3) (DM/MDT information and trace information).
oThe Smart SON Server reports the result of the analysis to the SSOM.
6 Antenna Optimizing parameters
oThe Smart SON Server optimizes the antenna parameters in the test
route/DTO area.
oThe Smart SON Server reports the result of the optimization to the SSOM.
7 Applying the optimized antenna parameters
oThe SSOM delivers the optimized antenna parameters to the EMS.
oThe EMS delivers the optimized antenna parameter values to eNB and the
parameters are optimally changed. (E-tilt values of Multi RET in eNB are
applied in parallel.)
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Smart SON DTO function has precedence over TPC and ATO functions. If DTO
function is activated, TPC and ATO stop their operation and transit to suspend
state.
Pre-condition
eNB should interwork with Smart SON Server, and operational state should be
enabled.
In SSOM, LSM should be registered.
In LSM, Smart SON Server and MME should be registered.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 487
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
For call trace at Smart SON Server, Smart SON Server should be included in
TCE table.
Feature Activation & Action
1 Before DTO activation, confirmation and information input for the following
DTO related PLD parameters through EMS are required:
aSet SON_DTO_FUNC_ENABLE value of optimization target eNBs
SON_FUNC_ENB_CONTROL PLD to Auto.
bSet SON_AZIMUTH_CTRL_ENABLE, SON_TILT_CTRL_ENABLE,
SON_POWER_CTRL_ENABLE values of optimization target cells
SON_FUNC_CELL_CONTROL PLD to Auto. (Set those values can be
set to Off if azimuth/tilt/power cannot be changed due to HW constraint or
operator does not want the change of steer/tilt/power..)
cOperator enters attributes of optimization target eNBs SON_DTO_FUNC
PLD.
dOperator enters attributes of optimization target cells ANTENNA_CONF
PLD.
2 Activation of DTO function in SSOM
aOn Drive Test registration screen, enter Test Name, IMSI, Smart Son Server,
TCE Address, MME Name, Reference Test, and Map View Type. Then,
click the confirmation button.
bIf new Drive Test is successfully registered, Start button appears bottom of
Drive Test Tab screen. If Start button is clicked, moving path and graph
data are displayed on the screen in real-time.
3 Activation of real-time report function in DM app. (This step is skipped when
DTO operates based on MDT)
aEnter DM Web Server IP address and port (6001) for real-time RF
information reporting in DM app.
bReal-time RF information reporting starts upon clicking Apply and connect
button.
4 Perform DTO Analyze/Optimize in SSOM.
aIf Stop button clicked, Drive Test ends and Analyze screen appears.
bClick Start Analyze button (wait 3 min - retry)
cIf Analyze is finished, Compare button and Optimize tab are activated. By
clicking Compare button, problem path can be identified.
dClick optimize tab and click Start Optimize button (wait 3 min - retry)
eIf Optimize is finished, Compare button and Apply tab are activated. By
clicking Compare button, problem path can be identified.
fOptimized results can be identified by clicking Apply button. Operator can
apply the optimized results by selecting antenna information.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 488
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Feature Deactivation
After using DTO function, DTO can be deactivated by clicking finish button on
SSOM.
SON_DTO_FUNC_ENABLE value must be set to Off.
Key Parameters
Entering Drive Test Information
When clicking the drive test button at the SSOM, the pop-up window for entering
the drive test-related information appears and the operator enters the information
required to perform the drive test.
Parameters for drive test
Parameters Description
Test name Drive test name
IMSI The International Mobile Subscriber Identity
Smart SON Server Select the Smart SON Server IP to perform the RF environment analysis and
optimization.
TCE Address Private IP of the Smart SON Server
MME Name Select the MME to perform the call trace function.
Reference test Drive test which is the subject of comparison
Click the checkbox to compare the result of the reference test and the new drive
test drive test after completion of the drive test.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 489
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2 (Release 9)
[2] 3GPP 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol
specification (Release 9)
[3] 3GPP 36.902: E-UTRAN; Self-configuring and self-optimizing network (SON)
use cases and solutions
[4] 3GPP 32.500: E-UTRAN; Concepts & Requirements
[5] 3GPP 32.501: E-UTRAN; Self-configuration of network elements; OAM
Requirements for Self Configuration Use Cases
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 490
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
BENEFIT
By controlling the transmission power of the RRU depending on the network
status, possible to increase the whole network throughput.
By controlling the transmission power of the RRU depending on the network
status, possible to increase the edge UE throughput.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 491
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Architecture
The blocks related to Smart SON TPC include Smart SON Server (with Smart
Scheduler), Smart SON Manager (SSOM), eNB, and EMS and the whole
architecture is as follows:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 493
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Pre-condition
Interworking between eNB and Smart SON Server is required, and operational
state should be enabled.
Feature Activation
1 For TPC activation, confirmation and information input for the following TPC-
related PLD parameters through EMS are required.
aSet SON_TPC_FUNC_ENABLE value for TPC target eNB to Auto.
bSet SON_PWR_CTRL_ENABLE value for TPC target cell to Auto.
cFor the cell of eNB where SON_TPC_FUNC_ENABLE value is OFF,
SON_PWR_CTRL_ENALBE value cannot be set to Auto.
2 Configure PLD parameters related with RRH Tx Power determination algorithm.
aTLM TPC
Apply of Algorithm (TLM_PC_ENABLE = Auto)
Configuration of TLM TPC operation period
(TPUT_LOAD_PC_ENABLE)
Configuration of range of TLM TPC power change (POWER_RANGE)
bRoll-back function
Apply of Algorithm (STATS_CHECK_ENABLE = Auto)
Configuration of Roll-back operation period
(STATS_CHECK_PERIOD)
3 If DTO function is activated during TPC operation, operation of TPC function is
stopped and its state transits to suspend state.
Feature Deactivation
SON_TPC_FUNC_ENABLE value must be set to OFF.
Key Parameters
The operator may set and view the operating mode, either automatic or release, in
Samsung TPC by using the following commands and parameters:
CHG-SONFN-ENB/RTRV-SONFN-ENB
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 496
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Parameters Description
SON_TPC_FUNC_ENABLE Whether to enable the TPC (Tx. Power Control) SON function.
Off (0): TPC function is turned off.
Auto (1): TPC function is turned on.
The operator may set and view the Tx power changing mode, either automatic or
release, by using the following commands and parameters:
CHG-SONFN-CELL/RTRV-SONFN-CELL
Parameters Description
SON_PWR_CTRL_ENABLE Whether to enable the power control.
Off (0): Power change according to TPC function is turned off.
Auto (1): Power change according to TPC function is turned on.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 497
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2 (Release 9).
[2] 3GPP 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol
specification (Release 9).
[3] 3GPP 36.902: E-UTRAN; Self-configuring and self-optimizing network (SON)
use cases and solutions.
[4] 3GPP 32.500: E-UTRAN; Concepts & Requirements.
[5] 3GPP 32.501: E-UTRAN; Self-configuration of network elements; OAM
Requirements for Self Configuration Use Cases.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 498
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 499
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
BENEFIT
The operator can reduce CAPEX and OPEX cost consumed in the past to manage
the network status.
Because e-tilt is decided to optimize the coverage and capacity of each LTE cell,
the quality of the received signal is improved and the outage ratio is reduced.
(For ATO CCO operation with MDT information) If UE fail to report MDT
report message including location information, accuracy of ATO CCO
optimization results for the corresponding cell can be degraded.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Architecture
The blocks related to the Smart SON ATO CCO include Smart SON Server (with
Smart Scheduler), Smart SON Manager (SSOM), eNB, and EMS and the whole
architecture is as follows:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 501
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 502
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 503
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 504
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
oThe Smart SON Server collects serving/neighbor cell SRS information from
the Smart Scheduler during TOperiod.
oThe Smart SON Server collects the information on periodic MR (optional)
and PM statistics from eNBs during TOperiod.
Interface for statistic information collecting: FTP
6 Operating the function of monitoring change in air interface
oCalculate the detection parameter by using (5) information.
oDetermine change in the network by using the detection parameter.
oIf change in the network does not occur, the SSOM alarms the end of the
ATO CCO operation/Operate from (10).
oSelect the cell in the network change to the target to change tilt.
7 Determining the change in e-tilt
oCalculate the tilt optimization parameter by using (5) information.
oDetermine e-tilt change by using the tilt optimization parameter for the
selected cell.
oDetermine effectiveness and rollback of the changed e-tilt at the past interval.
oIf change in the e-tilt does not occur, the SSOM alarms the end of the ATO
CCO operation/Operate from (10).
8 Alarming change in e-tilt
oThe Smart SON server delivers the changed e-tilt to SSOM.
oThe SSOM transmits the change e-tilt to EMS.
oThe EMS transmits the changed e-tilt to eNB for apply the changed e-tilt
value to the RET. (E-tilt values of multi RET in eNB are applied in
parallel.)
9 Performing operation of the e-tilt optimization (repeatedly).
Perform (5) and (7)~ (9) every TOperiod.
10 Stopping operation of RQA
The SSOM request eNB to stop operation of the RQA.
11 Holding the operation until the next ATOperiod
Operation of ATO CCO with MDT Information
The following figure shows call flow of ATO CCO function (with MDT
information)
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 505
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
1 If one or more than one Smart SON function (ATO CCO, ATO COC, NCSR,
TPC) is in operation during network in service, following operations are
always performed:
eNB transmits PRB usage of each connected UE to Smart SON Server
Smart Scheduler transmits SRS Rx power and estimated value of NI per
connected UE to Smart SON Server
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 506
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 507
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
22 If SSOM that has determined network quality degradation and requested roll
back of e-til receives acknowledgment for the e-tilt roll back, SSOM transmits
roll back notification message to Smart SON Server.
23 If operator selects Deactivation through SSOM or the configured time expires,
SSOM generates MDT deactivation and request for statistics collection stop,
and it transmit those messages to LSM. In addition, SSOM generates MDT
data and UE based measurement collection stop request, and it transmit the
message to Smart SON Server.
24 LSM receiving MDT deactivation and request for statistics collection stop
transmits MDT deactivation request and statistic data collection stop messages
to eNBs for target cells of ATO CCO.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Pre-condition
The eNB should interwork with Smart SON Server, and operational state should
be enabled.
If Radio Quality Analysis (RQA) is activated by other function, current RQA
should be deactivated and RQA should be reactivated for the purpose of ATO.
In SSOM, LSM should be registered.
In LSM, Smart SON Server and MME should be registered.
(For ATO CCO operation without MDT information) If Radio Quality Analysis
(RQA) is currently running for other purpose, the current RQA operation
should be disabled and RQA should be rescheduled for the purpose of ATO
CCO.
(For ATO CCO operation with MDT information) Smart SON Server should be
registered in TCE table in order to enable MDT information collection in
Smart SON Server.
(For ATO CCO operation with MDT information) LTE-SO0901 Minimization
Drive Test Optimization (MDT) feature must be supported. (For detail
information on the MDT function, refer to the LTE-SO0901 feature
description and system operation.)
Feature Activation
1 In SSOM, MDT usage for ATO CCO should be configured by selecting Usage
of MDT.
oUsage of MDT is configured as On, MDT based ATO CCO is activated.
oUsage of MDT is configured as Of, MDT based ATO CCO is deactivated
and MR based ATO CCO operation will be performed.
2 For ATO CCO operation without MDT information (MR based ATO CCO
operation)
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 508
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
aBefore activation of ATO CCO, confirmation and information input for the
following ATO CCO-related PLD parameters are required.
SON_ATO_FUNC_ENABLE value must be set to Auto or Manual.
Setting of RQA related parameters
iRQA_ENALBE value must be set to On (1).
iiSMART_SON_ATO_FLAG value must be set to True.
iiiSTART_TIME_HOUR and START_TIME_MIN are configured with
start time of RQA is enabling.
bActivating ATO CCO function in SSOM.
Configure Usage of MDT to Off and click Register button on ATO
Schedule Job screen.
Configure Smart SON Server, Period, Schedule Term (ATOperiod), Start
At, Algorithm Term (TOperiod), and Call rate in SSOM GUI
Configuration.
3 For ATO CCO operation with MDT information
aBefore activation of ATO CCO, confirmation and information input for the
following ATO CCO-related/Tilt-related/MDT-related PLD parameters
are required.
SON_CCO_MDT_FUNC_ENABLE of SON_FUNC_ENB_CONTROL
PLD for ATO CCO target eNB must be set to Auto.
SON_TILT_CTRL_ENABLE of SON_FUNC_CELL_CONTROL PLD
for ATO CCO target cell must be set to Auto.
Attribute of SON_CCO_MDT_FUNC PLD for ATO CCO target eNB
should be configured by operator.
Attribute of ANTENNA_CONF PLD for ATO CCO target cell should be
configured by operator.
MGMT_BASED_IMMEDIATE_MDT_ALLOWED of
MDT_CTRL_PARA PLD for the ATO CCO target cell should be set
to True.
bActivate ATO CCO function through SSOM
Click registration button after selecting Usage of MDT to On and
configuring Period for MDT based ATO.
Click confirm button after configuring Smart SON Server, Period, Start
Time, MDT report UE ratio, Algorithm Type, Usage of Load Statistics
DB on ATO(CC) registration screen.
4 Apart from the configuration registered in SSOM, ATO CCO can be activated
by clicking ATO Start button.
5 ATO CCO is performed during network operation, and ATO CCO cannot
simultaneously operate with DTO.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 509
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Feature Deactivation
Delete configuration contents registered in SSOM.
Apart from the configuration registered in SSOM, operator can deactivate ATO
CCO function by clicking ATO Stop button.
For ATO CCO operation without MDT information (MR based ATO CCO
operation):
oSON_ATO_FUNC_ENABLE value must be set to Off and disabling RQA
function.
oRQA_ENALBE value must be set to Off (0).
oSMART_SON_ATO_FLAG value must be set to False.
For ATO CCO operation with MDT information:
oSON_CCO_MDT_FUNC_ENABLE value must be set to Off.
Key Parameters
The operator may set and view the operating mode, among automatic, manual or
release, in Smart SON ATO by using the following commands and parameters:
CHG-SONFN-ENB/RTRV-SONFN-ENB
Parameters Description
SON_ATO_FUNC_ENABLE Whether to enable the ATO (antenna tilt optimization) Coverage and
Capacity Optimization SON function without MDT information.
Off (0): The function is turned off.
Manual (1): When the parameter value is changed by an algorithm, this
change is reported to the LSM and then the operator determines manually
whether to apply the changed parameter value.
Auto (2): When the parameter value is changed by an algorithm, this change
is applied automatically.
SON_CCO_MDT_FUNC_ENA Whether to enable the MDT-based ATO (CCO) SON function, (one of the
BLE SON functions).
Off (0): The function is turned off.
Manual (1): When the parameter value is changed by an algorithm, this
change is reported to the LSM and then the operator determines manually
whether to apply the changed parameter value.
Auto (2): When the parameter value is changed by an algorithm, this change
is applied automatically.
The operator may set and view the e-tilt changing mode, either automatic or
release, in use of the RET by using the following commands and parameters:
CHG-SONFN-CELL/RTRV-SONFN-CELL
Parameters Description
SON_TILT_CTRL_ENABLE Whether to enable the Tilt control
Off (0): The function is turned off.
Auto (1): The parameter value is changed by an algorithm
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 510
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2 (Release 9)
[2] 3GPP 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol
specification (Release 9)
[3] 3GPP 36.902: E-UTRAN; Self-configuring and self-optimizing network (SON)
use cases and solutions
[4] 3GPP 32.500: E-UTRAN; Concepts & Requirements
[5] 3GPP 32.501: E-UTRAN; Self-configuration of network elements; OAM
Requirements for Self Configuration Use Cases
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 511
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 512
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
BENEFIT
By supporting operator to quickly detect cell outage, time required to recover
network operation can be reduced.
Cell outage compensation enables operator to continuously provide services to
the users located in cell outage area.
User can be provided service with short interruption time in case of cell outage
occurrence.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 513
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Architecture
The blocks related to the Smart SON ATO COC include Smart SON Server (with
Smart Scheduler), Smart SON Manager (SSOM), eNB, and EMS. Overall
architecture for Smart SON ATO COC is shown in the following figure.
In the above architecture, operation of each entity for Smart SON ATO COC is as
follows:
1 Smart SON Manager (SSOM)
oParameter configuration for ATO COC operation
iActivation/deactivation of ATO COC feature
iiMDT based ATO period (determination period of statistic based cell
outage detection)
iiiMDT Report Target UE selection ratio
oDetermination of Cell Outage Detection (COD)
ivPeriodic COD : Determination of COD based on statistics data from
EMS
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 514
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 515
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
aSmart SON Server selects COC target cells which will participate in COC
operation, by using RF map.
bSmart SON Server determines antenna tilts of COC target cells, which
maximizes average SINR of Cell Outage area.
5 Cell Outage Clear (COC)
aIf the cell outage is cleared, the values of antenna tilt of COC target cells
return to the values used before the cell outage occurs.
ATO COC call flow
Call flow of Smart SON ATO COC feature is as follows:
1 SSOM registers/activates ATO COC function.
2 If ATO COC function is activated by operator or schedule, SSOM requests
required operations for ATO COC to EMS and Smart SON server.
3 EMS requests eNB to perform MDT activation/statistic report if ATO COC
related operation is requested from SSOM.
4 Smart SON Server collects MDT data from eNB and SRS Rx power from Smart
Scheduler if activation of ATO COC function is requested from SSOM.
5 eNB transmits collected MDT and scheduling data to Smart SON Server at
every operational period.
6 EMS accumulates statistic information from eNB during the operational period,
and transmits the accumulated information to SSOM.
7 Smart SON Server receives SRS Rx power from Smart Scheduler at every 1.28
sec.
8 Smart SON server generates and updates RF information map at every
operational period based on the collected information.
9 SSOM determines cell outage by using statistic data collected after the end of
operational period.
10 If cell outage is detected, SSOM transmits request of COC operation along
with cell outage occurrence information to Smart SON Server (if operational
mode is set to manual, operators confirmation is required before performing
COC.) If cell outage is not detected, SSOM does not perform COC.
11 If COC operation request is delivered from SSOM, Smart SON server
calculates new e-tilt values of COC target cells for cell outage compensation
based on RF information map updated until current operational period.
12 Smart SON Server informs SSOM the newly calculated e-tilt values. Then,
SSOM requests EMS to apply the new e-tilt values.
13 EMS requests e-tilt adjustments to eNBs corresponding to the COC target cells.
14 If acknowledgment for e-tilt adjustment request is received by SSOM, SSOM
informs operator about the operation results.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 517
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Apart from the periodic COD operation, if EMS identifies that specific condition
(cell status disable) is maintained for certain time duration, EMS reports the
abnormal cell status to SSOM. Then, SSOM can detect cell outage based on the
report from EMS. In this case, procedures from 10) to 14) are performed for COC.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 518
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Pre-condition
The eNB should interwork with Smart SON Server, and operational state should
be enabled.
If MDT is activated by other function, current MDT should be deactivated and
MDT should be reactivated for COC with MDT function
In SSOM, EMS should be registered.
In EMS, Smart SON Server and MME should be registered.
In TCE table, Smart SON Server should be registered.
(For ATO COC operation with MDT information) LTE-SO0901 (Minimization
Drive Test Optimization, MDT) feature must be supported.
(For detail information on the MDT function, refer to the LTE-SO0901 feature
description and system operation.)
Feature Activation
1 Before activation of COC with MDT (ATO (COC)), confirmation and
information input for the following COC with MDT-related system parameters
are required.
aIn SON_FUNC_ENB_CONTROL relation, CocMdtFuncEn value must be
set to Autoapply or Manualapply.
bIn SON_FUNC_CELL_CONTROL relation, TiltCtrlEn value must be set to
Auto (enable).
cRequired setting for MDT activation must be activated.
2 Activating COC with MDT function in SSOM.
aSelect Usage of MDT
bInput the Period for MDT based ATO
cClick Register button on ATO Schedule Job screen.
dConfigure Smart Son Server, Overall duration of COC with MDT function
and Call rate for MDT in SSOM GUI Configuration.
3 COC with MDT is performed during network operation, and it can
simultaneously operate with CCO with MDT. But, it cannot simultaneously
operate with DTO and NCSR
Feature Deactivation
Delete configuration contents registered in SSOM.
COC with MDT-related system parameters are set as follows
In SON_FUNC_ENB_CONTROL relation, CocMdtFuncEn value must be set to
Off.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 519
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Key Parameters
The operator may configure or change the operation of the Smart SON ATO
(COC) by using the following configuration:
Parameters for GUI configuration
Parameters Description Unit
Smart Son Server Select a server to perform ATO operation. -
Period Select a period where ATO (COC) operation is performed. -
Start At ATO operation starting time -
MDT report UE ratio Ratio of calls for MDT %
Usage of MDT Usage of MDT -
Period for MDT based Periodic for COD -
ATO
The operator may set and view the operating mode, among automatic, manual or
release, in Smart SON COC with MDT by using the following commands and
parameters:
CHG-SONFN-ENB/RTRV-SONFN-ENB
Parameters Description
SON_COC_MDT_FU Whether to enable the Antenna Tilt Optimization (COC with MDT) SON function, (one
NC_ENABLE of the smart SON functions).
Off (0): The function is turned off.
Manual (1): When the parameter value is changed by an algorithm, this change is
reported to the SSOM and then the operator determines manually whether to apply
the changed parameter value.
Auto (2): When the parameter value is changed by an algorithm, this change is
applied automatically.
The operator may set and view the e-tilt changing mode, either automatic or
release, in use of the RET by using the following commands and parameters:
CHG-SONFN-CELL/RTRV-SONFN-CELL
Parameters Description
SON_TILT_CTRL_E Whether to enable the Tilt control
NABLE Off (0): The function is turned off.
Auto (1): The parameter value is changed by an algorithm
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 520
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2
[2] 3GPP 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol
specification
[3] 3GPP 36.902: E-UTRAN; Self-configuring and self-optimizing network (SON)
use cases and solutions
[4] 3GPP 32.500: E-UTRAN; Concepts & Requirements
[5] 3GPP 32.501: E-UTRAN; Self-configuration of network elements; OAM
Requirements for Self Configuration Use Cases
[6] 3GPP 32.422: Trace control and configuration management
[7] 3GPP 32.423: Trace data definition and management
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 521
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
BENEFIT
Improves the network throughput by selecting the optimal locations for small
cells based on the network status.
Releases macro overloads caused by expanded macro coverage and increased
subscribers.
Reduces operating expenses (OPEX) by automatically recommending the optimal
number and locations of small cells.
Improves the service quality of UEs in problematic areas by selecting the optimal
locations for small cells based on the network status.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 522
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
The UE must have MDT capabilities to acquire the location information and the
RF status.
Limitation
If UE fails to report its location information with MDT message, then the
accuracy decreases for that cell.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Architecture
The following figure shows the network architecture for Samsungs new cell site
recommendation solution. The main network entities (NEs) in this architecture
include the eNB, Smart Scheduler, LSM, and Smart SON Manager (SSOM).
The functions of the main NEs used in Samsungs new cell site recommendation
solution are as follows:
1 eNB
oCreates the network statistics (loading information, call drop rates).
oReceives call trace reports from UE.
oReports the collected information to the Smart Scheduler.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 523
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 524
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
1 eNB collects network service information (cell load and RLF information) of its
managing cells, and delivers the information to LSM.
2 SSOM determines whether detailed information collection due to coverage hole
or too heavy load is required or not (operation of new cell site
recommendation is required or not) based on the network service information
collected from LSM.
3 If SSOM determines that the operation of new cell site recommendation is
required, it transmits MDT activation to the cell with problem, and SSOM
transmits new cell site recommendation triggering to Smart SON Server.
4 Smart SON Server collects MDT and scheduling information.
5 Smart SON Server transmits MDT deactivation commend to SSOM, if all
information required for algorithm operation is collected.
6 SSOM transmits MDT deactivation to eNB for stopping MDT collection.
7 Smart SON Server determines the number of additional small cells to install and
the installation locations of the additional small cells to install.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 525
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
8 Smart SON Server reports the number of additional small cells to install and the
cells installation locations to the SSOM.
9 SSOM reports the number of additional small cells to install and the cells
installation locations to operator.
New Cell Site Recommendation Detailed Operation
1 Collecting Information
eNB collects its managing cells PRB usage and PRB usage per UE during
New Cell Site Recommendation period. Also, it reports the collected
information related with cell loading to SSOM in every New Cell Site
Recommendation period.
In addition, eNB acquires UEs RLF information during the same period, and
reports information of RLF occurred due to coverage hole to SSOM.
2 Determining Necessity of Additional Small Cell Installation
Necessity of additional installation of new small cell is triggered by following
two cases.
oTriggering by coverage hole
SSOM determines that cell in which RLF due to coverage hole does not
satisfy condition requires installation of new small cell.
oTriggering by too heavy loading
SSOM determines that cell having cell loading higher than pre-defined
level requires installation of new small cell.
If SSOM determines that the installation of new small cell is required, SSOM
transmits MDT activation to the cell with problem, and SSOM transmits new
cell site recommendation triggering to Smart SON Server.
3 Determining New Cell Site
In case that Samsung New Cell Site Recommendation function is performed,
LSM transmits trace activation message to MME and eNB. During MDT
information collecting duration, Smart SON Server collects RF information
and location information from MDT UE through eNB. In addition, if RLF
occurs, corresponding information is collected. Upon finishing MDT
information collecting duration, trace deactivate message is delivered to MME
and eNB.
Smart SON Server performs following operations to estimate problem location
based on collected information such as UE location, RSRP, and RSRQ.
oFor case of triggering due to coverage hole
iBinning the whole MDT area by specific size.
iiFor each bin, calculating the values of received RSRP and SINR for all
cells by averaging RF information in location corresponding to the bin.
iiiDetermining bins where network quality (RSRP or SINR) is lower than
specific threshold as problem area.
ivDetermining coverage radius of new small cell according to the Tx
power of the small cell.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 526
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
vLocating small cell at the bin having the worst network quality, and
determining whether the small cell can cover all adjacent problem
areas.
viIf the small cell cannot cover all of the problem areas, moving the
location of small cell to adjacent bin and determining whether the
small cell can cover all problem areas.
viiBin where the small cell can cover all adjacent problem areas is selected
as new cell site location.
viiiIf other problem area exists, increasing the number of additional small
cells by 1, and repeating procedures iii~vi.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 527
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
Smart SON Server reports determined number of new small cells and their
locations to SSOM.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
Smart SON New Cell Site Recommendation function has precedence over TPC
and ATO functions. If DTO function is activated, TPC and ATO stop their
operation and transit to suspend state.
Since DTO function has precedence over New Cell Site Recommendation function,
New Cell Site Recommendation function waits until operation of DTO function is
finished, if DTO function is currently running.
Pre-condition
eNB should interwork with Smart SON Server, and operational state should be
enabled.
In SSOM, LSM should be registered.
In LSM, Smart SON Server and MME should be registered.
For call trace at Smart SON Server, Smart SON Server should be included in
TCE table.
Feature Activation & Action
1 Before New Cell Site Recommendation activation, confirmation and information
input for the following related PLD parameters through EMS are required.
aSet SON_NCSR_FUNC_ENABLE value of optimization target eNBs
SON_FUNC_ENB_CONTROL PLD to Manual.
2 Activate New Cell Site Recommendation function in SSOM. If the function is
activated, RLF information and cell load information are collected to
determine whether new cell installation is required or not. If SSOM determines
that new cell installation is required, it is reported to operator.
3 If operator activates operation for new cell installation, Smart SON Server
collects MDT information and scheduling information.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 528
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 9 SON
4 After finishing the information collecting, Smart SON Server reports the number
of newly required cells and their locations to operator, and finishes operations
for MDT and scheduling information collecting.
Feature Deactivation
After reporting New Cell Site Recommendation operation to operator, operation
for additional cell installation is deactivated.
Key Parameters
CHG-SONFN-ENB/RTRV-SONFN-ENB
Parameters Description
SON_NCSR_FUNC_ENABLE Whether to enable the New Cell Site Recommendation SON function, (one of
the SON functions).
Off: The function is turned off.
Manual: When the parameter value is changed by an algorithm, the
operator determines manually whether to apply the changed parameter
value.
CHG-MDTCTRL-PARA/RTRV-MDTCTRL-PARA
Parameters Description
MGMT_BASED_IMMEDIATE This parameter shows the whether to permit to the Management Based
_MDT_ALLOWED Immediate MDT on demand.
False: Management Based Immediate MDT request is not allowed.
True: Management Based Immediate MDT request is allowed.
MDT_UE_PICKUP_RATE This parameter represents the selection rate which it uses when selecting the
Management Based MDT object UE. If the random number generated
between 0 is this value or less, select as MDT object UE.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2 (Release 9)
[2] 3GPP 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol
specification (Release 9)
[3] 3GPP 36.902: E-UTRAN; Self-configuring and self-optimizing network (SON)
use cases and solutions
[4] 3GPP 32.500: E-UTRAN; Concepts & Requirements
[5] 3GPP 32.501: E-UTRAN; Self-configuration of network elements; OAM
Requirements for Self Configuration Use Cases
[6] 3GPP 32.422: Trace control and configuration management
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 529
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and
Analysis
BENEFITS
This feature allows operator to analyze all the signaling messages transmitting and
receiving in a specific cell, which can be used for troubleshooting.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Samsung eNB provides 3GPP standard (TS 32.422 & 32.423) based Subscriber
and Equipment Trace. This feature performs tracing signalling interface messages
on all calls in the specific cell. The operator can control the cell traffic trace using
cell ID through LSM. If trace results are generated, eNB reports the results to TCE.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 530
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
When several PLMNs are supported in the RAN, for starting Trace eNB shall only
select UEs where the pLMNTarget = selectedPLMN-Identity that UE includes in
RRCConnectionSetup message 3GPP TS 36.331.
Management based trace procedure is as follows:
Management Based Trace Activation (New Call)
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 531
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
If a call ends normally by sending a RRC Connection Release message to UE, the
trace recording session for that call is ended. To stop tracing for the cell, the
deactivate trace message is send to eNB through LSM.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
The procedure for enabling cell traffic trace is as follows:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 532
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Key Parameters
RTRV-TCE-LIST/CHG-TCE-LIST/CRTE-TCE-LIST/DLT-TCE-LIST
Parameter Description
tceType This parameter represents the TCE server type and has to one of three below
values.
standAlone: TCE Server is standAlone Type.
lsmEmbedded: TCE Server is embedded in LSM
smartSon: TCE Server is for Smart SON server
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 533
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 534
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-
UTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP)
[3] 3GPP TS32.422 Telecommunication management; Subscriber and equipment
trace; Trace control and configuration management
[4] 3GPP TS32.423 Telecommunication management; Subscriber and equipment
trace; Trace data definition and management
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 535
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
BENEFITS
This feature allows operator to analyze the signaling messages transmitting and
receiving through S1-MME, X2 and Uu interfaces for a designated user, which can
be used for troubleshooting.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Samsung eNB provides 3GPP standard (TS 32.422 & 32.423) based Subscriber
and Equipment Trace.
This feature performs tracing signaling interface messages on a specific UE.
Also, this feature supports mobility. If Trace Activation IE is contained in the
Initial Context Setup Request message, or Trace Start message is received from
MME, the eNB starts a trace for the call. If Trace Activation IE is contained in the
Handover Request message received from the source eNB or MME in case of X2
or S1 Handover, eNB starts a trace for the call.
If trace results are generated, eNB reports the results to TCE.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 536
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 537
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
If a call ends normally by sending a RRC Connection Release message to UE, the
trace for that call is ended. To stop the tracing, the deactivate trace message is send
to eNB through MME.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
If Trace Activation IE is included in the Initial Context Setup Request message,
the Trace Start message or the Handover Request (S1/X2) message from MME,
the eNB starts trace for the call.
The operator can control the trace disable/resume threshold.
oIf CPU state is higher than disable threshold, trace will be paused.
oAfter trace disabled, CPU state is lower than resume threshold, trace will
restart.
Key Parameters
RTRV-TCE-LIST/CHG-TCE-LIST/CRTE-TCE-LIST/DLT-TCE-LIST
Parameter Description
tceType This parameter represents the TCE server type and has to one of three below
values:
standAlone: TCE Server is standAlone Type.
lsmEmbedded: TCE Server is embedded in LSM
smartSon: TCE Server is for Smart SON server
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 538
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 539
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
[2] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-
UTRAN); S1 application Protocol (S1AP)
[3] 3GPP TS32.422 Telecommunication management; Subscriber and equipment
trace; Trace control and configuration management
[4] 3GPP TS32.423 Telecommunication management; Subscriber and equipment
trace; Trace data definition and management
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 540
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
BENEFITS
The operator can analyze the detail information of a call.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
The CSL data is collected by eNB. When a call is setup, eNB starts to collect
information for the call. If the call is released, eNB reports CSL data to the
external server.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 541
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
The CSL data includes detail information for a call. It includes a total of 10
information items: call information, common item information, connection
information, release information, handover information, throughput information,
RF information, adjacency information, UE history information, and call
debugging information.
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
The operator can control to report the collected CSL information to external server
by executing the CHG-CSL-INFO COMMAND.
Key Parameters
RTRV-CSL-INF/CHG-CSL-INF
Parameter Description
DB_INDEX Index
CSL_SERVER The type of CSL Server.
REFERENCE
[1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall
description; Stage 2
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 542
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
BENEFIT
The operator can get benefits in analyzing the quality of VoLTE service and
identifying the cause and location of problems.
VoLTE quality monitoring: Loss, jitter, and delay
Identification of problem causes: Decompression failure due to RoHC error, loss,
duplicated packet, out-of-order, and delay
Isolation of the section that problems occur: UL air, backhaul + core network,
inter eNB, and DL air section
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Basic concept
The operator commands into EMS (Element Management System) to trigger the
collection of the information of VoLTE traffic (for some UEs or cells) at eNBs.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 543
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
The eNB, received the commands from EMS, collects the information of VoLTE
traffic as indicated and sends them to the EMS or external server.
The operator can monitor and analyze the quality of VoLTE traffic by post-
processing the collected data.
The following figure shows VoLTE monitoring:
S1-C S6a
MME HSS
Uu
S11 S7 PCRF
Operation Scenario
UE Trace
The operator can select several VoLTE UEs to be monitored by using
TraceReference. Therefore, end-to-end VoLTE quality from originating UE to
terminating UE can be monitored.
Before enable VoLTE monitoring tool, operator should know TraceReference of a
specific VoLTE UE to be monitored. (for example, from signal trace)
Cell trace
The operator can select cells, which are to be monitored by using specific cell ID.
Then random VoLTE UEs in a certain cell are monitored. Therefore, VoLTE
quality of a certain cell can be monitored.
The following figure shows flow chart and collected information:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 544
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
eNodeB EMS
g ON
Monitorin
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 545
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
To activate this feature, for UE based VoLTE monitoring, operator uses the
CHG-VOMA-UE command to register Trace Reference of the specific UE for
VoLTE Monitoring. It is noted that operator has to register signaling based
trace for this UE in advance, to retrieve Trace Reference. In case of each
VOMA_INDEX, different trace reference (=TRACE_REFERENCE_MCC +
TRACE_REFERENCE_MNC + TRACE_ID) will be assigned, if operator use
this trace reference, VOMA_USAGE will be set to EQUIP.
To activate this feature, for Cell level VoLTE monitoring, operator uses the
CHG-VOMA-CELL command to change VOMA_USAGE to EQUIP for a
specific Cell.
Key Parameters
CHG-VOMA-UE/RTRV-VOMA-UE
Parameter Description
VOMA_INDEX This attribute indicates Trace-Reference index which is on the VoMA
Trace.
VOMA_USAGE This attribute indicates the UE is used or not for VoMA Trace.
TRACE_REFERENCE_MCC It is MCC (Mobile Country Code) of the Trace Reference for which VoMA
trace is triggered.
For example, if the Trace Reference received by S1AP or X2AP message
is 43 58 07 00 34 D7, its BCD format PLMN ID is 43 58 07, and MCC is
348. (Reference : TS 32.423)
TRACE_REFERENCE_MNC It is MNC (Mobile Network Code) of the Trace Reference for which VoMA
trace is triggered.
For example, if the Trace Reference received by S1AP or X2AP message
is 43 58 07 00 34 D7, its BCD format PLMN ID is 43 58 07, and MNC is
570. (Reference : TS 32.423)
TRACE_ID This attribute indicates decimal format of Trace ID in the Trace Reference
for which VoMA trace is triggered. For example, if the trace reference
received by S1AP or X2AP message is 43 58 07 00 34 D7, its BCD
format PLMN ID is 43 58 07, and its Trace ID is 00 34 D7 in hexadecimal
format and stored in this attribute as decimal number13527. (Reference:
TS 32.423)
VOMA_QCI0 This attribute indicates the first VoMA Trace QCI.
VOMA_QCI0_MAX_LENGTH This attribute indicates maximum length, which includes PDCP header
and logging payload for QCI0.
VOMA_QCI1 This attribute indicates the first VoMA Trace QCI.
VOMA_QCI1_MAX_LENGTH This attribute indicates maximum length, which includes PDCP header
and logging payload for QCI1.
CHG-VOMA-CELL/RTRV-VOMA-CELL
Parameter Description
CELL_NUM Cell number
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 546
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Parameter Description
VOMA_USAGE This attribute indicates the cell is used or not for VoMA Trace.
VOMA_QCI0 This attribute indicates the first VoMA Trace QCI.
VOMA_QCI0_MAX_LENGTH This attribute indicates maximum length, which includes PDCP header
and logging payload for QCI0.
VOMA_QCI1 This attribute indicates the first VoMA Trace QCI.
VOMA_QCI1_MAX_LENGTH This attribute indicates maximum length, which includes PDCP header
and logging payload for QCI1.
REFERENCE
N/A
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 547
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
BENEFIT
The operator can monitor the following characteristics of service provided to the
end user.
Accessibility
Retainability
Integrity
Availability
Mobility
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
ACCESSIBILITY
ACCESSIBILITY
These KPIs show probability for the end-user to be provided with E-RAB at
request. The probability success rate for E-RAB establishment is calculated by
multiplying the probability success rates for different parts of E-RAB
establishment. The probability success rate for each part of E-RAB establishment
is calculated as successful attempts divided by total number of attempts.
The following table shows the formula:
Name Description
ErabAccessibilityInit = (SumRrcConnEstabSucc/SumRrcConnEstabAtt) Initial E-RAB establishment success
* (SumS1sigS1ConnEstabSucc/SumS1sigS1ConnEstabAtt) * rate
(SumErabEstabInitSuccNbr/SumErabEstabInitAttNbr) * 100%.
ErabAccessibilityAdd = Added E-RAB establishment
(SumErabEstabAddSuccNbr/SumErabEstabAddAttNbr) * 100%. success rate
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 548
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Name Description
E-RAB Connection Failure Rate = 0 if SumRrcConnEstabAtt = 0 OR Probability that the end-user is not
SumS1sigS1ConnEstabAtt = 0 OR SumErabEstabInitAttNbr = 0. provided with E-RAB at the initial
Otherwise, E-RAB Connection Failure Rate = 100 - request
(SumRrcConnEstabSucc/SumRrcConnEstabAtt) *
(SumS1sigS1ConnEstabSucc/SumS1sigS1ConnEstabAtt) *
(SumErabEstabInitSuccNbr/SumErabEstabInitAttNbr) * 100%
RACH_SUCCESS_RATE
These KPIs measure RACH success rate.
The following table shows the formula:
Name Description
NonHoRachSuccessRate = ((RachSumConnEstabSucc+ Non-Handover RACH success Rate
RachSumConnReEstabSucc)/(RachSumRandomlySelectedPreambles
Low + RachSumRandomlySelectedPreamblesHigh)) * 100 %
HoRachSuccessRate = ((RachSumIntraEnbInSucc + Handover RACH Success Rate
RachSumInterX2InSucc +
RachSumInterS1InSucc)/RachSumDedicatedPreambles) * 100 %
CONN_DROP_RATE
This KPI measures the ratio of number of abnormally terminated E-RABs to
number of successfully established E-RABs.
The following table shows the formula:
Name Description
ConnDropRate = Probability that the end-user
CdrRelActive/(CdrSumEstabInitSuccNbr+CdrEstabAddSuccNbr)*100 % abnormally loses E-RAB
SUCCESS_RATE
This KPI measures RRC success rate, ERAB success rate, and call drop rate based
on the RRC, ERAB, CALL_DROP, and HO statistics collected.
The following table shows the formula:
Name Description
RrcEstabSuccessRatio = The average success rate of
(SumRrcEstabSuccess/SumRrcEstabAttempt) * 100%. RRC_ESTAB.
ErabEstabSuccessRatio = (SumErabEstabSuccess/ The average success rate of
SumErabEstabAttempt) * 100%. ERAB_ESTAB.
CallDropRatio = (SumCallDrop_EccbDspAuditRlcMacCallRelease + The average call drop rate.
SumCallDrop_EccbRcvResetRequestFromEcmb +
SumCallDrop_EccbRcvCellReleaseIndFromEcmb +
SumCallDrop_EccbRadioLinkFailure +
SumCallDrop_EccbDspAuditMacCallRelease +
SumCallDrop_EccbArqMaxRetransmission +
SumCallDrop_EccbDspAuditRlcCallRelease +
SumCallDrop_EccbTmoutRrcConnectionReconfig +
SumCallDrop_EccbTmoutRrcConnectionReestablish +
SumCallDrop_EccbS1SctpOutOfService/SumEstabInitSuccNbr +
SumInterX2InSucc + SumInterS1InSucc + SumRatInSuccUTRAN) *
100 %.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 549
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
CONN_TIME
This KPI measures the connection setup time from RRC CONNECTION
REQUEST message to INITIAL CONTEXT SETUP RESPONSE message.
The following table shows the formula:
Name Description
ConnSetupTime = (ConnTimeConnEstabTimeTot + Elapsed time from transmitting RRC Connection
ConnTimeEstabTimeTot + Request to receiving Initial Context Setup Response
ConnTimeS1SigTimeTot)/(ConnTimeConnEstabTime
Cnt + ConnTimeEstabTimeCnt +
ConnTimeS1SigTimeCnt)
RETAINABILITY
RETAINABILITY
This KPI shows how often the end-user abnormally loses E-RAB during the time
of E-RAB is used.
The following table shows the formula:
Name Description
ErabRetainability = Number of E-RABs with data in a buffer that was
(SumRelActive/RetainSessionTimeUE) * 100. abnormally released, normalized with number of data
session time units.
RETAINABILITY_QCI
This KPI shows how often the end-user abnormally loses an E-RAB (per QCI)
during the time of E-RAB is used.
The following table shows the formula:
Name Description
ErabRetainability = The number by dividing the E-RAB Release count by
(RetainRelActive/RetainSessionTimeQci) * 100 %. E-RAB holding time.
INTEGRITY
INTEGRITY
These KPIs show how E-UTRAN impacts the service quality provided to the end-
user.
The following table shows the formula:
Name Description
EutranIpThroughput = E-UTRAN IP throughput per QCI
IntegrityEutranIpThroughputTot/IntegrityEutranIpThrou
ghputCnt
EutranIpLatency = E-UTRAN IP latency per QCI
IntegrityEutranIpLatencyTot/IntegrityEutranIpLatencyC
nt
CELL_THRU
These KPIs measure DL/UL cell throughput and DL/UL UE throughput.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 550
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
WEIGHTED_CQI
This KPI measures average channel quality indicator (CQI) reported by UEs.
The following table shows the formula:
Name Description
WeightedDLReceivedCQI = Average of channel quality indicator reported by UEs
SumWeightedDLReceivedCQI/SumDLReceivedCQI
AVAILABILITY
AVAILABILITY
This KPI measures the availability of E-UTRAN cell.
The following table shows the formula:
Name Description
EutranCellAvailability = ((CellAvailPmPeriodTime - Percentage of time the cell is considered available
ReadCellUnavailableTime)/CellAvailPmPeriodTime) *
100 %.
CELL_CAPACITY
This KPI measures the average simultaneous RRC-connected UE load per cell.
The Following table shows the formula:
Name Description
ConnNoUEAvg = The average RRC Connection Capacity rate (%) per
(ConnNoRrcAvg/ConnMaxCallCount) * 100 %. unit time.
ConnNoUEMax The maximum RRC Connection Capacity rate (%)
per unit time.
UsageNbrRbAvg = The average E-RAB Capacity rate (%) per unit time.
(UsageNbrErab/UsageMaxDrbCount) * 100 %.
UsageNbrRbMax The maximum E-RAB Capacity rate (%) per unit
time.
ConnNoRrcAvg The average RRC Connection per unit time.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 551
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Name Description
ConnMaxCallCount The average available call count in the cell.
UsageNbrErab The average number of E-RAB per unit time.
UsageMaxDrbCount The maximum available number of E-RAB in the cell.
ENB_CAPACITY
This KPI measures the average simultaneous RRC-connected UE load per eNB.
The following table shows the formula:
Name Description
EnbConnNoUEAvg = The average RRC Connection Capacity rate (%) per
(EnbConnNoRrcAvg/EnbMaxCallCount) * 100 %. unit time.
EnbConnNoRrcAvg The average RRC Connection per unit time.
EnbMaxCallCount The average available call count in eNB.
MOBILITY
MOBILITY
These KPIs measure E-UTRAN handover success rates.
The following table shows the formula:
Name Description
EutranMobilityHOIntra = Intra-eNB handover success rate
(sumHOIntra_Succ/sumHOIntra_Att) * 100 %.
EutranMobilityHOX2Out = Outgoing X2 handover success rate
(sumHOX2Out_Succ/sumHOX2Out_Att) * 100 %.
EutranMobilityHOX2In = Incoming X2 handover success rate
(sumHOX2In_Succ/sumHOX2In_Att) * 100 %.
EutranMobilityHOS1Out = Outgoing S1 handover success rate
(sumHOS1Out_Succ/sumHOS1Out_Att) * 100 %.
EutranMobilityHOS1In = Incoming S1 handover success rate
(sumHOS1In_Succ/sumHOS1In_Att) * 100 %.
EutranMobilityHOInterRatHrpd = Inter-RAT optimized HRPD handover success rate
(sumHOInterRatHrpd_Succ/sumHOInterRatHrpd_A
tt) * 100 %.
EutranMobilityHOInterRatUtranOut = Outgoing inter-RAT handover success rate
(sumHOInterRatUtranOut_Succ/sumHOInterRatUtr
anOut_Att) * 100 %.
EutranMobilityHOInterRatUtranIn = Incoming inter-RAT handover success rate
(sumHOInterRatUtranIn_Succ/sumHOInterRatUtran
In_Att) * 100 %.
EutranMobilityHOInter = ((sumHOS1Out_Succ + Outgoing handover success rate to an eNB of the same
sumHOX2Out_Succ)/(sumHOS1Out_Att + frequency
sumHOX2Out_Att)) * 100 %.
VOLTE_HO_SUCCESS_RATE
These KPIs measure VoLTE handover success rate.
The following table shows the formula:
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 552
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Name Description
VoLTE_IntraHoSuccessRate = VoLTE HO Intra Success rate
(SumVoLTE_IntraEnbSucc/SumVoLTE_IntraEnbAtt) *
100 %
VoLTE_X2HoSuccessRate = VoLTE HO X2 Success rate
(SumVoLTE_InterX2OutSucc/SumVoLTE_InterX2OutAtt)
* 100 %
VoLTE_S1HoSuccessRate = VoLTE HO S1 Success rate
(SumVoLTE_InterS1OutSucc/SumVoLTE_InterS1OutAtt)
* 100 %
LBHO_KPI
These KPIs measure load-balancing handover success rate.
The following table shows the formula:
Name Description
InterEnbHoSuccRatio = Inter-eNB load balancing handover success rate
(SumInterEnbMlbHoSucc/SumInterEnbMlbHoAtt) *
100 %
IntraEnbIntraCarrierGroupHoSuccRatio = Intra-eNB load balancing handover success rate to a
(SumIntraEnbIntraCarrierGroupMlbHoSucc/SumIntr separate carrier within the same eNB of the same
aEnbIntraCarrierGroupMlbHoAtt) * 100 % frequency due to load balancing
IntraEnbInterCarrierGroupHoSucRatio = Intra-eNB load balancing handover success rate to a
(SumIntraEnbInterCarrierGroupMlbHoSucc/SumIntr separate carrier within the same eNB of the different
aEnbInterCarrierGroupMlbHoAtt) * 100 % carrier group due to load balancing
SendbackHOSuccRatio = Handover success ratio by sendback in eNB
(SumSendbackHOSucc/SumSendbackHOAtt) *
100 %
SYSTEM OPERATION
N/A
REFERENCE
[1] LTE eNB Counter Description for SLR 5.0.
[2] 3GPP TS 32.450: Key performance indicators: Definitions.
[3] 3GPP TS 32.425: Performance measurements.
[4] 3GPP TS 32.404: Performance measurements: Definitions and templates.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 553
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
BENEFIT
The operator can get data to perform statistical analysis related to the following:
Air MAC performance
PRB utilization
Radio resource utilization
Random access performance
Hybrid ARQ performance
Adaptive modulation and coding performance
Carrier aggregation performance
eICIC performance
E-RAB session time
Received signal power statistics
Transmitted signal power statistics
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
AIR MAC PERFORMANCE
AIR_MAC_BYTES
Name Description
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 554
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Name Description
AirMacByteUl The sum of the size of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH during the
statistics period.
AirMacTtiUl The sum of sections that have MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH
during the statistics period.
AirMacUlThru Average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH.
AirMacUlEfctivThru Average size of MAC PDU of the section successfully received via PUSCH
during the statistics period.
AirMacByteDl The sum of the size of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK
among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period.
AirMacTtiDl The sum of sections that have MAC PDU successfully transmitted via PDSCH
during the statistics period.
AirMacDlThru Average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK
among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period.
AirMacDlEfctivThru Average size of MAC PDU of the section successfully transmitted via PDSCH
during the statistics period.
AirMacUlThruMin Minimum of the average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received via
PUSCH
AirMacUlThruMax Maximum of the average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received
via PUSCH
AirMacDlThruMin Minimum of the average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that
received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the
statistics period.
AirMacDlThruMax Maximum of the average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that
received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the
statistics period.
ULIpThruVol The cumulated number that indicates the sum of the sizes of MAC SDUs that
were successfully received through the PUSCH during the sample intervals of
all UEs in the collection interval.
ULIpThruTime The cumulated number of TTIs during the sample intervals of all UEs in the
collection interval.
ULIpThruAvg The calculated number that indicates the average per-second size which is
derived from that MAC SDUs that were successfully received through the
PUSCH during the sample intervals of all UEs is divided by TTIs during the
sample intervals in the collection interval.
AIR_MAC_BYTES_PLMN
Name Description
PLMNAirMacULByte The sum of the size of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH during the
statistics period.
PLMNAirMacULTti The sum of sections that have MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH
during the statistics period.
PLMNAirMacULThruAvg Average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH.
PLMNAirMacULEfctivThruA Average size of MAC PDU of the section successfully received via PUSCH
vg during the statistics period.
PLMNAirMacDLByte The sum of the size of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK
among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period.
PLMNAirMacDLTti The sum of sections that have MAC PDU successfully transmitted via PDSCH
during the statistics period.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 555
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Name Description
PLMNAirMacDLThruAvg Average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK
among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period.
PLMNAirMacDLEfctivThruA Average size of MAC PDU of the section successfully transmitted via PDSCH
vg during the statistics period
PLMNAirMacULThruMin Minimum of the average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received via
PUSCH
PLMNAirMacULThruMax Maximum of the average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received via
PUSCH
PLMNAirMacDLThruMin Minimum of the average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that
received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the
statistics period
PLMNAirMacDLThruMax Maximum of the average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that
received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the
statistics period
AIR_MAC_BYTES_PCELL
Name Description
AirMacULByte The sum of the size of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH during the
statistics period
AirMacULByteCnt AirMacULByte collection count
AirMacULTti The sum of sections that have MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH
during the statistics period
AirMacULThruAvg Average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH
AirMacULEfctivThruAvg Average size of MAC PDU of the section successfully received via PUSCH
during the statistics period
AirMacDLByte The sum of the size of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK
among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period
AirMacDLByteCnt AirMacDLByte collection count
AirMacDLTti The sum of sections that have MAC PDU successfully transmitted via PDSCH
during the statistics period
AirMacDLThruAvg Average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK
among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period
AirMacDLEfctivThruAvg Average size of MAC PDU of the section successfully transmitted via PDSCH
during the statistics period
AirMacULByteCurr The most recently collected AirMacByteUl value
AirMacDLByteCurr The most recently collected AirMacDLByte value
AirMacULThruMin Minimum of the average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received via
PUSCH
AirMacULThruMax Maximum of the average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received
via PUSCH
AirMacDLThruMin Minimum value of average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that
received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the
statistics period
AirMacDLThruMax Maximum value of average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that
received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the
statistics period
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 556
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
AIR_MAC_BYTES_SCELL
Name Description
AirMacULByte The sum of the size of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH during the
statistics period
AirMacULByteCnt AirMacULByte collection count
AirMacULTti The sum of sections that have MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH
during the statistics period.
AirMacULThruAvg Average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH.
AirMacULEfctivThruAvg Average size of MAC PDU of the section successfully received via PUSCH
during the statistics period
AirMacDLByte The sum of the size of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK
among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period
AirMacDLByteCnt AirMacDLByte collection count
AirMacDLTti The sum of sections that have MAC PDU successfully transmitted via PDSCH
during the statistics period
AirMacDLThruAvg Average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK
among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period
AirMacDLEfctivThruAvg Average size of MAC PDU of the section successfully transmitted via PDSCH
during the statistics period
AirMacULByteCurr The most recently collected AirMacByteUl value
AirMacDLByteCurr The most recently collected AirMacDLByte value
AirMacULThruMin Minimum of the average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received via
PUSCH
AirMacULThruMax Maximum of the average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received
via PUSCH
AirMacDLThruMin Minimum value of average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that
received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the
statistics period
AirMacDLThruMax Maximum value of average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that
received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the
statistics period
PRB UTILIZATION
PRB_QCI
Name Description
PrbDl The PRB usage used as downlink DTCH traffic
PrbUl The PRB usage used as uplink DTCH traffic
PRB_TOTAL
Name Description
TotPrbDLAvg The resource used for PDSCH/PDCCH transmission among the total downlink
resource
TotGbrPrbDLAvg Ratio of the resource used to transmit GBR traffic against the total downlink
resources.
TotNGbrPrbDLAvg Ratio of the resource used to transmit non-GBR traffic against the total downlink
resources.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 557
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Name Description
TotPrbULAvg The resource used for PUSCH transmission among the total uplink resource
TotGbrPrbULAvg Ratio of the resource used to transmit GBR traffic against the total uplink
resources.
TotNGbrPrbULAvg Ratio of the resource used to transmit non-GBR traffic against the total uplink
resources.
TotPucchPrbULAvg The resource used for PUCCH transmission among the total uplink resource
TotPucchPuschPrbULAvg The resource used for PUCCH/PUSCH transmission among the total uplink
resource
TotNgbrSCellPrbDLAvg Ratio of the resource used to transmit non-GBR traffic of SCell against the total
downlink resources.
PRB_TOTAL_PLMN
Name Description
TotPrbDl_PLMN Ratio of resource used for PDSCH/PDCCH transmission against the total PLMN
downlink resource available.
TotPrbDlMin_PLMN Minimum value of PLMNTotPrbDLAvg
TotPrbDlMax_PLMN Maximum value of PLMNTotPrbDLAvg
TotPrbUl_PLMN Ratio of resource used for PUSCH reception against the total PLMN uplink
resource available.
TotPrbUlMin_PLMN Minimum value of PLMNTotPrbULAvg
TotPrbUlMax_PLMN Maximum value of PLMNTotPrbULAvg
PRB_SMART
Name Description
TotPrbCsRatio The ratio of PRB to which coordinated scheduling is applied
TotPrbJtRatio The ratio of PRB to which joint transmission is applied
TotPrbDLAllocRatio The total ratio of allocated PRB
TotPrbCs Total count of PRB to which coordinated scheduling is applied
TotPrbJt Total count of PRB to which joint transmission is applied
TotPrbDLAvail Total count of available PRB
TotPrbDLAlloc Total count of allocated PRB
TotPrbNormRatio The ratio of PRB to which normal (excluding CS/JT) scheduling is applied based
on the total available PRB
TotPrbCsAllocRatio The ratio of PRB to which coordinated scheduling is applied based on the
allocated PRB
TotPrbJtAllocRatio The ratio of PRB to which Joint transmission is applied based on the allocated
PRB
TotPrbNormAllocRatio The ratio of PRB to which normal (excluding CS/JT) scheduling is applied based
on the allocated PRB
TotPrbNorm Total count of PRB to which normal (excluding CS/JT) scheduling is applied
PRB_FULL_UTILIZATION
Name Description
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 558
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Name Description
DLPrbFullUtilRatio The percentage of time during which all available PRBs for the downlink have
been assigned
ULPrbFullUtilRatio The percentage of time during which all available PRBs for the uplink have been
assigned
RRU_MEAS_NEW
Name Description
RruCceUsageDistDL1 Aggregation level1 of PDCCH DL grant
RruCceUsageDistDL2 Aggregation level2 of PDCCH DL grant
RruCceUsageDistDL4 Aggregation level4 of PDCCH DL grant
RruCceUsageDistDL8 Aggregation level8 of PDCCH DL grant
RruCceUsageDistUL1 Aggregation level1 of PDCCH UL grant
RruCceUsageDistUL2 Aggregation level2 of PDCCH UL grant
RruCceUsageDistUL4 Aggregation level4 of PDCCH UL grant
RruCceUsageDistUL8 Aggregation level8 of PDCCH UL grant
RruCceAllocationFailDLAvg The CCE allocation fail ratio of PDCCH DL grant
RruCceAllocationFailULAvg The CCE allocation fail ratio of PDCCH UL grant
RruPrbDLPcchAvg PCCH PRB Usage
RruPrbDLSrbAvg Downlink SRB (CCCH/DCCH) PRB Usage
RruPrbULSrbAvg Uplink SRB (CCCH/DCCH) PRB Usage
PDCCH
Name Description
Cfi1 The number of used CFI1
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 559
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Name Description
Cfi2 The number of used CFI2
Cfi3 The number of used CFI3
PDCCHCceUsedAgg1 The number of used aggregation level 1 for allocating PDCCH CCE
PDCCHCceUsedAgg2 The number of used aggregation level 2 for allocating PDCCH CCE
PDCCHCceUsedAgg4 The number of used aggregation level 4 for allocating PDCCH CCE
PDCCHCceUsedAgg8 The number of used aggregation level 8 for allocating PDCCH CCE
PDCCHCcePerUser The average number of allocated CCE per UE
ACTIVE_UE
Name Description
UEActiveDl The number of UEs satisfying one or more of the following conditions in a
continuous 20 ms interval (sampling occasion) is summed every 80 ms for each
QCI.
If there is a DRB which receives a buffer occupancy request from the RLC
If there is a DRB which receives an HARQ retransmission request when a
collection interval ends, the average is calculated by dividing the summed
number of UEs by the number of sampling occasions that occurred.
UEActiveDlTot Sum of UEActiveDLAvg collected
UEActiveUl The number of UEs satisfying one or more of the following conditions in a
continuous 20 ms interval is summed every 80 ms for each QCI.
If there is a DRB where the uplink data requested to be allocated using the
Buffer Status Report message is waiting
If there is a DRB which receives an HARQ retransmission request when a
collection interval ends, the average is calculated by dividing the summed
number of UEs by the number of sampling occasions that occurred.
UEActiveUlTot Sum of UEActiveULAvg collected
SumActiveUEDL This counter is the cumulated number per every TTI of DL DRB for each QCI
which receives a buffer occupancy request from the RLC or which has received
a HARQ retransmission request during the sampling period.
SumActiveUEUL This counter is the cumulated number per every TTI of UL DRB for each QCI
where the uplink data requested to be allocated using the Buffer Status Report
message is waiting or which received an HARQ retransmission request.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 560
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
UE_LIMIT_TA_INITIAL_ATTACH
Name Description
RARFailByTaLimitation The number of not-transmitted RARs due to TA Threshold in UE Initial Attach. If
taBasedUeLimitFlag is set as 1 and if the TA value assumed by BTS after
receiving preamble is larger than taThresholdForAttach, RAR is not transmitted
for the preamble.
DL Reception subframe i at UE
UL transmission subframe i at UE
TA
TA = (N TA +N TA offset).Ts seconds
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 561
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 562
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Name Description
TimeAdvanceSection0 Distance (meter): 0~200, 16TS: from 0 to 2.
TimeAdvanceSection1 Distance (meter): 201~400, 16TS: from 3 to 5.
TimeAdvanceSection20 Distance (meter): 10001~, 16TS: from 127 to 1282.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 563
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 564
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Name Description
HOTimeAdvanceSection0 The cumulated count of the case that TA of RACH success UE in handover
is between 0 and 2.
HOTimeAdvanceSection1 The cumulated count of the case that TA of RACH success UE in handover
is between 3 and 5.
HOTimeAdvanceSection20 The cumulated count of the case that TA of RACH success UE in handover
is between 127 and 1282.
Carrier Aggregation
In case of carrier aggregation, as uplink CA is not supported, timing advance value
for the PCell is pegged for all of the TA OM groups defined above.
HYBRID ARQ PERFORMANCE
TRANSMISSION
Name Description
DlResidualBLER_Retrans0 PDSCH BLER for the initial HARQ transmission.
DlResidualBLER_Retrans1 PDSCH BLER for the first HARQ retransmission.
DlResidualBLER_Retrans2 PDSCH BLER for the second HARQ retransmission.
DlResidualBLER_Retrans3 PDSCH BLER for the third HARQ retransmission.
DlTransmission_Retrans0 Number of initial PDSCH HARQ transmissions
DlTransmission_Retrans1 Number of first PDSCH HARQ retransmissions
DlTransmission_Retrans2 Number of second PDSCH HARQ retransmissions
DlTransmission_Retrans3 Number of third PDSCH HARQ retransmissions
DlTransmission_Nacked_Retran Number of third PDSCH HARQ retransmission failures
s3
UlResidualBLER_Retrans0 PUSCH BLER for the initial HARQ retransmission.
UlResidualBLER_Retrans1 PUSCH BLER for the first HARQ retransmission.
UlResidualBLER_Retrans26 PUSCH BLER for the twenty sixth HARQ retransmission.
UlResidualBLER_Retrans27 PUSCH BLER for the twenty seventh HARQ retransmission.
UlTransmission_Retrans0 Number of initial PUSCH HARQ transmissions
UlTransmission_Retrans1 Number of first PUSCH HARQ retransmissions
UlTransmission_Retrans2 Number of second PUSCH HARQ retransmissions
UlTransmission_Retrans26 Number of twenty sixth PUSCH HARQ retransmissions
UlTransmission_Retrans27 Number of twenty seventh PUSCH HARQ retransmissions
UlTransmission_Nacked_Retran Number of twenty seventh PUSCH HARQ retransmissions
s27
DlResidualBLER_RetransAvg Average of distribution for DLResidualBLERRetrans.
UlResidualBLER_RetransAvg Average of distribution for ULResidualBLERRetrans.
DlResidualBLER_RetransNak PDSCH BLER for HARQ NACK.
UlResidualBLER_RetransNak PUSCH BLER for HARQ NACK.
DlResidualBLER_RetransMin Minimum value of DLResidualBlerRetrans
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 565
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Name Description
DlResidualBLER_RetransMax Maximum value of DLResidualBlerRetrans
UlResidualBLER_RetransMin Minimum value of ULResidualBlerRetrans
UlResidualBLER_RetransMax Maximum value of ULResidualBlerRetrans
MIMO
Name Description
PdschBLERperLayer PDSCH BLER for each layer
PuschBLERperLayer PUSCH BLER for each layer
MIMO_NEW
Name Description
PdschTransmissionPerLayer Transmission count per layer for PDSCH
PdschErrorPerLayer PDSCH error count for each layer
PuschTransmissionPerLayer Transmission count per layer for PUSCH
PuschErrorPerLayer PUSCH error count for each layer
MCS
Name Description
PdschBLERperMCS0 PDSCH BLER transmitted to MCS 0
PdschBLERperMCS1 PDSCH BLER transmitted to MCS 1
PdschBLERperMCS30 PDSCH BLER transmitted to MCS 30
PdschBLERperMCS31 PDSCH BLER transmitted to MCS 31
PuschBLERperMCS0 PUSCH BLER received from MCS 0
PuschBLERperMCS1 PUSCH BLER received from MCS 1
PuschBLERperMCS30 PUSCH BLER received from MCS 30
PuschBLERperMCS31 PUSCH BLER received from MCS 31
UlReceivedMCS0 The number of times PUSCH of MCS 0 is received
UlReceivedMCS1 The number of times PUSCH of MCS 1 is received
UlReceivedMCS30 The number of times PUSCH of MCS 30 is received
UlReceivedMCS31 The number of times PUSCH of MCS 31 is received
DlSchedulerMCS0 The number of PRBs assigned to PDSCH MCS 0
DlSchedulerMCS1 The number of PRBs assigned to PDSCH MCS 1
DlSchedulerMCS30 The number of PRBs assigned to PDSCH MCS 30
DlSchedulerMCS31 The number of PRBs assigned to PDSCH MCS 31
UlSchedulerMCS0 The number of PRBs assigned to PUSCH MCS 0
UlSchedulerMCS1 The number of PRBs assigned to PUSCH MCS 1
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 566
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Name Description
UlSchedulerMCS30 The number of PRBs assigned to PUSCH MCS 30
UlSchedulerMCS31 The number of PRBs assigned to PUSCH MCS 31
DL_ACK_NACK_DTX_RATIO
Name Description
DlreceivedAckNackDtxRatio ACK, NACK, DTX ratio
DL_LAYER
Name Description
DlTransmittedLayer Transmission counts per layer for PDSCH
DL_CQI
Name Description
DLReceivedCQI0 The number of times that CQI 0 is received per layer/codeword
DLReceivedCQI1 The number of times that CQI 1 is received per layer/codeword
DLReceivedCQI2 The number of times that CQI 2 is received per layer/codeword
DLReceivedCQI3 The number of times that CQI 3 is received per layer/codeword
DLReceivedCQI4 The number of times that CQI 4 is received per layer/codeword
DLReceivedCQI5 The number of times that CQI 5 is received per layer/codeword
DLReceivedCQI6 The number of times that CQI 6 is received per layer/codeword
DLReceivedCQI7 The number of times that CQI 7 is received per layer/codeword
DLReceivedCQI8 The number of times that CQI 8 is received per layer/codeword
DLReceivedCQI9 The number of times that CQI 9 is received per layer/codeword
DLReceivedCQI10 The number of times that CQI 10 is received per layer/codeword
DLReceivedCQI11 The number of times that CQI 11 is received per layer/codeword
DLReceivedCQI12 The number of times that CQI 12 is received per layer/codeword
DLReceivedCQI13 The number of times that CQI 13 is received per layer/codeword
DLReceivedCQI14 The number of times that CQI 14 is received per layer/codeword
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 567
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Name Description
DLReceivedCQI15 The number of times that CQI 15 is received per layer/codeword
DLReceivedCQIMin Minimum value of DLReceivedCQI
DLReceivedCQIMax Maximum value of DLReceivedCQI
DLReceivedCQIAvg Average value of DLReceivedCQI
DL_CQI_NEW
Name Description
DlReceivedCQIAvg Average value of DL received CQI
DlReceivedCQI0 The number of times that CQI 0 is received per layer/codeword
DlReceivedCQI1 The number of times that CQI 1 is received per layer/codeword
DlReceivedCQI14 The number of times that CQI 14 is received per layer/codeword
DlReceivedCQI15 The number of times that CQI 15 is received per layer/codeword
DlReceivedCQIMin Minimum value of DLReceivedCQI
DlReceivedCQIMax Maximum value of DLReceivedCQI
CQIErase Number of times layer/codeword CQI is erased
DL_CQI_NEW_PCELL
Name Description
DLReceivedCQI0 Number of receiving CQI 0 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword
transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is PCell
DLReceivedCQI1 Number of receiving CQI 1 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword
transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is PCell
DLReceivedCQI14 Number of receiving CQI 14 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword
transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is PCell
DLReceivedCQI15 Number of receiving CQI 15 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword
transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is PCell
DLReceivedCQIMin The minimum value of DlReceivedCQI received from CA UE whose cell is
PCell
DLReceivedCQIMax The maximum value of DlReceivedCQI received from CA UE whose cell is
PCell
DLReceivedCQIAvg The average value of DlReceivedCQI received from CA UE whose cell is
PCell
CQIErase Number of times that CQI erase per layer/codeword is received from CA UE
whose cell is PCell
DL_CQI_NEW_SCELL
Name Description
DLReceivedCQI0 Number of receiving CQI 0 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword
transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell
DLReceivedCQI1 Number of receiving CQI 1 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword
transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 568
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Name Description
DLReceivedCQI14 Number of receiving CQI 14 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword
transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell
DLReceivedCQI15 Number of receiving CQI 15 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword
transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell
DLReceivedCQIMin The minimum value of DlReceivedCQI transmitted from CA UE whose the cell
is SCell
DLReceivedCQIMax The maximum value of DlReceivedCQI transmitted from CA UE whose the
cell is SCell
DLReceivedCQIAvg The average value of DlReceivedCQI transmitted from CA UE whose the cell
is SCell
CQIErase Number of times that CQI erase per layer/codeword is received from CA UE
whose cell is SCell
DL_SUBBAND_CQI
Name Description
DLReceivedSubband0CQI0 The number of times that CQI 0 of subband0 is received
DLReceivedSubband0CQI1 The number of times that CQI 1 of subband0 is received
DLReceivedSubband0CQI14 The number of times that CQI 14 of subband0 is received
DLReceivedSubband0CQI15 The number of times that CQI 15 of subband0 is received
DLReceivedSubband0CQIMi The minimum value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband0
n
DLReceivedSubband0CQIMa The maximum value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband0
x
DLReceivedSubband0CQIAv The average value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband0
g
Subband0CQIErase The number of times that CQI erase of subband0 is received
DLReceivedSubband1CQI0 The number of times that CQI 0 of subband1 is received
DLReceivedSubband1CQI1 The number of times that CQI 1 of subband1 is received
DLReceivedSubband1CQI14 The number of times that CQI 14 of subband1 is received
DLReceivedSubband1CQI15 The number of times that CQI 15 of subband1 is received
DLReceivedSubband1CQIMi The minimum value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband1
n
DLReceivedSubband1CQIMa The maximum value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband1
x
DLReceivedSubband1CQIAv The average value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband1
g
Subband1CQIErase The number of times that CQI erase of subband1 is received
DLReceivedSubband11CQI0 The number of times that CQI 0 of subband11 is received
DLReceivedSubband11CQI1 The number of times that CQI 1 of subband11 is received
DLReceivedSubband11CQI1 The number of times that CQI 14 of subband11 is received
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 569
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Name Description
4
DLReceivedSubband11CQI1 The number of times that CQI 15 of subband11 is received
5
DLReceivedSubband11CQIM The minimum value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband11
in
DLReceivedSubband11CQIM The maximum value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband11
ax
DLReceivedSubband11CQIA The average value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband11
vg
Subband11CQIErase The number of times that CQI erase of subband11 is received
DLReceivedSubband12CQI0 The number of times that CQI 0 of subband12 is received
DLReceivedSubband12CQI1 The number of times that CQI 1 of subband12 is received
DLReceivedSubband12CQI1 The number of times that CQI 14 of subband12 is received
4
DLReceivedSubband12CQI1 The number of times that CQI 15 of subband12 is received
5
DLReceivedSubband12CQIM The minimum value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband12
in
DLReceivedSubband12CQIM The maximum value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband12
ax
DLReceivedSubband12CQIA The average value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband12
vg
Subband12CQIErase The number of times that CQI erase of subband12 is received
DL_PMI
Name Description
DlReceivedPMI0 The number of times that PMI 0 is received
DlReceivedPMI1 The number of times that PMI 1 is received
DlReceivedPMI14 The number of times that PMI 14 is received
DlReceivedPMI15 The number of times that PMI 15 is received
DL_RI
Name Description
DlReceivedRIAvg Average value of DL received RI
DlReceivedRI0 Reserved
DlReceivedRI1 The number of times that RI 1 is received
DlReceivedRI2 The number of times that RI 2 is received
DlReceivedRI3 The number of times that RI 3 is received
DlReceivedRI4 The number of times that RI 4 is received
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 570
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
CA_ACT_INFO
Name Description
SCellActUEAvg The average number of Scell activated UEs
SCellActivatedTime The total time of Scell activated time
EICIC PERFORMANCE
EICIC_ABS
Name Description
AvgABSNum Average ABS number
ABSBin0 The ratio of not using ABS pattern
ABSBin5 The using ratio of ABS pattern used 5/40 as ABS ratio
ABSBin6 The using ratio of ABS pattern used 6/40 as ABS ratio
ABSBin22 The using ratio of ABS pattern used 22/40 as ABS ratio
ABSBin23 The using ratio of ABS pattern used 23/40 as ABS ratio
ERAB_SESSION_QCI
Name Description
SessionTimeQciAvg Average in-session time per QCI
SessionTimeQciTot Sum of SessionTime SessionTimeQciAvg collected
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 571
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
RNTP
Name Description
RntpOwnCell_PRB0 RNTP of downlink PRB #0
RntpOwnCell_PRB1 RNTP of downlink PRB #1
RntpOwnCell_PRB98 RNTP of downlink PRB #98
RntpOwnCell_PRB99 RNTP of downlink PRB #99
RU_RSSI
Name Description
RuRssiAvg The average values of RSSI
RuRssiMax The maximum values of RSSI
RuRssiCurr The most recently collected RSSI values
RuRssiTot The total sum of the RSSI values
RuRssiCnt Number of times that the RSSI values were collected
IIU_RSSI
Name Description
IiuRssiAvg The average values of RSSI
IiuRssiMax The maximum values of RSSI
IiuRssiCurr The most recently collected RSSI values
IiuRssiTot The total sum of the RSSI values
IiuRssiCnt Number of times that the RSSI values were collected
RRH_RSSI
Name Description
RrhRssiAvg The average values of RSSI for each RRH path
RrhRssiMax The maximum values of RSSI for each RRH path
RrhRssiCurr The most recently collected RSSI values for each RRH path
RrhRssiTot The total sum of the RSSI linear values for each RRH path
RrhRssiCnt Number of times that the RSSI values were collected for each RRH path
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 572
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Name Description
RrhRssidBmAvg The average values of RSSI dBm for each RRH path
RrhRssidBmTot The total sum of the RSSI dBm values for each RRH path
RrhRssidBmCnt Number of times that the RSSI dBm values were collected for each RRH path
RSSI_PATH
Name Description
RssiPathAvg The average value of RSSI for each path
RssiPathMax The maximum value of RSSI for each path
RssiPathCurr The most recently collected RSSI values for each path
RssiPathTot Sum of RSSI values for each path
RssiPathCnt RSSI values collection count for each path
IOT
Name Description
IotAvg IoT Average
IotMin IoT Min
IotMax IoT Max
UL_SINR_DISTRIBUTION
Name Description
SinrDistULWbPreComp_Bin0 Uplink SINR Bin0 (-10~-8 dB) count before Outer-loop compensation
SinrDistULWbPreComp_Bin1 Uplink SINR Bin1 (-8~-6 dB) count before Outer-loop compensation
SinrDistULWbPreComp_Bin18 Uplink SINR Bin18 (26~28) count before Outer-loop compensation
SinrDistULWbPreComp_Bin19 Uplink SINR Bin19 (28~30) count before Outer-loop compensation
SinrDistULWbPostComp_Bin0 Uplink SINR Bin0 (-10~-8 dB) count after Outer-loop compensation
SinrDistULWbPostComp_Bin1 Uplink SINR Bin1 (-8~-6 dB) count after Outer-loop compensation
SinrDistULWbPostComp_Bin1 Uplink SINR Bin18 (26~28 dB) count after Outer-loop compensation
8
SinrDistULWbPostComp_Bin1 Uplink SINR Bin19 (28~30 dB) count after Outer-loop compensation
9
PUCCH_SINR_DISTRIBUTION
Name Description
PUCCHSinrDistBin0 The cumulated number of PUCCH SINR Bin0 (-10~-8 dB).
PUCCHSinrDistBin1 The cumulated number of PUCCH SINR Bin1 (-8~-6 dB).
PUCCHSinrDistBin19 The cumulated number of PUCCH SINR Bin19 (28~30 dB).
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 573
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
PUSCH_TX_POWER
Name Description
PhrRxCount This counter is cumulated by 1 when PHR is received.
TxPowerSum This counter is cumulated by the PUSCH Tx Power when PHR is received.
PowerLimitCount This counter is cumulated by 1 if (PHR index - 23) is less than 0 when PHR is
received.
AveragePuschTxPower Average PUSCH transmission power
PowerShortageRatio Percentage of received PHRs with PHR index - 23 < 0.
UE_TX_POWER
Name Description
PuschRbCountAvg Number of average uplink RBs except PUCCH RB
PuschRbCountTot Number of accumulated uplink RBs except PUCCH RB
PuschRbCountCnt Count of PuschRbCountAvg called
UETxPowerPrbAvg Average UE TX Power on RB
UETxPowerPrbTot Accumulated UE TX Power on RB
UETxPowerPrbCnt Count of UETxPowerPrbAvg called
AllocCount Number of RBs allocated for PUSCH
RRH_UE
Name Description
RrhUE The number of UEs per RRH
Count when UE operates PRACH process. Count when RRH receives MSG3
In the same RRH, when UE operates PRACH process, duplicate count may
occur.
During measurement period, when UE does not operate PRACH process, the
corresponding UE is not counted for this counter. (Specifically, when UE
moves between main cell and copy cell and, it does not operate PRACH
process, the corresponding UE is not counted for this counter)
RF
Name Description
RuGain RU Gain
RuGainCnt a number of collection of RuGain
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 574
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Name Description
TxRfPower Tx RF Power
TxRfPowerCnt a number of collection of TxRfPower
OverpowerAlarmThr Overpower alarm threshold
OverpowerAlarmThrCnt a number of collection of OverpowerAlarmThr
LowpowerAlarmThr Lowpower alarm threshold
LowpowerAlarmThrCnt a number of collection of LowpowerAlarmThr
RfTemp RF Temperature
RfTempCnt a number of collection of RfTemp
TX_DIGITAL_IQ
Name Description
TxDigitalIq Tx Digital I/Q
TxDigitalIqCnt a number of collection of TxDigitalIq
SMART_SON_TX_POWER
Name Description
SmartSon_TxPowerAvg The Average value of Tx Power
SmartSon_TxPowerMax The Maximum value of Tx Power
SmartSon_TxPowerMin The Minimum value of Tx Power
SmartSon_TxPowerTot The total sum of Tx Power
SmartSon_TxPowerCnt Number of times that the TxPower values were collected
SYSTEM OPERATION
How to Activate
This feature is basically enabled. The statistical data are collected during eNB
operation and transmitted to LSM.
Key Parameters
There are no related parameters
REFERENCE
[1] LTE eNB System Counter Description_SLR4.5.0.
[2] 3GPP TS 32.450: Key performance indicators: Definitions.
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 575
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis
Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 576
Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Samsung eNB (LTE)
Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0